Home

User`s Manual

Contents

1. 34 4 Allow Online Operations 4 5 Altitude Range 2 9 Angle Unit 5 9 Angle Off Boresight Custom Sensor B 9 Angular Rate 648 9 12 Animating a Scenario 3 18 Animation 54 Animation amp Vehicle Tracks 3 18 Animation Time Steps 3 4 Antennas Parabolic 12 4 Any Of 18 7 Apogee 14 10 Apogee Altitude 6 5 Apogee Radius 6 5 Application Exiting the Application 2 3 IPC Preferences 4 3 Online Operations 4 5 Properties ofp _______4 Save Prefs 4 2 Applications External 2 15 2 16 Archive Date 14 13 Area Exposed to Sun 13 16 Area Targets Access 1 3 3 Attributes 10 6 Basic Constraints 10 7 Basic Properties Boundary 10 2 Centroid 10 3 Constraints 1 0 7 Basic 1 0 7 Temporal
2. The fields available in the LOP Force Model window are described in the table following Table 10 Force model options Option Description Earth Gravity Specify e Maximum Degree The maximum degree of Geopotential coefficients to be included for Earth gravity computations Valid range is from 2 to 210 e Maximum Order The maximum order of Geopotential coefficients to be included for Earth gravity computations Valid range is from 0 to the Maximum Degree Drag Specify all of the following C Coefficient of drag Advanced Settings Refer to section immediately following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 19 Satellites Option Description Third Body Choose to include one or both Gravity Solar Gravity Effects of solar gravity on the satellite Lunar Gravity Effects of lunar gravity on the satellite Solar Radiation If ON specify the coefficient of solar radiation pressure and the Pressure atmospheric height Physical Data Specify e Drag Crosssectional Area The satellite s cross sectional area to be used in atmospheric drag calculations SRP Cross sectional Area The satellite s cross sectional area to be used in solar radiation pressure calculations e Mass The mass of the satellite to be used in atmospheric drag and solar radiation pressure calculations The size of the gravity field used greatly affects the time required to compute the orbi
3. 6 20 LOP Module 1 13 Lunar Elevation Angle 6 51 9 15 Lunar Exclusion Angle 6 51 6 52 9 15 12 22 12 23 Lunar Gravity 6 17 6 20 M Magnitude 1 1 2 Making Choices in STK 2 18 Map Azimuthal Equidistant 3 1 1 Details 3 6 Equidistant Cylindrical 3 10 Hammer Aitoff 3 1 1 Mercator 3 10 Mill 3 11 Mollweide 3 1 1 Orthographic 3 11 Perspective 3 10 Projections 3 9 Sinusoidal 3 1 1 Stereographic 3 1 1 Text Annotation 3 15 Map Attribbutes 3 5 Scroll Bars 3 6 Show Status Bar 3 6 Show Terrain Regions 3 6 Show Tool Bar 3 6 Map Background 3 14 Map Details Tab 3 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Map Projection Center Point 3 1 3 Map Projections 3 9 Map Properties 35 Map Attributes 3 5 Map Backgroun
4. Azimuth and Elevation Rates aren t available constraints for satellites Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 47 Satellites Abbreviations in the Contraints apply to column are as follows F facility T target V all vehicles S satellite M missile L launch vehicle G ground vehicle A aircraft B ship N sensor P planet star R area target Table 6 21 Satellite basic constraints Fields Description Constraint applies to Min Max Azimuth Azimuth is measured in the plane F T R P V Angle perpendicular to nadir from the projection of the inertial velocity vector to the projection of the relative position vector This angle is measured in a positive manner according to the right hand rule about the nadir vector An azimuth of 0 specifies a location directly in front of the satellite and an azimuth of 180 specifies a location directly behind the satellite Min Max Elevation is measured as the angle between the F T R P V Elevation Angle nadir vector and the relative position vector minus 90 The elevation angle is positive for objects above the plane perpendicular to nadir A drawing illustrating the elevation angle is provided in Figure 6 2 Min Max Range The range is measured as the distance between F T V the two objects Min Max Range Range rate is the component of the relative F T V Rate velocity al
5. 2 5 Orbits per Calculation 13 18 Object Ordering Chain Objects 18 4 Objects Orientation Type 6 34 Al Orthographic Projection 3 1 1 Describing __2 17 Osculating Ellipse 6 1 4 Facility 9 1 Output Attitude File 6 36 Output Device 2 12 sound Vehicles 7 A 1410 a n Owner Mission File Format C 24 Inserting as Links 2 8 Missiles 3 1 P New ES Page Layout 2 12 2 14 Planets 11 Pair wise Analysis 18 2 18 10 Properties 2 15 Parabolic Antennas 124 Removing 240 Parabolic Orbit 6 15 Parallax 1 1 3 Satellites _______6 A a EE 2 Saving 238 Pass Break 6 38 Pass Labels 5 15 l 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Paste Function 2 15 Penumbra _ 5 17 13 12 Perigee 1410 Perigee Altitude 6 5 Perigee Radius 6 5 Period 14 10 Persisterice 12 19
6. OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 11 Scenarios The options in the Database tab are described in the table following Table 54 Database options Option Database Type Database Defaults Auxiliary Database Description Choose among City Facility Satellite and Star Specify the name of the database to be used and the directory in which it is located If you wish to use a database in addition to the one specified in the Database Defaults field turn the Use Auxiliary Database option ON and specify the database name and location The database must conform to STK s format a Basic Properties Terrain Terrain The Terrain tab allows you to select terrain elevation data for facility and target azimuth elevation mask and position SW Comer 41 000000 11 000000 41 800000 14 350000 47 000000 14 500000 47 000000 12 000000 41 800000 14 350000 47 000000 14 500000 47 000000 12 000000 44 833333 15 786667 37 738500 126 984900 5 12 Tutorial40 Basic Properties Time Period Animation Units Database Environment Terrain Description NE Corner Resolution Location 47 000000 45 870000 46 000000 48 000000 45 870000 48 000000 49 000000 45 105833 37 761500 25 000000 98 630137 yugo dte 20 410000 77 082353 nyugo dte 15 500000 57 142857 test4 dte 14 000000 56 592313 test dte 20410000 38465753 ny512 dte 15 500000 28 346457 test3 dte
7. 6 3 J4 Propagator 6 3 Load TLE 14 18 Mass 640 MSGP4 6 22 Nonorbiting 6 1 l 15 Index Orbit Epoch 6 4 Orbiting 6 i Orientation Types 6 34 Pass 64 2 Pass Break 6 38 Properties of 6 Satellite Database 14 8 Selection Targets 6 36 Step Size 6 3 Swath 13 23 Target Pointing 6 36 Two Body Propagator 6 3 Walker Constellation 1 3 26 Save 28 Save As 2 9 Save Period 4 3 Save Prefs 4 2 Save Vehicle Ephemeris 4 2 Save with Children 2 10 Save without Children 2 10 Saving an Object 2 8 Scenarios Animating 3 18 Animation 544 Basic Properties Animation 54
8. 14 10 Inter Plane Spacing 13 27 Interval Graphs 15 16 IPC Preferences 4 3 Allow ASync 44 Allow Connect 4 4 Connection Method 4 4 Default Connection Settings 4 4 Max Connections 4 4 Poll Period 4 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual J J2 Perturbation Propagators J2000 Coordinate System J4 Perturbation Propagators Joint Gravity Model JGM JPL DE403 Julian Date Date Julian Date Offset JDateOff Julian4 UTCJ4 K Keplerian Element L Labels Last Loaded Function Latitude Cursor Position Latitude Lines Latitude Unit Launch Vehicles Access Attitude Attributes Basic Properties Attitude Constraints Advanced Basic Sun Temporal Contours Description Display Times Graphics Properties Index 6 12 63 1 12 114 5 9 59 5 9 5 15 2 8 3 17 3 7 5 10 13 3 8 6 8 6 6 54 7 10 6 47 6 50 6 52 8 10 2 17 8 9 Index Attributes 8 7 Contours 8 10 Display Times 8 9 Propagator 8 3 Properties of 8 1 Step Size 8 2 Swatt
9. 6 22 6 24 Advanced 6 26 Load 14 18 Load Method 6 25 TLE File 6 25 TLE File Format C26 C28 TLE Load 6 244 TLE Selection 6 26 Toggle Buttons 2 19 Tool Bar 3 1 3 3 3 6 Animation Steps 34 Buttons 3 3 Map Properties 3 5 Message Box 3 3 Status Area 3 3 Status Bar 3 17 Tools 3 1 Access 13 3 Close Approach 1 3 29 Dynamic Display 16 1 Graphs 0 1 15 12 18 12 Lifetime 13 14 Lighting 13 11 Remove Accesses 13 29 Reports 0 1 18 8 l 20 Strip Charts 16 1 Swath 13 23 Walker 13 26 Tools Menu 24 2 17 Torque File 6 35 Torque File Format C18 Tracking Boresight 12 14 Tracks Ground 6 43 6 57 7 4 Vehicle 3 18 Trailing Ground Track 6 44 Trailing Orbit Track 6 44 True Anomaly 6 7 True of Date 6 13 True of Epoch 6 13 Turn Markers 5 15 Turn Radius 7 4 Two Body Propagators 6 3 Two Line Element 14 8 U Umbra 5 17 13 12 Units 5 7 Angle 5 9 Date Format 5 9 Distance 5 8 Frequency 5 10 Latitude 5 10 Longit
10. 10 9 Description 2 17 Graphics Properties Attributes 10 6 Temporal Constraints 1 0 9 Area to Mass Ratio 6 16 6 19 Argument of Latitude 6 7 Argument of Perigee 6 6 6 23 Assigned Targets 6 37 12 13 At Least IN 18 7 Atmospheric Drag 1 12 D 2 Attitude 6 28 7 4 Attitude Type 6 29 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Integrated Attitude 6 35 Launch Vehicles 8 6 Missiles 8 6 Orientation Type 6 34 Target Pointing 6 36 Attitude File Format C C 7 Keywords C3 Attitude File External 7 6 8 7 Attitude Simulation 1 10 Attitude Targeting 1 10 Attitude Type 6 29 Attributes 6 41 7 6 10 6 Facilities 2 6 Graphs 15 13 16 9 Launch Vehicles 8 7 Map 35 Missiles 8 7 Planets
11. 114 Stars 1i14 Targets 9 6 Auto Propagate 14 12 14 20 Auto Save 9 4 2 Auxiliary Database 5 12 Average F 10 7 6 16 Axis Annotations 15 18 Az El File Format C 8 Az El Mask 9 13 Facilities 9 6 9 8 Targets 9 6 9 8 Az El Mask Custom Sensor B 7 Azimuth Angle 648 9 11 Azimuth Rate 9 12 Azimuthal Equidistant Projection 3 1 1 B B1950 613 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Index Background 6 56 Background Map 3 14 Ballistic Propagator 8 3 Barycentric Displacement 1 12 Basic Constraints Aircraft 7 647 Area Targets 10 7 Facilities 9 10 Ground Vehicles 647 Launch Vehicles 6 47 Missiles 647 Satellites
12. 18 3 Reports 0X1 Access 13 6 AER 137 13 13 Complete Chain Access 18 11 Content 15 7 Customizing 13 8 Generating a Report 18 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Header 15 11 Individual Object Access 18 10 Individual Strand Access 18 8 Lighting Times 13 13 Properties 15 6 Time Periods 15 3 Title 15 8 15 11 15 17 15 18 Reports amp Graphs Printer Setup 2 13 Resolution 12 16 Resolution Constraints Sensors 12 25 Retrograde 6 9 Right Ascension 6 23 11 2 14 16 Right Ascension Angle 6 34 Right Ascension of the Ascending Node 6 6 6 11 Roll 7 6 34 Rotating Atmosphere 13 19 Roule d Runge Kutta Fehlberg 1 13 S SAO Catalog Number 14 16 Satellite Database 14 1 14 8 Close Approach TooI 13 29 Object Description 14 14 Online Update 14
13. Gnd Elevation Angle Lf min 0 0000 deg Lf max 30 0000 deg Exclusion Zone Use r Min 4 Lat 0 0000 deg RE EE Lat 20 0000 deg E 20 0000 deg Lon Mex 34 Lon Ground Track FW Use 4 Ascending Only y Descending Only OK apply Cancel Help Abbreviations in the Constraints apply to column are as follows F facility T target V all vehicles S satellite M missile L launch vehicle G ground vehicle A aircraft B ship N sensor P planet star R area target 7 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Table 7 4 Aircraft advanced constraints Fields Description Constraint applies to Min Max Grazing Describes how high one satellite appears P V Angle above the edge of the Earth or limb relative to the aircraft Measured relative to the aircraft as the angle between the Earth limb and the other object This constraint can be used to prevent a sensitive optical sensor from getting too close to the Earth which might blind the sensor due to reflections off the surface Other object Aircraft Grazing Angle Min Max Altitude F T R P Min Max Grazing The grazing altitude is defined by the closest Altitude distance that the line of sight between the aircraft and other object comes to the Earth This constrain
14. Search Tolerances Launch Window Apogee 5 000 km Start 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Perigee 5 000 km Stop 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Access Graphics FT Show Line I Animate Highlight F Static Highlight By default CAT searches the stkA11TLE satellite database To change the database enter the new database name and path in the File Name field 13 32 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Search Tolerances Because the apogee and perigee values of satellites included in the various satellite database change over time the Apogee and Perigee Threshold fields are used to determine a valid range plus or minus for these values The Apogee value used in the search is equal to Search Apogee A A R where A is apogee A is the apogee threshold and R is the range constraint The Perigee value used in the search is equal to Search Perigee P P R where P is perigee P is the perigee threshold and R is the range constraint For instance if you enter a value of 1000 0 km for both Apogee and Perigee in the Close Approach window then enter a value of 1 0 km for the Apogee and Perigee Thresholds in the Close Approach Advanced window CAT would search for apogee and perigee values in the satellite database within 1 0 km of the original satellite s apogee and perigee value Any Range Constraint would be added to the total for the apogee and subtracted for the perigee Launch Wind
15. sssss 13 29 Table 1 41 City Database Opt Seite te pee teen edente 14 4 Table 14 2 City Database search results options sssssssssR 14 5 Teble t4 3 Facility DatabasecOpulOns 30e oc eret s 14 6 Table 14 4 Facility Database search results OPtiOns eee 14 7 Table 14 5 Satellite Database options 2 14 10 Table 14 6 Satellite Database search results options 0 ees 14 12 Table 14 7 Online Satellite Database update options sssssssssss 14 13 Table 14 8 Star database options sssssssssssssssssIII nneeeees 14 16 Table 14 9 Star Database search results options eee eee 14 17 Table 14 10 TLE load results options 00 22 2222 eect eter eee 14 20 Table 14 11 Facility TEE EOad ODtlOnis occi sia codeine thee epe Ba 14 21 Table 15 1 STK report graph tool functions sssssssssse 15 4 Table 15 2 Files menu options for report windows ssesssm 15 6 T ble 15 3 Secti n OptlOns cc eec AR ne de set c epa 15 9 Table T5 4 Data element optloris ettet es entes 15 10 Table 15 5 Report Header options 2 2 RR 15 11 Table 1536 Graphi Data DUtTOMS etnias edet er e e ee me 15 13 Table 15 7 Graph attribute options ionni ea e a a 15 14 Table 15 8 Graph type options sicot o tom ee s teet eeu 15 16 Table 15 9 Graph element options a eet ee 15 17 Table 15 10 Graph layout options ciere e eenaa K
16. C 9 Keywords C 10 Ephemeris Time ET 1 12 Epoch 5 2 6 27 Coordinate 64 Orbit 64 6 23 Epoch Days 5 8 Epoch Hours 5 8 Epoch Minutes 5 8 Epoch Seconds 5 8 Equidistant Cylindrical Projection 3 10 Equinoctial Coordinate Type 6 8 Euler Angles 6 34 Exactly N 18 8 Exclusion Zone 6 57 7 12 Exiting STK 23 Export 15 6 Export Complete 15 6 External Applications 2 15 External Attitude File 6 33 7 6 8 7 External File Formats See Importing Files F Fadilities Access 1 3 3 Attributes _9 Az El Mask 9 6 9 8 Basic 9 10 Basic Properties Position 29 2 City Database 14 2 Constraints Basic 9 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Index Sun 9 1 3 Save with Children 2 10 Temporal 9 1 6 Save without Children 2 1
17. 6 47 Ships 647 Targets 9 10 Basic Fifth Fundamental Catalog 14 16 Basic Properties 2 16 Sensors 1 2 2 Basic Properties of a Constellation 18 6 Bitmap File Format C 19 Black Bodies 1 12 Blink on Select 5 16 Boresight Fixeg 12 14 Tracking 1 2 1 4 Boundaries Area Targets __ 10 2 Browser Window 2 3 2 4 Bsta 6 23 C 2 16 Cartesian Coordinate Type 6 8 Cartesian Position 9 4 10 5 CAT See Close Approach Tool Centroid 10 3 Cartesian 10 5 r Index Cylindrical 10 5 Geocentric 10 5 Geodetic 104 Spherical 104 Chain 18 2 Basic Properties 18 3 Ordering Chain Objects 18 4 Reports 18 8 Complete Chain Access 18 11 Individual Object Access 18 10 Individual Strand Access 18 8 Change Current Itern
18. Network Password Data Network Licenses Server ID IP Address Port License Unknown 204 30 71 200 2340 Update Delete Clear OK Cancel Help To enter network licenses for STK Professional and add on modules use the text boxes beneath the Network Licenses Table to enter the Server ID number IP Address Port and License number When you finish use the Update button Use Clear to clear all entries in the table and Delete to remove the selected entry from the table 17 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Using the STK Help Menu On Line Manuals Full user documentation is provided on line for your convenience These files are stored in portable document format PDF and can be viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 00 When you installed STK you were asked whether you wished to install the Reader along with the PDF files The Reader is also available at www adobe com as free ware PDF files can be printed in full In addition they are word searchable About STK This selection provides you with valuable information about STK including customer support numbers and sales information You can also open this window to determine the software release version you re using AGI Web Site STK now has an on line update feature to enable easy updates of TLE sets databases and more Just select Online Update from the Help menu to open the STK web site Other Help Menu Ite
19. Users Manual Intuitive satellite systems analysis software designed to assist in visualizing and analyzing complex relationships in space systems VERSION 4 0 FOR ENGINEERING W ORKSTATIONS AUTHORS SHEILA R MARSHALL RALPH C PATRICK ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS INC 660 American Avenue King of Prussia PA 19406 GS01 MO40 AG05 070797 This document and the software described in it are the proprietary and trade secret information of Analytical Graphics Incorporated They are provided under and are subject to the terms and conditions of a written software license agreement between Analytical Graphics Incorporated and its customer and may not be transferred disclosed or otherwise provided to third parties unless otherwise permitted by that agreement Use reproduction or publication of any portion of this material without the prior written authorization of Analytical Graphics Incorporated is prohibited While reasonable efforts have been taken in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy Analytical Graphics Incorporated assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this manual or from the use of the information contained herein Copyright O 1997 Analytical Graphics Incorporated All Rights Reserved Satellite Tool Kit STK is a registered trademark of Analytical Graphics Incorporated The Analytical Graphics name and triangle logo design are registered trademarks Reg U S Pat amp Tm Off
20. 3 17 Change Current Point 10 3 12 8 Charts Strip See Strip Charts Circular Orbit 6 15 City Database 14 1 14 2 Querying the Database 14 3 Search Results 14 4 City Database File Format C 29 Country City Type File C 31 City Database Files C 30 City Name 144 City Type 144 City Type File Format C 31 Classical Coordinate Type 6 5 Clock Angles 12 3 Close Approach TooI 13 29 Computing 13 34 Closing a Scenario 2 5 Coefficient of Drag 6 16 6 19 Collision 13 29 Common Name 14 10 14 16 Complete Chain Access Report 18 11 Computing Close Approaches 13 34 Conic Sensors 1 2 3 Connection Method 4 4 Constellation 182 184 18 5 Access Conditions 18 8 Basic Properties 18 6 Creating a Constellation 18 5 Criteria 18 7 All Of 18 7 Any Of 18 7 At Least N 18 7 Exactly N 18 8 Constellation Name 14 16 Con
21. 9 16 TC A 6 27 TCPSocket 4 4 Temporal Constraints 6 52 Aircraft 6 52 Area Targets 10 9 Facilities 9 1 6 Ground Vehicles 6 52 Launch Vehicles 6 52 Missiles 6 52 Satellites 6 52 Sensors 12 24 Ships 6 52 Targets 9 16 Terrain Module 1 14 Terrain Tab 5 12 Terrestrial Dynamic Time TDT 1 12 Text Annotation 3 15 Text Annotation Map 3 15 Third Body Gravity 6 17 l 19 Index Tick Marks 15 18 16 13 Time Past Ascending Node 6 7 Time Past Perigee 6 7 Time Period 5 2 13 31 Time Periods Graphis 15 3 Reports 15 3 Time Step 5 6 Time Steps Animation 3 4 Time Unit 5 8 Time XY Graphs 15 16 TLE
22. ECI Earth Centered Inertial A representation of the orbit in inertial space corresponding to the current animation time displays In the Field of View field enter an angle value to narrow or broaden the perspective In all cases the observer s position is fixed in the ECF reference frame at the Projection Center Position If ECI is selected the orbit plane appears to move in time as you animate The map projection selected is saved when you save the scenario 3 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual The Map Window Advanced Projections If you have a license for the STK Advanced Analysis module the following additional projections are available Table 3 5 Advanced projection types Projection Type Description Azimuthal Projection is mathematically based on a plane tangent to the Equidistant Earth Spacing of the parallels is uniform Miller Rectangular projection constructed to provide an alternative to the Mercator projection The two projections are similar near the equator but the Miller projection avoids some of the exaggeration in scale near the poles Mollweide Equal and pseudo cylindrical projection showing the Earth in an ellipse with the equator twice as long as the map s actual meridian Orthographic Projection is geometrically based on a plane tangent to the Earth The point of projection is at infinity Directions from the center of the map projection are true Sinusoidal P
23. Mean Motion Dot The first time derivative of mean motion Motion Dot Dot The second time derivative of mean motion Bstar The drag term for your satellite Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 23 Satellites The satellite s SSC Number must be correct to use the TLE Selection feature since TLE searches are Q based on the SSC Number Warning Managing TLE Sets At the bottom of the MSGP4 Path tab is a slide bar that can be used to view the contents of multiple TLE sets To view a given TLE set click the slide button and drag the mouse along the slide The number assigned to the element set displays directly above the slide Simply stop the slide at the correct number to view the TLE set of your choice e If you delete an element using the Delete button make sure that you re deleting the Warning Correct element set i e the set deleted is the currently visible one Load You can load or insert a TLE set from a file by using the Load button 6 24 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Load Method File Load 4 Max TLE Limit 10 TLE File geo tce 3 TLE Selection 55C RevNumber 24 Jul 1996 10 19 49 50 Deselect All Cancel Help Table 6 12 TLE selection options Option Description Load Method Defines how the TLE sets are loaded Auto Load Causes STK to automatically load TLE sets corresponding to the SSC number of the satellite when
24. 15 17 File Formats External C1 Graphics Properties 2 16 Files Menu 24 Planets 114 Close 25 PURGE jen E Sensor 12 17 xterna ications 2 Pep Stars 1 1 4 SCP beeen 2G Graphs 1 3 8 0 1 15 12 18 12 Insert as Link 2 8 Access 138 po onde pu a Attributes 15 13 16 9 New 26 Creating a New Graph 15 15 SP Interval 15 16 Printer Setup 2 1 1 Layout 1517 Remove 2 10 POl rz 45 16 O 4 1516 Save As 29 Style Properties 15 15 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual l 7 Index Time Periods 15 3 Time XY 15 16 XY 15 16 Gravitational Effects 1 12 Grazing Altitude 6 56 7 11 Grazing Angle 6 55 7 11 Great ArcC 7 2 Great Arc Propagator Avicraftt __________ 2 Ground Vehicles 7 2 Ships 7 2 Greenwich Mean Time GMT 1 12 Grid Lines 15 18 16 13 Ground Elevation 13 24 Ground Elevation Angle 6 56 7 12 Ground Sample Distance 1 2 17 12 26 Ground Tracks 5 15 Ground Tracks 6 43 6 57 74 Ground Vehicles Access 1 3 3 Attitude
25. Importing Files into STK Keyword EphemerisLLRTimePosVel tttttt ttt lat lon rad latdot londot raddot EphemerisLLATimePosVel tttttt ttt lat lon alt latdot londot altdot Description Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat lon and rad are the geocentric latitude longitude and radius in degrees and meters respectively and latdot londot and raddot are the rates of change of these parameters per second 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 59 0 6 0 7 Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat lon and rad are the geocentric latitude longitude and altitude in degrees and meters respectively and latdot londot and altdot are the rates of change of these parameters per second 123 456 1 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 49 6 gt Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Keyword EphemerisLLATimePos EphemerisGeodeticLLR tttttt ttt TimePosVel lat lon rad latdot londot raddot Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK Description Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat lon and alt are the geocentric latitude longitude and altitude in deg
26. OK Apply Cancel Help Fields available in the Sun Lighting tab are described in the table below Table 5 6 Sun lighting options Field Description Subsolar Point If ON the point on the Earth directly below the Sun displays in the Map window 5 16 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Field Description Sunlight Penumbra If ON the boundary where the Sun completely appears or just begins to disappear at the horizon displays at the specified Display Altitude in the Map window Penumbra Umbra If ON the boundary where the Sun completely disappears or just begins to appear at the horizon displays at the specified Display Altitude in the Map window Display Altitude The altitude at which the Subsolar Point Sunlight Penumbra and Penumbra Umbra is depicted Color Select the color of the lines or markers Line Marker Style The marker style for the subsolar point or line style Line Widths 1 narrow 5 wide Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 17 Scenarios NOTES 5 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual SATELLITES Overview This chapter describes orbiting satellites and provides instructions for setting the basic and graphics properties as well as the access constraints of satellites It also provides instructions for manipulating satellites to obtain the information you need for analysis and problem solving Chapter Contents Basie Properties lletra eii tenente bed eert
27. Restricted Rights Legend US Department of Defense Users Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 Analytical Graphics Incorporated 660 American Avenue King of Prussia PA 19406 Restricted Rights Notice US Government Users excluding DoD Notwithstanding any other lease or license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Software License Agreement ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS INC AGI IS WILLING TO LICENSE SATELLITE TOOL KIT STK TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS IN THIS LICENSING AGREEMENT BEFORE YOU OPEN THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE MEDIA READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BY OPENING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE MEDIA YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY AND ARE BECOMING A PARTY TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AGI IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE STK TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNOPENED SOFTWARE MEDIA AS WELL AS THE DOCUMENTATION WITHIN THIRTY 30 DAYS OF PURCHASE AND YOUR LICENSE PRICE WILL BE REFUNDED ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS INC SOFTWA
28. _74 Attributes 7 6 Basic Properties Attitude _74 Route 1 2 Constraints Advanced 6 54 7 10 Basic 6 47 sun 6 50 Temporal 6 52 Description 2 1 7 Display Times 7 8 Graphics Properties Attributes 7 6 Display Times 7 8 Great Arc Propagator 7 2 Properties of 7 i Route 7 2 Step Size 7 2 H h k p q 6 9 Half Angles 1 2 3 HalfAngle 13 24 Half Power Sensors 1 2 4 Hammer Aitoff Projection 3 1 1 Harris Priester Atmosphere Model 1 12 Harris Priester Atmospheric Model D 3 Harvard Revised Number 14 16 Header 15 11 Help From Property Window 17 3 Help Button 2 16 Help Menu 2 4 2 18 17 1 18 1 Henry Draper Number 14 16 High Speed 7 5 6 High Resolution Maps Module 1 15 HMTL Browser 17 2 HPOP Module 1 11 6 15 HTTP Proxy 45 Hyperbolic Or
29. icon in the outside margin STK Professional Features Some of the features and functions described in this manual are available only with the STK PRO software suite or with individual add on modules that address your requirements Because these functions are embedded in the STK application they are presented in this manual However they can be identified by the STK logo A in the outside margin The modules available as part of the PRO suite or as individual add on modules are Advanced Analysis The Advanced Analysis module AAM provides a package of advanced features and tools that dramatically extend the capability of STK This module is designed to meet the requirements of satellite systems engineers performing a wide variety of specialized analysis tasks Specifically these features offer advanced functionality in five areas attitude simulation and Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 9 PRO Advanced Analysis Introduction targeting sensor definition and constraints astrodynamics data visualization and data management Attitude Simulation amp Targeting Attitude simulation and targeting features allow users to define a vehicle s attitude by 1 using one of fifteen pre defined pointing profiles 2 numerically integrating the torques operating on the vehicle s physical mass matrix or 3 defining its orientation relative to a specified target This attitude data is typically used with sensor informatio
30. 13 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Figure 13 4 A sample Graph Data window showing access data for the ERST satellite to the Santiago facility Graph Vehicte ERS1 To Facitity WhiteSands Access Vehicle ERS1 To Facility WhiteSands Access Times 29 Apr 1997 15 53 15 ERS1 To WhiteSands InviewData 26 Aug 1997 23 27 54 00 30 Sep 1997 22 42 02 00 4 Nov 1997 21 56 10 00 UTCG a pr p Clicked At X 26 Aug 1997 23 27 54 00 Y 1 059524 el Al Restore Nearest Point X 1 Nov 1997 00 35 04 00 Y 1 000000 ERS1 To WhiteSands InviewData To learn more about the commands available in the Graph Data window refer to the Graphs section in Chapter 15 of this manual Note You can zoom in for a closer look at the data points change graph attributes or click a point of interest and determine the nearest data point Removing Accesses from the Map Window To clear the Map window of access graphics use the Remove Accesses or Remove All buttons in the Access window When access to an object is removed the asterisk to the left of its name in the tree disappears If the remains access data 1s still available K_ _ o E Wm Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 9 Using STK Tools Accesses and Their Defining Objects An access is defined by the two objects for which the access is computed Onc
31. Cancel Help The fields available in the Lifetime Advanced window are discussed in the table following Table 13 4 Advanced options for Lifetime Field Description Orbit Count Limit The maximum number of orbits that will be analyzed before the Lifetime tool stops processing Setting this value to 999999 covers the whole lifetime for most satellites Orbits per Calculation This parameter allows you to directly control the performance of the Lifetime tool The fewer orbits per calculation the more precise the lifetime estimate is but at the expense of compute time The higher number of orbits per calculation the less precise the lifetime estimate will be but calculations are completed much faster In general set this parameter to 10 for a quick estimate and 1 for the greatest accuracy Gaussian Like the previous parameter this parameter directly affects Quadratures the performance of the Lifetime tool as well as the accuracy of its results The drag integration routine is performed by n 9 point Gaussian quadratures per orbit where n is the number set here Set this parameter to at least 6 for increased accuracy or lower it for increased speed 13 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Field Description Use 2 Order If ON a second order correction is included in the Earth Oblateness E 2 l oblateness calculation This correction is the J5 term which Correction SM i contributes as much
32. East Loop Time Time at which animation loops back to the Start Time specified Satellite Tool KitO Lunar Exclusion Angle Minimum angle between the line of sight from the object to the object of interest and the line of sight from the object to the Moon for which access is considered valid Major Axis of an Ellipse The longest diameter of the ellipse which passes through the center and both focal points Magnitude The brightness of a celestial body as expressed on a logarithmic scale Magnitude increases for fainter objects so that a magnitude 1 object is brighter than a magnitude 2 object Map Attributes Scenario Graphics Properties Controls the display of data such as orbit paths object names ground tracks and other satellite data Attributes also controls the display of the tool bar at the top of the Map window and selection options Map Background Scenario Graphics Properties Controls the display of background image files or texture to display in the Map window Map Details Scenario Graphics Properties Controls the display of land mass and other map features such as the display of latitude and longitude lines in the background and the image resolution of the map Map Projection Controls the way in which the three dimensional 3 D globe is presented in the Map window Map Maps provide a geographic reference for a scenario s objects The objects within a scenario are related by time to a
33. Figure 12 2 Halfpower cone N UN Half Angle _ 2x frequency GHz x Diameter m Cross Section 3D View Custom Sensor If you select Custom you can import your own sensor file or select the Pattern Tool to create one PRO Advanced Analysis 12 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors Pattern Tool You can create a custom sensor pattern using the Pattern Tool button Pattern Tool Downlink Time 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Show Boresight JE Show Field of Regard Point Type Enter from Area Target 4 Pattern Entry Area Target File Name None E Azimuth Elevation Pointe Edit Mode 4 Add New Point y Change Current Point Insert Point gt BW 0 0000 deg 0 0000 deg Delete Point OK Apply Cancel Help In the Time field specify the time at which the settings are to apply typically to coincide with the passage of the satellite over a particular point on the Earth If the Show Boresight option is ON the boresight is graphically displayed in the Map window with a boxed X If the Show Field of Regard option is ON the horizon of the sensor is outlined on the Map window You can specify the pattern of the sensor in one of three ways Enter From Area Target Latitude Longitude or Azimuth Elevation Once you select an option for the Point Type field specify the
34. Ground Track Min Max Exclusion Zone If ON constrain access to the ascending or descending side of the satellite s ground track The ascending side of the ground track is defined as the portions of the ground track where the Earth fixed latitude is increasing The Earth fixed latitude decreases on the descending side of the ground track Specify the minimum and maximum latitude and longitude at which access is to be constrained An exclusion zone is formed based on the values entered Refer to Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 Satellite exclusion zone constraint access Satellites Constraint applies to F T R P V F T R P V Scenario Earth View 1 palas Lat 0 58 Lon 30 78 Facility1 no access due to exclusion zone constraint Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 57 Satellites NOTES 6 58 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual SHIPS AIRCRAFT amp GROUND VEHICLES Overview This chapter describes nonorbiting vehicles and provides instructions for setting the basic and graphics properties as well as the access constraints of aircraft ground vehicles and ships It also provides instructions for manipulating aircraft ground vehicles and ships to obtain the information you need for analysis and problem solving Chapter Contents Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 7
35. Reports Graphs Element Title Azimuth deg Elevation deg Line Range km Color BLACK P Style Solid ai Width 2 s Point Color BLACK af Style None af Size 4 OK Apply Cancel Help The table following describes the options available in the Attributes window The options in this window are essential in differentiating among elements for multiple objects in the graph Table 15 7 Graph attribute options Field Description Title Changes the legend title for the selected element The title can t exceed one line of text including spaces and punctuation Line Changes the color style and or width of the line connecting data points in the graph Point Changes the color style and or size of the individual data points in the graph 15 14 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports amp Graphs Graph Properties In the STK Graph Tool window you can define the contents and format of the modified or new graph style Select the style in the list and use the Properties button Content The Content tab allows you to select the data elements to be included in your graph Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 15 Ed d E Dr Hint Reports amp Graphs Before you choose the data elements you wish to include in the graph you must select a Graph Type The following graphs types are available Table 15 8 Graph type options Graph Type
36. W hen an axis is constrained that particular axis attempts to point to the desired location as close as possible while still maintaining its proper relationship with the other axes defined in the coordinate system When an axis is aligned that axis points directly to the desired object forcing the other axes to rotate accordingly Table 8 3 Attitude types Attitude Type Description ECI velocity The objects X axis is aligned with the inertial velocity alignment with nadir direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of constraint nadir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 8 6 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Attitude Type Description ECF velocity The object s X axis is aligned with the Earth fixed velocity alignment with radial direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction constraint opposite to nadir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 This attitude profile is commonly used for aircraft and surface based vehicles The ECF velocity alignment with radial constr
37. eter erence ee 2 10 Saving the Scenario without Children teense 2 10 Removing an Object from a Scenario ssssssssseee 2 10 setting Up The Printers s s hoi ee crimen fette t Pe Der tees 2 11 LOMA tiet La UNUM CM Rake 2 11 Reports amp NN 2 13 selecting KRE ene m eet etat eel aie ga On d HU recs eee ie e met 2 14 ENGINE 2 15 Opening an STK Module or External Application 2 15 Defining the Properties of aN ODbJect 2 ton tote et tote 2 15 The Property WIFICOWS aviar i ett EE ette 2 16 IDescribirig am ODbJectine STIS s c eot e e e 2 17 Using M ltipple WIPYCIONVS x sz s creto itte Ft teet en ttt te tenet eene 2 17 USIGIQ ST TOOlS cta te eee tete pec En e rte de 2 17 UNT ALP a EE E 2 18 Making ENOIEES STR tit fait Rais oet le fe iene aie 2 18 Selecting Multiple ODjeCts narena eer naar e 2 18 TODO 3 B nio o TM 2 19 Opi A MENUS a 2 20 Radio BUULOMS Mayta do E a este 2 20 Hc ET 2 20 Usirig Accelerator Keys 2 c e ce e de et b tH e S t 2 21 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Table of Contents THE MAP WINDOW HERE CER ROCA Em S The LoolBal icta eint dte tA RE Ue en Het tet tre C deed vh 3 3 Animation TIME Steps ionni idas 34 Map Rroperues no EE E E T E se 3 5 Map ALTIDULES ette td data 35 Map DetallS E da 3 6 MN elo eee hate Puen reg beatae ESEE 3 9 Map Back round nn ta ett e ER edere 3 14 TOEXCAMIMOLALION ss E 3 15 Status Ba ette td ep RR ETHER tet ttes 3 17 ANIMAN a Scenario
38. 119 175 120 0 119 175 110 0 119 175 100 0 119 175 90 0 119 175 80 0 119 175 70 0 119 175 60 0 83 91 60 0 EndPatternData B 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Defining Custom Sensor Patterns The Az El Mask Format The Az El Mask format provides a convenient way to account for obscura for a target or facility In this format the custom sensor pattern is defined by the angle between the edge points of the sensor pattern and a plane perpendicular to the sensor reference direction and measured as positive toward the reference direction When sensors using this type of custom pattern are attached to targets or facilities the sensor reference direction is aligned with the local zenith direction Figure B 3 Definition of the elevation angle elevation Generate the custom pattern for the example using a polar diagram similar to the one in the reference pane format The azimuthal angles on the plot now represent azimuth in the facility s or target s local horizon plane with 0 being in the direction of north The concentric circles on the plot represent elevation angles Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 7 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns Figure B4 Polar projection for the Az El Mask format 0 0 315 0 225 0 E m leen 180 0 The angle amp 40 off the boresight becomes the line along the 50 elevation contour and Note the angle B 50 off the boresight becom
39. 14 000000 28 235294 test dte 17 212500 3 000000 yugo1 dte 127 015100 0 212759 korea dte OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios The Terrain module provides precise three dimensional 3 D terrain elevation data for the entire globe When used with STK Terrain exploits sophisticated multi dimensional interpolation algorithms to provide accurate 360 azimuth elevation masks for satellite access calculations from any point on the Earth s surface These algorithms also provide altitude information for user defined facilities and ground based targets For users of the VO module Terrain allows a vivid 3 D visual depiction of the Earth s true surface relief and its effect on satellite accesses The data has a resolution of less than 30 arc seconds or approximately 1 kilometer at the Earth s surface In its compressed format the complete data set requires over 400 MB of storage However the data can be read directly from a CD ROM without loading it onto your hard disk This data was originally compiled by the U S Geologic Survey from a variety of sources around the world It has been processed and formatted for optimal performance with STK Use the Up and Down arrows to order the data for level of details and viewing purposes The order in which the terrain data appears in this list is the order in which STK searches for terrain data Use the Remove button to remove selected terrain data files from t
40. 1980 5268 2160 5253 2340 5127 2520 4897 2700 4569 2880 4152 3060 3654 3240 3087 3420 2460 3600 1787 3780 1078 3960 000 4442116 560849 1175 000 5231686 495904 1980 000 5907486 630747 2730 000 6456687 223006 3412 000 6869446 737423 4012 000 7138939 531535 4522 000 7261322 557398 4934 000 7235660 092738 5241 000 7063811 508837 5440 000 6750301 077539 552 000 630216 815868 550 000 572880 363905 537 000 504180 889481 514 9 7 8 6 J 0 0 000 4254747 000 3554494 945 3062496 633 6865434 196 5170 669349 085339 32 056590 708 2197837 759 6729313 077 4674 714035 468744 802 1284592 763 6444571 853 4083 715763 505402 937 343352 289 858500 894060 400 2444996 719823 752 3298442 076068 286 4084665 244174 956 4788386 396800 443 5396096 478646 805 5896203 098032 270 6279157 437281 589 6537552 186551 258 6666212 348 011787 4800 502832 4140 000 3383070 009 6662271 392 265087 4363 993155 12780 000 2198116 12960 000 3148502 13140 000 4031389 13320 000 4826582 13500 000 5515207 13680 000 6080228 5384 457342 3478 13860 000 6506976 5302 361661 4150 14040 000 6783672 5096 082509 4736 617 4297359 4079 415361 540 424566 990 3520073 4542 840873 288 135972 170 2667417 4914 960125 122 514746 1 047 1756815 5185 004699 1944 83
41. 4 9615331e 13 2 3229584e 13 NS B a au Ww Co w l l B Ww l 2449678 500708 3 0421783e 00 4 1163153e400 1 6903164e 00 8 2182182e 13 4 7448882e 13 2 2341157e 13 2449679 500708 3 0360406e 00 4 1198535e 00 1 6919825e 00 8 2259166e 13 4 7344570e 13 2 2298320e 1 2449680 500708 3 0298971e 00 4 1233838e 00 1 6936455e 00 8 2336006e 13 4 7240156e 13 2 2255436e 13 2449681 500708 3 0237479e 00 4 1269064e 00 1 6953052e 00 8 2412700e 13 4 7135638e 13 2 2212504e 13 Ww End Ephemeris Torque File tq Format The torques in this file are in body fixed coordinates and have units of Newton Meters which is Kg Meters Sec The format of a data line is Seconds from given epoch X Torque Y Torque Z Torque A sample torque file is shown below Listing C 5 Sample Torque File Format stk v 3 0 BEGIN Torques NumberOfTorques 20 ScenarioEpoch 1 Jan 1995 00 00 00 0 TorquesTimeBodyFixed C 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK 0 000 1 005 0 003 2 223 2 000 1 013 0 021 2 132 4 000 1 024 0 043 2 085 6 000 1 031 0 065 1 869 8 000 1 074 0 064 1 883 10 000 1 053 0 066 1 964 12 000 1 086 0 053 2 104 14 000 1 112 0 047 2 325 16 000 1 134 0 044 2 417 18 000 1 146 0 042 2 632 20 000 1 152 0 039 2 788 22 000 1 168 0 035 2 871 24 000 1 177 0 033 2 863 26 000 1 183 0 029 2 851 28 000 1 186 0 025 2 844 30 000 1 17
42. 77 80 81 100 101 104 105 112 113 118 119 123 124 130 131 135 136 140 141 148 149 156 Width hn o o o Description Owner country Owner of satellite Mission Category of mission Launch site May be abbreviated Launch date YYYYMMDD format Launch time in military format 0 2400 hours Decay deorbit date Either the date YYMMDD of deorbit or the type of orbit For example heliocentric orbit Launch sequence number Represents the number of successful launches These are numbered sequentially from Sputnik 1 through present If more than one satellite was launched on a single booster or shuttle this number is repeated Weight mass This is the weight of the satellite as it achieved orbit Normally stored in Kg Apogee in Km Perigee in Km Period Time in minutes for the satellite to complete one revolution of the earth This number is rounded to nearest tenth of a minute Inclination Angle deg between the plane of the orbit and the equatorial plane of the planet Geostationary position Location of the satellite at the equator 0 1 to 360 All positions are listed as East In other words if known as 0 0 to 179 9 East or West 0 0 would become 360 Status Active or Inactive Date of last database update YYY YMMDD Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK Column Description 157 159 These are record terminator stkActiveTLE
43. Column Description 113 115 Population Rank 116 132 Latitude deg 133 149 Longitude deg 150 152 These are record terminators stkCityDb cc File This is the country and city type file It contains a list of all the valid countries and city types This file is used to build the list of country and city types available in the user interface If this file isn t available STK is unable to search for countries or city types The file is in a basic STK data File format Listing C11 Example of country and city type file Begin Country Albania Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia Austria Croatia Cuba Czech Republic Mauritania United States Uruguay Uzbekistan Vanuatu Venezuela Virgin Islands Western Samoa End Country Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C31 Importing Files into STK Begin Type Populated Place Administration Center National Capital Territorial Capital End Type stkCityDb gd File This is the generic database file It contains information concerning the last update of the database This file is used by the online update option to determine which records to supply The file is in a basic STK data file format Listing C12 Example of stkCityDb gd file BEGIN DatabaseUpdate Version 1 0 LastUpdate 19970405 D DatabaseUpdate E Facility Database The Facility Database is comprised of a total of three files You can create your own Facility Database by fo
44. FW Min 0 0000 deg F Mex 90 0000 deg Solar Beta Angle F Min 0 0000 deg r max 180 0000 deg Background W use 4 Space Only w Ground Only Exclusion Zone Ground Track Grazing Altitude F Min 0 0000000 nm F Mex 1079 9136069 nr M Gnd Elevation Angle F Min 0 0000 deg F Mex 90 0000 deg W use r Min 4 Lat 0 0000 deg RE EE 20 0000 deg 20 0000 deg Lon Mex 34 Lat Lon W Use 4 Ascending Only y Descending Only OK apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table 6 24 Satellite advanced constraints Fields Min Max Grazing Angle Min Max Altitude Min Max Solar Beta Angle Describes how high one object appears above the edge of the Earth or limb relative to the satellite Measured relative to the satellite as the angle between the Earth limb and the other object This constraint can be used to prevent a sensitive optical sensor such as those on the Hubble Space Telescope from getting too close to the Earth which might blind the sensor due to reflections off the surface Other object Primary Vehicle Grazing Angle Specify the altitude range for which you wish to limit access to the satellite The solar beta angle is the signed angle of the vector to the Sun relative to the orbital plane The signed angle is positive when the
45. Perspective Projection 3 10 Physical Data 6 20 PAN 6 34 Pixmap File Format C 19 Planetary Ephemeris File Format C 17 Planets 1 1 1 Access 13 3 Attributes 1 1 4 Basic Properties Definition 11 3 Definition 1 1 3 Description 2 17 Graphics Properties 1 1 4 Attributes 1 1 4 Properties op 11 1 Pointing Target Times 12 15 Pointing a Sensor 12 9 Polar 90 Graphs 15 16 Polar Graphs 15 16 Polar Motion D 1 Polar Plot B 3 Poll Period 4 4 Population 144 Port 4 5 Posigrade 06 9 Position Cartesian 9 4 Cylindrical 9 5 Facilities 29 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Geocentric Geodetic Spherical Targets Power Unit Precessing Secularly Precession
46. Reports can be created for scenarios vehicles facilities targets stars planets and sensors Select a style in the Style list and use the Create button to display the report Options available in the Files menu when the report displays are discussed in the following table Figure 15 2 Sample report summarizing J2000 x y and z position for the ERS1 and Shuttle vehicles The options available in the report window are discussed in the table following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 5 Reports amp Graphs Table 15 2 Files menu options for report windows Field Close Print Save As Export Export Complete Units Refresh Description Closes the report window Prints to the local printer Saves the report to a file Exports data to an ASCII file Headers are in quotes and data elements are delineated by commas Exports all report data to an ASCII file including any summary information Opens a Units window that allows you to change the units of measure for the report or graph If the Use Default Report Units option is ON default units are used If the Make Default Report Units option is ON the units of measure set here are used as the default units for all data generated Changes made in this Units window do NOT affect the units set at the scenario level or permanently change the units for the report style Redraws the report window to reflect changes made to the object s e g v
47. This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis e g to align with the Y axis set offset to 90 The Occultation Normal attitude aligns the body X axis with the Sun direction the Z axis is constrained to be along the Sun Earth line The satellites X axis is aligned with the inertial velocity direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of nadir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 The satellite s X axis is aligned with the Farth fixed velocity direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction opposite to nadir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 This attitude profile is commonly used for aircraft and surface based satellites The satellite s Z axis is fixed in inertial space The direction of the satellite Z axis is specified through two angles as determined by the Orientation Type see the following section The satellite X axis is then constrained via motion in the yaw sense toward the nadir direction This profile is useful for satellites in highly elliptical
48. an observer would see the vehicle directly overhead Vehicle HalfAngle Specifies the half angle relative to nadir For example for a 5 vehicle half angle the swath would be 10 in width centered at nadir e Swath Half Specifies the swath limits as a distance away from the subsatellite point as measured along the surface of the central body Options Chose among No Graphics Removes the swath from the map display Edge Limits Displays the swath limits to either side of a center ground track Filled Limits Displays a crosstrack pattern to the swath limits at each path point along the ground track 13 24 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Sensor Swath A sensor swath displays the area of coverage for the vehicle sensor Swath isn t necessarily centered about the ground track Sensor swaths can only be generated for vehicles with nadir alignment with ECF velocity constraint attitude Color Line Marker Style Line Width Swath green Solid 24 1 Start Time 31 Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 Stop Time 1 Nov 1997 03 59 59 00 OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in the Swath window are discussed below Table 13 6 Swath options Field Description Color The color in which you wish the swath graphics to appear Line Marker Style The type of line with which you wish the swath to display Line Width 1 narrow 5 wide Start Time The time
49. body Used as a display option for orbits in the Perspective map projection With this option the orbit track always appears above the ground track Eccentricity Measure of the flatness of an ellipse A value of 0 indicates a circle For an elliptical orbit e c a where cis the distance from a focal point to the center of the ellipse a is the semimajor axis and 0 lt e lt l Eccentric Anomaly E An auxiliary angle used in the integration of Newton s equations for elliptical motion E is the angle between the main axis and line running from the center of the ellipse to a point Q on a circle circumscribed about the ellipse The point Q is a projection of the satellite along a line parallel to the minor axis of the ellipse The angle E appears in the famous Kepler s Equation that relates E M and i Eclipse Passage of a satellite through the Earth s shadow There are two periods in the year each of about 40 days duration centered around vernal and autumnal equinox when a geostationary satellite passes through the shadow of the Earth daily A geostationary communications satellite needs to be equipped with batteries to avoid traffic interruptions during an eclipse Ecliptic The plane of the Earth s revolution around the Sun Elevation The angle above or below the horizon plane as measured from 90 at the nadir to 90 at the zenith Elevation Angle Elevation is measured as the angle between the nadir vector an
50. definitions and descriptions in this chapter will assist in your understanding of the relationships among STK components and will guide you through STK This chapter also describes one of the two primary windows in STK the Browser window The Browser allows you to easily create define and modify objects Chapter Contents Starting QUINA ST Kie 2 2 ettet ete pers Deli tapes 2 3 The Browser WindOw esssseeeneeneen emnes 2 3 Object Merlo scere entre eee hr ettet bete eed 2 5 Opening Closing SCenario ceto te ated dd ted 25 Creating aiNew OB eCt xui scion ect fee att te oed e nee ete caes 2 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 1 User Interface Inserting an Existing Object into a Scenario ee sss 2 6 Last koadeg FUNCTION iis om et eo dete 2 8 Linking an Object into a Scenario sse 2 8 SAVING ati ODE saei ie t eet e te ad t t a che deer 2 8 Saving to a Different Directory ssssssssseee 2 9 Saving a Modified Object oett dt tefte ets 2 10 Saving the Scenario without Children sese 2 10 Removing an Object from a Scenario ssssssssseneee 2 10 Setting Up the Pata o et emis 2 11 2D Map EUER E EE ae ee A oh Eee RAE eed 2 11 Reports amp Graph sve od t THER ERG Pens 2 13 SELSCUING 14 File ME 2 14 EGITIMNG Ih STK yb dd dd 245 Opening an STK Module or External Application sssssss 2 15 Defining the Properties of
51. ground Argument of Perigee The angle from the ascending node to the perigee direction measured in the orbit plane and in the direction of the object s motion Ascending Node The point where the satellite passes through the inertial equatorial plane moving from south to north Atmospheric Drag A retarding force acting on a satellite within the Earth s atmosphere At altitudes below 160 km the atmosphere causes a satellite s orbit to decay fall back to Earth within a few revolutions At altitudes above 700 km drag has hardly any influence Attitude The orientation of the three principal axes of an object relative to a reference coordinate system Also Vehicle Basic Properties allows the user to specify the static or dynamic orientation of a vehicle Auto Save Application Basic Properties Allows the user to specify the directory path and time intervals to be used when saving the scenario activate or disable automatic saving of work completed at the specified intervals perform a quick save of the scenario and specify whether vehicle ephemeris should be saved during an Auto Save or Quick Save Azimuth The arc of the horizon measured clockwise from north from 0 to 360 Azimuth Angle Azimuth is measured in the plane perpendicular to nadir from the projection of the velocity vector to the projection of the relative position vector This angle is measured in a positive manner according to the right
52. s Z axis is aligned with the nadir direction and the X axis is constrained in the direction of the inertial velocity constraint vector The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 Sa i E The ECF velocity alignment with radial constraint profile is most appropriate for surface i satellites and aircraft 6 30 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Small animation time steps may be needed to properly visualize satellites with spinning attitude profiles Other Attitude Types STK also makes the following attitude types available Table 6 15 Other Attitude types Advanced Analysis Module Attitude Type Nadir alignment with Sun constraint Nadir alignment with orbit normal constraint Sun alignment with nadir constraint Sun alignment with ecliptic normal constraint Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Description The satellite s Z axis is aligned to nadir and the X axis is constrained in the direction of the Sun The Constraint Offset angle measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis is used to modify the body fixed constraint vector e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 The satellite s Z axis is aligned to nadir and the X axis is constrained in t
53. sphere or a black body Solar radiation pressure is the same for mirror spheres and black bodies with the same cross sectional area so that users need not specify the characteristics of the satellite The HPOP also takes into account all of the major predictable motions of the Earth that affect the apparent position of the satellite Precession of the equinoxes Nutation Diurnal rotation Barycentric displacement In addition the HPOP accounts for the differences among the three primary astronomical time systems Universal Time Coordinated UTC also known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT International Atomic Time T AT Terrestrial Dynamic Time TDT formerly known as Ephemeris Time ET Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction All input and output are expressed in terms of UTC TAI and TDT are used internally to achieve increased accuracy For ultra high precision the HPOP uses the Runge Kutta Fehlberg method of order 7 8 to integrate the equations of motion Long term Orbit Predictor LOP The Long term Orbit Predictor module LOP allows accurate prediction of a satellite s orbit over many months or years This is often used for long duration mission design fuel budget definition and end of life studies For performance reasons it is impractical to compute the long term variation in a satellite s orbit using high accuracy small time step propagators that compute a satellite s position as
54. to the vehicle being launched If you enter 0 the minimum Delta V is computed for launch and impact locations Fixed Apogee Alt The vehicle s maximum altitude Fixed Time of Flight The duration of the vehicle s flight Impact Location These elements are linked and only three combinations are valid last 3 fields l Impact Latitude Geodetic Impact Longitude Impact Altitude Impact Latitude Geocentric Impact Longitude Impact Radius Impact Elevation Impact Azimuth Impact Latitude can be geodetic or geocentric but need not agree in this respect with Launch Latitude g You can also enter launch points using the mouse in the Map window i External Propagator This propagator allows you to read the ephemeris for a launch vehicle or missile from a file Turn ON the External Ephemeris File field then specify the file you wish to use Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 8 5 Note Launch Vehicles Missiles Basic Properties Attitude The Attitude tab of the Basic Properties window for launch vehicles and missiles can be used to specify the orientation of the object Missile Basic Properties Trajectory attitude Atmosphere Description Attitude Type Selection ECF velocity alignment with radial constraint 4 Constrain Offset 0 0000 deg Precomputed Attitudes J Attitude File OK apply Cancel Help
55. when generating orbits for basic studies The following atmospheric density models are available for the HPOP force model Table 9 Atmospheric Density Models Option Description 1976 Standard A table lookup model based on the satellite s altitude Its range of validity is 86km 1000 km No additional parameters need be specified Harris Priester Takes into account a 10 7 cm solar flux level and has been modified in STK also to take into account diurnal bulge Its range of validity is O 1000 km and it requires specification of one additional parameter Average F10 7 Jacchia 1971 Computes atmospheric density on the basis of the composition of the atmosphere which depends on the satellite s altitude as well as seasonal variation Its range of validity is 100km 2500 km Two additional parameters need to be specified Average F10 7 and Geomagnetic Index Kp Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 17 PRO LOP Satellites Long term Orbit Predictor Module The Long term Orbit Predictor LOP allows accurate prediction of a satellite s orbit over many months or years This is often used for long duration mission design fuel budget definition and end of life studies For performance reasons it is impractical to compute the long term variation in a satellite s orbit using high accuracy small time step propagators that compute a satellite s position as it moves through its orbit LOP exploits a variation of par
56. 00000 0 273 3512 0023832 136 2812 095 6103 96093 28172880 00000049 00000 0 10000 3 033 7479 0005869 099 5006 341 4463 96095 86463512 00000154 00000 0 10000 3 084 2647 1353688 054 8200 331 5684 96093 11987032 00000271 00000 0 00000 0 056 4726 0003308 303 2412 193 6849 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK 1 12994U 81119A 96091 51457987 00000150 00000 0 10000 3 0 0530 2 12994 005 8775 057 5493 0005167 316 4773 157 4150 01 0027132601693 1 13083U 82017A 96088 99006407 00000070 00000 0 10000 3 0 0638 2 13083 005 8733 057 2095 0030143 271 4999 088 2606 00 9922799103227 1 13367U 82072A 96096 17389770 00000033 00000 0 17128 4 0 0894 2 13367 098 0838 149 2719 0007846 015 4314 344 7113 14 5717754372990 1 13595U 82097A 96094 59762657 00000001 00000 0 10000 3 0 0370 2 23741 000 0085 167 3677 0002445 201 5504 192 8057 01 0027165000118 L 23748U 95071A 96096 18479622 00001785 00000 0 34075 4 0 0242 2 23748 065 0214 133 8895 0010447 300 9161 059 0956 15 5209027201663 L 23751U 95072A 96096 13625365 00000044 00000 0 00000 0 0 0086 2 23751 098 6992 171 3332 0001121 059 0289 301 1001 14 2163508701405 1 23752U 95072B 96096 13206129 00000020 00000 0 10000 4 0 0041 2 23752 098 5532 170 2575 0004324 212 4478 147 6434 14 2488888901408 L 23754U 95073A 96095 49851374 00000008 00000 0 00000 0 0 0064 2 23754 000 0342 1
57. 047 b 80174527 508338 1 Nov 1997 00 10 00 00 182 002 2 80174751 239898 1 Nov 1997 00 11 00 00 181 968 80174979 406145 1 Nov 1997 00 12 00 00 181 944 gt 80175210 870147 1 Nov 1997 00 13 00 00 181 929 80175444 479534 1 Nov 1997 00 14 00 00 181 924 80175679 071895 1 Nov 1997 00 15 00 00 181 927 80175913 480221 1 Nov 1997 00 16 00 00 181 940 E 80176146 538376 1 Nov 1997 00 17 00 00 181 962 80176377 086543 1 Nov 1997 00 18 00 00 181 994 80176603 976697 1 Nov 1997 00 19 00 00 182 037 E 80176826 077924 Other types of lighting AER data are available through the Reports option Viewing a Time Data Report To view lighting times use the Time Data button Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 13 PRO Lifetime Using STK Tools Figure 13 7 A sample Lighting Times Report for the Shuttle Files Edit 24 Feb 1997 12 53 03 Vehicle Shuttle Lighting Sunlight Times Start Time UTCG Stop Time UTCG Duration sec 1 Nov 1997 E 1 Nov 1997 00 18 38 1118 897 1 Nov 1997 00 54 56 19 1 Nov 1997 01 50 26 3330 112 1 Nov 1997 02 26 44 43 1 Nov 1997 03 22 14 3329 715 1 Nov 1997 03 58 32 27 1 Nov 1997 04 54 02 3330 119 1 Nov 1997 05 30 19 64 1 Nov 1997 06 25 49 3329 656 1 Nov 1997 07 02 06 48 1 Nov 1997 07 57 36 3329 801 1 Nov 1997 08 33 53 94 1 Nov 1997 09 29 23 3329 825 1 Nov 1997 10 05 42 1 Nov 1997 11 01 11 3329 629 1 Nov 1997 11 37 29 72 1 Nov 1997 12 32 59 3330 235 1 Nov 1997 13 09 1
58. 1 Properties Object 2 15 Property Windows 2 16 Basic 2 16 Chain 18 3 Constellation 18 6 Constraints 2 16 Graphics 2 16 Help Button 17 3 How to Use 2 16 Talps 79 2 16 114 Province 144 Proximity 13 29 Q Quaternions 6 29 6 34 Quick Save 4 3 Quitting STk R RAAN Spread 13 27 Radiation Pressure Solar 6 20 Radio Buttons 2 20 Radius 1 14 Range 0648 9 12 Range Rate 648 9 12 Rate 7 4 Real Time 5 6 Rectangular Sensor 12 8 Reference Plane Custom Sensor B 2 References Online 17 9 Reflection Coeffient 13 16 Refresh Delta 5 6 Remove 2 10 Remove Accesses 13 29 Remove Constellation 13 27 Removing Access 13 9 Removing an Object 2 10 Renaming a Chain
59. 12 Querying the Database 14 10 Search Results 14 1 1 Satellite Database File Format C20 Owner Mission File C 24 Satellite TLE 14 18 Satellites Access 1 3 3 Attitude 6 28 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Index Attitude Type Selection 6 29 Attributes 641 Basic Properties Attitude 6 28 Attitude 6 28 Pass Break 6 38 BasicProperties Mas 6 40 Constraints Advanced 6 54 7 10 Basic 647 Sun 6 50 Temporal 6 52 Constraints Properties 6 47 Contours 645 Coordinate Epoch 64 Coordinate System 6 12 Coordinate Type 6 4 Custom 6 27 Description 2 17 Display Times 6 44 Graphic Properties Attributes 641 Contours 645 Display Times 6 44 Pass 642 Integrated Attitude 6 35 J2 Propagator
60. 18 5 Sample Graph showing accesses for each individual strand and object in the Chain as well as complete access Files Edit Chain KOP LandSat TDRS Strand Access Times 6 Jul 1997 13 14 19 KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT 05 to TDRS 77 H KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT 05 to TDRS 41 4 KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT 04 to TDRS 7 KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT_04 to TDRS_4 eE 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 1 Jan 1997 02 00 00 00 1 Jan 1997 04 00 00 00 Time UTCG i Clicked At X 3 Al Al Restore Nearest Point X 18 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Angle Between Graph Following is a sample graph showing angles between objects Figure 18 6 Graph window displaying angle between objects in the chain Graph KOP LandSat TDRS Angle Between Files Edit Chain KOP LandSat TDRS Angle Between 6 Jul 1997 13 14 44 A 1 Jan 1997 00 01 43 368 1 Jan 1997 01 44 53 51 1 Jan 1997 03 28 03 64 UTCG Angle deg KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT_04 to TDRS 4 Angle deg KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT_04 to TDRS 7 Angle deg KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT 05 to TDRS 4 Angle deg KingOfPrussia to LANDSAT_05 to TDRS_7 d Clicked At X 2 E El Restore Nearest Point X Dynamic Display Reports amp Strip Charts STK now features a Strip Chart tool that displays user selected data in graph form as you animate the scenario The S
61. 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual E 1 High Resolution Maps Technical Notes IVETE sd International Boundaries Provincial Boundaries Definitions The terms briefly defined here are taken from the RWDB2 Reference Manual E 2 Term Rank Description A hierarchical order of importance within features or a way to distinguish subfeatures Rank 1 rivers are the most important while rank 5 rivers are minor A rank 1 international boundary is delimited while a rank 2 is not less important but is simply indefinite or in dispute This allows one to symbolize the lines differently or to vary the complexity and density of the map Note that the ranks of most features are related to WDB2 the names data bank and other databases Ranks that appear to be missing may be those that have been eliminated moved to other features on ranks or those planned for the future Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual High Resolution Maps Technical Notes Term Description Geodetic vs RWDB2 should be considered to be Geocentric geocentric because the data is mixed and considering the small input scale one probably could not tell the difference Accuracy Although the potential data storage accuracy for RWDB2 is 10 centimeters one should consider the data as being accurate to the nearest second at best RWDB2 Features The following subsections describe the features of the RWDB2 that have been included in the Hi Resoluti
62. 25 US Note User Interface To close a scenario without exiting STK highlight the scenario in the Browser window select Close from the Files menu The Browser window updates to show only the application the Map window s disappears You can now open a different scenario or create a new one To learn more about the Map window please refer to Chapter 3 of this manual Creating a New Object To create a new object for the current scenario highlight the scenario in the Browser window and click on the appropriate icon refer to page 2 5 for more information in the lower portion of the window When the Browser window displays the new object s name click on the highlighted text type the object s new name and press Enter The object s name can only consist of alphanumeric characters separated by an underscore _ and or dash it cannot include other punctuation marks such as commas spaces or slashes You can also use the New function available from the Files menu Just select New then select the type of object you wish to create in the pull right menu that appears Inserting an Existing Object into a Scenario Any time you create or modify an object in STK the properties of that object including its state and graphical attributes are retained in a file for that specific object When you create another scenario and insert the object 2 6 Satellite Tool
63. 809450 0 00000598 28 499723 499 697661 499 615359 0 00001103 28 499635 499 542224 499 390484 D 00001540 28 499582 499 383030 499 171139 0 00001096 28 499637 499 163912 499 013126 0 00001294 28 499655 498 989760 498 811839 0 00000882 28 499745 498 774346 498 652984 0 00000427 28 499771 498 556449 498 497712 0 00000481 28 499786 498 374015 498 307867 0 00000449 28 499737 498 185992 498 124295 0 00000085 28 499601 497 975566 497 963819 0 00000001 28 499439 497 784248 497 784110 0 00000023 28 499194 497 600262 497 597061 0 00000031 28 499035 497 415061 497 410794 D 00000001 28 498932 497 227029 497 226891 0 00000297 28 498900 497 060990 497 020113 0 00000001 28 498961 496 853679 496 853542 8 0 00000221 28 499162 496 681466 496 651133 14 Jun 1991 16 19 27 75 0 00000001 28 499398 496 478368 496 478231 15 Jun 1991 09 35 51 14 0 00000001 28 499632 496 289585 496 289447 Jun 1991 00 00 01 00 60 The results summarize perigee states only Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 13 21 Using STK Tools Graph Use the Graph button to graphically illustrate the satellite s orbital elements This is especially useful for observing trends and analyzing perturbations to the elements The changes which the elements undergo are quite complex especially toward the end of the satellite s life Generally though as a satellite decays you should expect to see the follow
64. AQVar eed so tte tre rer ter tert lee Ue eee 12 24 Constraints RESONON i ainese eite teh bittet Rep aea 12 25 Basic Properties Definition You can define a sensor in any of the following ways simple or complex conic projection half power beam width or a custom pattern The fields in the Definition tab depend upon the type of sensor you choose 12 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors Conic Sensor FiveDegElev Basic Properties Definition Pointing Resolution Description Sensor Type Conical Conic Half Angles Clock Angles Inner 0 000 deg Minimum 0 000 deg Outer 85 000 deg Maximum 360 000 deg OK Apply Cancel Help If you select Conic the following fields are available Table 12 1 Conic sensor options Field Description Inner Outer Half The angular radius of the cone measured from the Angles boresight For simple cones enter only the outer cone value When an inner cone is specified the inner region is considered to be a region of exclusion Minimum Maximum Clock Angles The range of rotation angle about the boresight relative to the up vector The clock corresponds to azimuth angles which are defined in the sensor pointing direction A diagram illustrating the structure of a conical sensor is presented in the figure following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 3 Sensors Figure 12 1 Extended cone Min Cl
65. Basic sun Temporal Advanced Start End Local 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 GMT 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 FW Local Apparent 00 00 00 0000 o0 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 z400000000 00 00 0000 Duration W Min ooo sec F Max 5500 00 sec oo 5500 00 sec OK Apply Cancel Help Table 6 23 Satellite temporal constraints Fields Local GMT Local Apparent Duration Description Start and end local time constraints The satellite local time is computed based upon the GMT of interest and the longitude of the satellite at that time For every degree of east longitude four minutes are added to GMT to yield the satellite local time Start and end GMT time constraints Start and end local apparent times Using local apparent time at noon the Sun is at the highest elevation Also known as Local Satellite Time LST Minimum and maximum acceptable durations for computed accesses If accesses whose durations are outside these limits are computed they are discarded from the resultant list Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Constraint applies to F T R P F T R P F T R P F T R P 6 53 Satellites Constraints Advanced The fields in this tab allow you to impose a variety of satellite specific constraints such as grazing angle solar beta angle grazing altitude etc 6 54 Basic sun Temporal Advanced Grazing Angle
66. Chains Other applications developed by companies working in partnership with Analytical Graphics are integrated into STK through the External Apps option in the Files menu If you have licenses for applications such as Missile Flight Tool MFT GREAS or other applications use the External Apps option to display a pull right menu listing available applications Defining the Properties of an Object You can define an object s basic and graphics properties as well as constraints for the object by selecting an option in the Properties menu Properties for each object are discussed in subsequent chapters of this manual Please refer to the specific object for instructions on setting object properties Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 15 Note User Interface Options are grayed out or unavailable if they appear in light gray print Basic Graphics Constraint Use this option to specify and display the general characteristics of an object such as time period or type of path Basic properties are used to define all objects including the STK application however the tabs within the Basic Properties window vary according to the object highlighted Use this option to specify and display the graphics characteristics of an object such as color Graphics properties are used to define all objects however the tabs within the Graphics Properties window vary according to the object highlighted This opt
67. Content 16 11 Layout 16 13 Properties 16 10 Title 16 13 Style Properties 15 15 Content 15 7 15 15 16 6 16 11 Header 15 11 LayOUt 15 17 16 13 Options 15 8 15 9 16 7 16 12 Summary Options 15 10 Subsolar Point 5 16 Summary Options 15 10 Sun Facilities 9 13 Targets 9 13 Sun Alignment ECI Z Axis Constraint 6 32 Eliptical Normal Constraint 6 31 Nadir Constraint 6 3 1 Sun Constraints Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Aircraft 6 50 Ground Vehicles 6 50 Launch Vehicles 6 50 Missiles 6 50 Satellites 6 50 Sensors 12 22 Ships 6 50 Sun Elevation Angle 6 51 9 14 Sun Ground Elevation Angle 6 51 9 14 Sun Lighting 5 16 Display Altitude 5 17 Sunlight 1 3 12 Swattth 1 3 23 E
68. Database _ 5 11 Terrain 5 12 Time Period 5 2 Units 5 7 Closing 2 5 Database _ 5 11 Description 2 17 Global Attributes _5 1 4 l 16 Graphic Properties Global Attributes Sun Lighting Opening Sun Lighting Terrain Time Period Units Search Constraint Close Approach Tool Search Tolerances Secularly Precessing Select File Select Targets Semimajor Axis Sensor Attributes Sensors Access Basic Properties Definition Pointing Resolution Conic Constraints Advanced Sun Temporal Constraints Constraints Properties Resolution Custom Patterns Definition Description Display Times 5 14 5 16 2 5 5 16 5 12 5 2 5 7 13 32 13 33 6 15 2 14 636 65 69 12 17 5 15 12 1 13 3 13 10 12 2 12 2 12 9 12 16 123 12 24 12 22 12 24 12 21 12 25 12 6 12 2 2 17 12 20 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facility Based Graphics Properties Display Times Projection Half Power Pointing Projection Properties of Rectangular Resolution Swath TargetBased Sensors Custom 12 12 12 17 12 20 12 18 124 12 9 12 18 12 1 12 8 12 16 13 25 12 12 B 1 Server A b Ships Access Attitude Attributes Basic Properties Attitude Route Constraints Advance
69. Dec 1997 11 40 18 89 Deconflict None 4 OK Apply cancel Help Aircraft ground vehicle and ship graphics can be displayed or removed from the Map window based on time intervals specified here Choose among Use Intervals Always On or Always Off If you choose the Use Intervals option the Start and Stop Times specified in the list box are used as the time intervals during which object graphics display in the Map window If you choose the Always On option object graphics always display in the Map window regardless of the intervals specified in the list box If you choose the Always Off option object graphics never display in the Map window To specify the times during which object graphics should display in the Map window use the Add button To modify a time interval in the list box 7 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles highlight the time period of interest and use the Change button To remove a time period use the Remove button You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that time periods don t overlap If the Deconflict option is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the option is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the option is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the ti
70. Description Report Style Properties J2000 ECI Position Velocity Content Header Title J2000 ECI Position amp Velocity m Report Header Options OK apply Cancel Help There are five fields available in the Header tab Table 15 5 Report Header options Field Title Current Date Object Name Short Description Long Description Description Add a title at the beginning of the report The title can t exceed one line of text including spaces and punctuation If ON the current date displays at the top of the report If ON the name of the object s for which the report is being generated appears at the top of the report If ON information contained in the Short Description field of the Description tab for the object s is included in the report If ON information contained in the Long Description field of the Description tab for the object s is included in the report Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 15 11 Reports Graphs Refer to Chapter 2 User Interface for a complete discussion of the Description tab Graph Window You can use one of the standard graph styles shipped with STK to display data or create a customized graph In the STK Report Graph Tool window use Create to display the graph style selected One of the most popular standard graph styles is the Solar AER for a vehicle An example of the graph is shown in the following figure Other standard g
71. Description Time XY Displays data elements of the selected object s relative to time No options are available for the X axis because X equals time XY Displays an XY plot of data elements of your choice for the selected object s Interval Displays time line intervals for the selected object s Polar Displays a polar plot of data elements for the selected object s where the center of the plot is 0 Polar 90 Displays a polar plot of data elements for the selected objects s where the center of the plot is 90 Once you ve selected a Graph Type use the arrow buttons to assign the data elements of interest to the appropriate axes listed on the right side of the window You can double click an item in the Elements list to copy it to the Y axis Graph Contents list You can also double click an item in any of the Graph Contents lists to remove it from the list Use the left arrow to remove elements from the axes list You can also add a title to each axis If the LoglO option is ON data points along that axis display as log10 instead of linear You can also change the units of measure for a graph element using the Units button 15 16 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports Graphs Options You can change the graphical display of individual data elements for the style Options Lighting AER ECIVVLH Elevation Line Point Color green r Color CYAN Style Solid Style None ml Width 2
72. E S a Ea 15 18 Table 16 1 STK dynamic display strip chart tool functions ssssssssssss 16 4 Table 16 2 Files menu options for dynamic display windows sssee 16 5 Table 16 3 Dynamic display options sssssssssss nono nnnnnnnnnannnanana nano 16 7 xviii Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents Table 164 Strip Chart data Duttons ce eter etes et 16 9 Table 16 5 Strip chart attribute options 2 2 2 2 2 16 10 Table 16 6 Graph element options 2000 00 20 eee cece cece tee Ree 16 12 Table 16 7 Strip chart layout options 2 2 2 2 eee eee eet 16 13 Table 17 1 Password Options iin sisi ee TR s e tt Oe bee Dn 17 4 Table 17 2 Request for licenses via e mail fax ssssssssssss 17 6 Table 17 3 License window OD OAS a e a a E In 17 7 Table 17 4 Additional Help menu items occ cccnnnn nn cnn ee tees 17 10 Table 18 1 Constellation criteria OPtions 0 eet eters 18 7 Table E l Polarcoofditiates ioter aree e B 5 Table C 1 Keywords for Attitude prsesia iapa He C3 Table C 2 Keywords for Eplhiemeris file format nsii iiini tec ette C 10 Table C 3 stkActiveTLE database files ssssssssssssss C21 Table C 4 stkActiveTLE sd file description 2 ee teens C21 Table C 5 stkActiveTLE fr file description 0 0 2 2 eee tee ee eee C23 Table C 6 stkActiveTLE wr file description 0 0 2 2 eect eee eeeeees C
73. Individual strand access for Target Relay2 GroundStation is Shown in bold 2 eee HH 18 9 Figure 18 4 Diagram showing individual object access for Relay access shown in A e tibt i e edd at e ee Ge e bd fr deed 18 10 Figure 18 5 Sample Graph showing accesses for each individual strand and object in the Chain as well as complete access 1 0 eee eee cece cette erent 18 12 Figure 18 6 Graph window displaying angle between objects in the chain 18 13 Figure B 1 The desired relative geometry of the satellite and the custom sensor eun II B 3 Figure B 2 Polar coordinate paper showing the sensor coordinates B 4 Figure B 3 Definition of the elevation angle ssssssssssm A B 7 Figure B 4 Polar projection for the Az El Mask format oooonnnnnnnnnncicccoccconn cnc noncnnn B 8 Figure B 5 Polar projection for the Angle Off Boresight format B 10 List of Tables Table 2 t 2E Maps Print Opt Orns 3 d ere tre tette eret reed er mede 2 12 xiv Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents Table 2 2 Additional print options for reports amp graphs cinco 2 14 Table 2 3 Accelerator Keys savin omo e ist t Eo Een 2 21 Table 3 1 Tool bar buttons IRR 3 3 Table 3 2 Map display optiOEiS teret it o dette tibio 3 6 Table 3 3 Options for Map details tette a 3 7 Table 3 4 Basic projectiorty pes tedio SUI e bet Debo Se al Mh ele ot
74. Interface Setting Up the Printer To set up your print parameters select Print Setup from the Files menu A Print Setup window appears containing two tabs 2D Map and Reports amp Graphs 2D Map The options in the 2D Map tab control the way in which the Map window prints including page layout attributes and output device The fields available in the 2D Map tab are discussed in the table following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 11 User Interface Table 2 1 2D Map print options Option Description Page Layout The options in this section allow you to specify how you wish the Map window to print Choices are Orientation Choose between Landscape or Portrait Layout Choose between Rectangular or Square The Square layout is best for Orthographic Stereographic Azimuthal Equidistant and Perspective projections e Width Height Specify the Width and Height of the paper to be used e g 8 x 11 or 11x14 Attributes The options in this section allow you to specify the color and format to be used when printing the Map window Choices are Color Mode Choose between Gray black and white or Color printing Background Choose to print White on black images ideal for presentations or Black on white typically used for printing hard copies File Format Choose to print using PostScript PS encapsulated PostScript EPS or Hewlett Packard Graphic Language HPGL commands Output D
75. Map window Constraints Basic The fields in this tab allow you to impose standard constraints for the area target co _ __ lt a Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 10 7 Area Target SearchArea Constraints Properties Basic Temporal JE Minimum Elevation 0 0000 deg FT Line of Sight OK Apply Cancel Help The basic constraints for area targets apply to all points within the area target If the constraint is satisfied for at least one point access to the area target is considered valid The planes tangent to the surface of the Earth local horizontal planes are considered as unique for each point within the area target Abbreviations in the Constraints apply to column are as follows F facility T target V all vehicles S satellite M missile L launch vehicle G ground vehicle A aircraft B ship N sensor P planet star R area target Table 10 7 Basic constraints for an area target Field Description Constraint applies to Minimum Elevation is the angle between the relative F T R P V Elevation Angle position vector from a point within the area target to the object of interest and the local horizontal plane at the point within the area target Line of Sight If ON default access to the area target is F T R D V constrained to when a line of sight is available to some point in the area target above the
76. Method The orientation methods available for the Targeted Pointing Type are the same as those for the Fixed Pointing Type discussed on page 12 10 12 14 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual Sensors Target Times You can also specify the time during which the sensor points to the selected target Use the access times determined between the vehicle and the selected target by turning the Use Access Times option ON If you wish to select other times during which the vehicle should orient toward a selected target enter the Start and Stop Times and use the Add Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 15 PRO Advanced Analysis Sensors button Use the Change button to modify an existing value Use the Remove button to remove a time period from the Scheduled Times list You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that time periods set don t overlap If the Deconflict field is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the field is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the field is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that the overlap exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so
77. Printer Command Printer Setup 2D Map Attributes Page Layout Reports amp Graphs Projection Azimuthal Equidistant Equidistant Cylindrical HammerAitoff Mercator Miller Mollweide Orthographic Perspective Sinusoidal Stereographic Projection Map Propagation Delay Propagators Ballistic Great Arc J2 Perturbation J4 Perturbation MSGP4 STK External Two Body Index 9 5 9 3 8 3 7 2 6 3 6 3 6 22 6 27 6 3 l 13 Index Proper Motion 1 1 2 Properties Dynamic Display 16 5 Reports 1 5 6 Strip Charts 16 10 Properties Menu 2 4 Basic 2 16 Constraints 2 16 Graphics 2 16 Properties of a n STK Application 4 1 Properties of a n Pircraft Hi Facility 2 1 Ground Vehicle 7 1 Launch Vehicle 8 1 Missile 8 1 Planet 11 1 Satellite 6 1 Scenario Sensor 12 1 nr 9 E i M s Target 9
78. Size 4 OK Apply Cancel Help The name of the element appears in the Title field Other options are described in the table following Table 15 9 Graph element options Field Description Line Changes the color style and or width of the line connecting data points in the graph Point Changes the color style and or width of the individual data points in the graph Layout The fields in the Layout tab allow you to choose the general display options for the graph Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 17 Reports Graphs Graph Style Properties Solar AER Content Layout Title Solar ECIVVLH AER m Graph Title Options Graph Layout Options F Current Date Number of X Axis Annotations 3 F Object Name Tick Marks F Show Number of Tick Marks 12 Grid Lines F Show Number of Vertical Grid Lines 12 Number of Horizontal Grid Lines 12 OK Apply Cancel Help There are nine fields available in the Layout tab Table 15 10 Graph layout options Field Description Title Add a title to display at the top of the graph The title can t exceed one line of text including spaces and punctuation Current Date If ON the current date displays at the top of the graph Object Name If ON the name of the object s for which the graph is generated appears at the top of the graph Show Tick Marks If ON tick marks display on the h
79. Style Properties ECF Position and Velocity Content Layout Title ECF Position amp Velocity m Graph Title Options Graph Layout Options F Current Date Number of X Axis Annotations 3 F Object Name Tick Marks F Show Number of Tick Marks 12 OK Apply Cancel Help Grid Lines F Show Number of Vertical Grid Lines 12 Number of Horizontal Grid Lines 12 Viewable Duration 3600 000 sec There are a number of fields available in the Layout tab Table 16 7 Strip chart layout options Field Title Current Date Object Name Show Tick Marks Show Grid Lines Description Add a title to display at the top of the graph The title can t exceed one line of text including spaces and punctuation If ON the current date displays at the top of the graph If ON the name of the object s for which the graph is generated appears at the top of the graph If ON tick marks display on the horizontal axis If ON grid lines display in the graph Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 13 Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts Field Number of Axis Annotations Number of Tick Marks Number of Vertical Grid Lines Number of Horizontal Grid Lines Viewable Duration 16 14 Description The number of points to be marked along the horizontal axis in the graph The number of tick marks to display along the horizontal axis The number of grid lin
80. Typical Browser window 5 di STK S 42 Tutorial40 gt Aircraft GA SearchArea e Baikonur el gp Wallops FQ FiveDegElev T GroundVehiclet E Launchvehicle1 Missile1 of Jupiter ERSI 724 Downlink fg Horizon i do Shuttle 72 Antenna zi Cruise Ea Stari Iceberg 2R se 7 1 al Be z al a so 1 2 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Object Menu Following is a list of STK icons representing the various objects in STK The icons appear as buttons in the lower portion of the Browser window and as floating icons elsewhere in STK If you have an add on module to STK such as Chains or Comm additional icons may be present Please consult the Chains User s Manual and Comm User s Manual for information regarding the use of these icons Scenario E l Launch Vehicle ES Aircraft Missile m Planet of Target E Ship Star A G d Vehicl S a ES round Vehicle ensor Satellite Facility Opening amp Closing a Scenario To open a previously saved scenario including all of its objects and properties select Open from the Files menu Choose the scenario you wish to open STK is ready to use when text and data appear in the Browser window and the Map window appears The speed and power of your workstation combined with the complexity of your scenario determines how long it takes to open the scenario Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual
81. User s Manual Facilities amp Targets Santiago Graphics Properties Attributes AzEIMask Display Times etes J REENE Fr 3 Inherit Settings Marker Style Square 4 JE Show Label OK Apply Cancel Help There are four fields in the Attributes window Table 9 6 Facility target graphic attributes Field Description Color The color in which you wish your facility or target to appear Marker Style Available options include square circle star plus sign point or an X You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your STK Home STKData Pixmaps directory Pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style list Inherit Settings If ON the settings defined in the scenario s Map Attributes tab are used If OFF STK uses the settings specified here Show Label Only available if the Inherit Settings feature is OFF If the Show Label option is ON the facility or target label display in the Map window If OFF the facility or target only appears as a marker and no name appears Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 7 Facilities amp Targets ow x t It is best to use one marker style for a class of objects so that you can easily view u differences between one type of object and another For instance you may want to Hint always use the star marker style for a target and the square marker style fo
82. You can use the wildcards anywhere in the entry Table 14 3 Facility Database options Search Criteria Description Site Name Enter the name of the facility for which you wish to search Latitude Min Max Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits for latitude 14 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite 4 Star Databases Search Criteria Description Longitude Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits for Min Max longitude Attitude Min Max Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits for altitude Network Specify the type of facility of interest such as USAF When you ve entered as many search criteria as possible click the Perform Search button The query assumes an implicit AND between search criteria You cannot search for EITHER OR parameters Viewing Search Results Once you ve queried the database the Facility Database Search Results window appears If there are a number of facilities resulting from the search select the items of interest in the list Use the Select All button to select all cities in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected facilities in the list Other options in the Facility Database Search Results window are described in the table following Table 14 4 Facility Database search results options Field Description Create Facility or Target Class Choose to insert the facility as either a f
83. about the boresight to maintain a constant pattern relative to the earth while tracking the target In the Map window the sensor projection remains similarly shaped throughout the targeted access Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 11 Sensors Setting Description Hold Rotation about the Y axis followed by rotation about the new X axis In visual terms holds a fixed orientation about the boresight while tracking the target This means that the shape of the sensor pattern isn t constant and the access calculations are different Facility Target Based Fixed Sensors The definition of the Azimuth Angle is dependent upon the parent object class For facility or target based sensors azimuth is measured from the sensor up vector in a left handed sense about the sensor boresight For the default elevation of 90 the up vector points toward local north and azimuth is measured as positive in an easterly direction If the elevation is not 90 for a facility based sensor the up vector is defined as Up sin elevation cos azimuth Up sin elevation sin azimuth Up cos elevation where X Y and Z are facility body fixed coordinates X points to local north Y points to local east and Z points along the inward normal to the reference ellipsoid Vehicle Based Fixed Sensors For a vehicle based sensor such as satellites aircraft ground vehicles etc azimuth is measured from the sensor up vector i
84. adequately describe the objects within and or intent of each chain to help you distinguish among chains and to facilitate use of the chain in a scenario Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 18 5 e Y A iu Hint Chains Module Basic Properties of a Constellation The objects which comprise the constellation define it To identify the objects in a chain select Basic in the Properties pull down menu Because constellations consist of a number of different objects there is no one marker in the Map window for a constellation Therefore a chain doesn t possess graphics properties Constellation The Constellation tab allows you to identify the objects in a constellation and to impose access limitations upon that group of objects Constellation Basic Properties Constellation Description m Available Objects 31 Constellation Objects En WhiteSands At Least N mt 1 xf Missilel ef Jupiter Satellite Shuttle 31 Satellite ERS1 4 Satellitel 4R TDRS 4 4R TDRS 5 OK Apply Cancel Help In the Available Objects list use the right arrow or double click the object you wish to include in the chain to move it to the Constellation Objects list You can also use the double click feature to remove an object from the Constellation Objects list 18 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Setting Constellation Criteria Once you
85. and the apparent position of the Sun The apparent position of the Sun refers to the viewed position of the Sun from the observer at a given time which takes into account the light time delay Sun Elevation Anale Local Horizontal Local Surface Normal Vector Not available for facility target constraints Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities Targets Fields Description Constraints apply to Lunar Elevation Elevation angle to the apparent position of the Angle Moon Solar Exclusion The minimum angle between the line of sight Angle from the source object to the object of interest and the line of sight from the source object to the Sun for which access is considered valid For example enter 5 if you wish to ignore access to another object if it is within 5 of the Sun exclusion angle is 5 The solar exclusion angle constraint defines a zone of exclusion around the line of sight vector to the Sun The facility target has access to another object when the line of sight to the object is outside of this exclusion zone Zone of Lunar Exclusion The minimum angle between the line of sight Angle from the source object to the object of interest and the line of sight from the source object to the Moon for which access is considered valid Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 15 Facilities amp Targets Fields Description Constraints apply to Indicates that access is valid
86. and Stop Times specified in the list box are used as the time intervals during which object graphics display in the Map window If you choose the Always On option object graphics always display in the Map window regardless of the intervals specified in the list box If you choose the Always Off option object graphics never display in the Map window To specify the times during which object graphics should display in the Map window use the Add button To modify a time interval in the list box Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 8 9 Launch Vehicles Missiles highlight the time period of interest and use the Change button To remove a time period use the Remove button You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that time periods don t overlap If the Deconflict option is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the option is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the option is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that overlap s exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that overlap s are fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries i
87. be used for the entire section if the report data is time dependent You can specify a Title to display at the top of the section Title x y and z position F Use Ephemeris Steps Append to Lines sb OK Apply Cancel Help 15 8 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Reports Graphs Table 15 3 Section options Field Description Use Ephemeris Steps Displays actual times in the report Useful when reporting external ephemeris If ON Step Size isn t available Only available for time dependent data Step Size Number of seconds per step A step size of 300 00 is equal to 5 minutes Only available for time dependent data Multiple Instance Only valid if multiple objects have been selected in the Browser when generating the report If the Include Instance Name with Title option is ON choose whether to display one section for each object instance included in the report or to display the data for an object on the same line in the report If ON the name of the object displays in the section title If you generate a report using an extremely small Step Size over a long period of time the time STK requires to generate the report is significantly increased Options Data Elements If you select a data element in the Report Contents list the Options window contains fields that allow you to specify the type of information to be included and format of the element You c
88. cursor s latitude and longitude position the name of the selected object and the current scenario time You can specify a number of Map window display options directly from an STK session including map colors geographic features display format latitude longitude line spacing etc In addition you can open multiple Map windows for a single scenario with different display options to further your analysis efforts Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 3 1 The Map Window Figure 3 1 The Map window Tutorial Earth View 1 z wil For publication purposes map colors have been reversed In most instances the Map window is a color on black display Note Chapter Contents TAG TOG s c eo 3 3 Animation Time Steps emm emen 34 Drs edude esiti 3 5 MiziePa iet 35 Map Details cocine 3 6 Map PROC CUO ca oue ite nde ct eee re este let zc eter led 3 9 Map Background a eee cis 3 14 TOXC ANIM ezion C TEES 3 15 SAS BAT ts POCO OO nn erian aoaeiaa ate eaii aa E a 3 17 Animating a Scenario 3 18 Animation and its Relationship to Vehicle Tracks conocia 3 18 3 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual The Map Window The Tool Bar The tool bar displays at the top of the Map window It allows the user to easily control the graphical display of the scenario in the Map window The tool bar message bo
89. ens 6 15 Force Models atril de pitt epatis ie pei etiara 6 15 Long term Orbit Predictor Module ssss 6 18 Force MOGEIS E 6 18 MSGP4 PropagatO coin dete De ad titties Boel al aaa ee 6 22 EA O O 6 24 Custom Propagator StkExternal ss 6 27 Basic Properties Attitude eee 6 28 Attitude Type Selection secte dett ital eed e ed 6 29 Orientation TYPE c ecc eot eee epa tet at idee Ue 6 34 ITE GT ATE AUIes cc Se rae A Rb oes 6 35 Target PONING tcs A 6 36 Basic Properties Pass Break 6 38 Basic Properties MASS tit uated cotesbecnsethabecadsaesuneentecsvedeneettoataaaraedodl 6 40 Graphics Properties Attributes sssssssse eem 6 41 Graphics Properties Pass sssssssssss eee 6 42 Graphics Properties Display Times sss 644 Graphics Properties Contours niesie meme 6 45 COMSUAINS BASIC a tente utere es t b P t e dts 6 47 Constraints Uli gere i trt ter e ee eee e ol ge er e ias 6 50 iv Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents constraints Temporal 2 sia 6 52 Constraints Advanced eee e rep AAA 6 54 SHIPS AIRCRAFT amp GROUND VEHICLES uero etienne 7 1 POJO E E T Ad T 7 2 AUS A 74 EX Ler ell AMES lea a r 7 6 Graphics Properties Attributes sssssssse em 7 6 Graphics Properties Display Times ssssss raro rorcnnnnnn 7 8 Aircraft Ground Vehicle amp Ship Constraints sssss 7 9 Constraints Advance
90. file There are five formats for specifying the rotation between these two coordinate frames all share certain common characteristics The first line of each file contains the application version number e g stk v 3 0 The primary section of each file is set off by the Keyword Group name that defines the data contains within the group i e BEGIN Attitude at the beginning of the Keyword Group and END Attitude at the end of the Keyword Group In between these beginning and end statement is the data that defines the object Inside the attitude section are several keywords to identify the scenario epoch time and the attitude format These are described below Table C1 Keywords for Attitude Keyword Description ScenarioEpoch Specifies the epoch time for the attitude points For example if the scenario epoch is 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 0 atime of 5 5 for a particular attitude point would correspond to a time of 1 Jan 1997 00200 05 5 This entry must precede actual attitude data Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C3 Note Importing Files into STK CA Keyword NumberOfAttitudePoi nts Sequence AttitudeTimeQuatemi ons nnnnn nnn CC ttt Description Specifies the number of attitude points to follow For example if you enter 1000 here 1000 attitude points would be included This entry must precede actual attitude data Specifies the rotation sequence when the atti
91. for example has an interval of availability that is defined by the span of its ephemeris while a facility has no such time oriented constraints and uses the scenario time period if such an interval is needed Finally animation Stat and Stop times are automatically updated to match the time period when a new one is set here Changing the scenario Epoch after subobjects have been created or inserted may result in unpredictable difficulties Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 5 3 i i Y LS A ui Hint Note DA Warning Scenarios If you change the Epoch of a scenario any subsequent or newly defined vehicles have a default Start Time and Orbit Epoch equal to the new epoch In addition relative start times in epoch seconds are adjusted accordingly for all previously defined objects For new scenarios the default Start Time in the Time Period tab is the scenario Epoch the Stop Time defaults to the Start Time plus four hours Table 5 1 Time period options Field Description Start Start time for the scenario period Stop Stop time for the scenario period Epoch Date and time in established units to represent zero epoch seconds of the scenario Basic Properties Setting Animation Options The options in the Animation tab allow you to set the Start Stop Epoch and Time Step for the scenario 5 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Tutorial Basic Properties Time Period Anima
92. fr File This is the frequency file it contains all downlink frequencies known for the satellite Frequencies are stored in Megahertz Currently STK uses this information for description purposes only There may be multiple entries for a particular satellite one column represents a single entry The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C 5 stkActiveTLE fr file description Column Description 04 SSC number Valid values 00001 99999 KEY FIELD 5 11 Low frequency Low frequency in a range or an individual frequency if known 12 19 High frequency High frequency in a range stkActiveTLE wr File This is the write up file There can be multiple rows for a single satellite The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C6 stkActiveTLE wr file description Column Description 04 SSC number Valid values 00001 99999 KEY FIELD 5 49 Write Up Write up text Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C 23 Importing Files into STK stkActiveTLE om File This is the Owner Mission file It contains a list of all the valid owners and missions in the database This file is used to build the list of owners mission available in the user interface If this file isn t available STK is unable to search for satellite owners or mission The file is in a basic STK data File format Listing C 7 Example of owner mission file for the satellite database BEGIN Owner Arabia Argentina AsiaSat Austr
93. it moves through its orbit LOP exploits a variation of parameters approach which integrates analytically derived equations of motion computing the average effects of perturbations over an orbit This approach allows large multi orbit time steps and typically improves computational speed by several hundred times while still offering high fidelity computation of orbit parameters User inputs include an initial orbit and satellite mass area and drag coefficient The program implements the 1976 standard atmosphere to compute the drag effects Additionally LOP considers the effects of the Earth s oblateness through J21 the resonant effects of tesseral harmonics solar and lunar gravity and solar radiation pressure when computing the orbital perturbations The module is based on algorithms provided by NASA s Jet Propulsion Laboratory Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 1 13 PRO LOP PRO Lifetime PRO Terrain Introduction Lifetime Lifetime estimates the amount of time a low Earth orbiting satellite can be expected to remain in orbit before the drag of the atmosphere causes reentry While the computational algorithms are similar to those implemented in the Long term Orbit Predictor there are some important differences First a much more accurate atmospheric model is implemented to compute the drag effects The gravitational model for the Earth however is significantly simplified since the inclusion of the higher order
94. long description fields Detector Pitch The pitch angle relative to a body centered coordinate system of a detector Diameter A straight line passing through the center of a circle or sphere and meeting the circumference or surface at each end Digital Terrain Elevation Data DTED A collection of position and height data produced by the National Imagery Mapping Agency Direct Sun The condition in which the Sun is observed to be entirely unobscured Distance Unit Application Basic Properties Specifies the unit of measure to be used when referring to distance Options are feet kilometers statute miles meters and nautical miles Drift Orbit The slow movement of a geostationary satellite toward its final location A new geostationary satellite is usually delivered in an orbit slightly higher or lower than its final orbit then appears to drift slowly toward its final location The satellite may be halted temporarily through a Hohmann Transfer at an intermediate location to allow it to be tested without causing interference after which it continues its drift to its final location ECI Earth Centered Inertial A coordinate system with its origin at the center of the Earth and axes which are fixed in inertial space Used as a display option for orbits in the Perspective map projection ECF Earth Centered Fixed A coordinate system with its origin at the center of the Earth and axes which are fixed in the central
95. map Mass Unit Specifies the unit of measure to be used when referring to mass Two options are available kilograms and pounds mass not weight Glossary of Terms Mean Anomaly The angle measured from perigee of a hypothetical body moving with a uniform speed that is equal to the mean motion It is the product of the mean motion of the spacecraft and the interval of time since it passed perigee T is the orbital period and t is the time past periapsis 20 t M radians Mean Solar Time or Universal Time UT Time measured with reference to the motion of a fictitious body called the Mean Sun which moves at a constant rate Another way to state this assumption is that the Earth moves in a circular orbit around the sun and that the axis of rotation is perpendicular to the orbital plane ecliptic The time interval between two meridian crossings of the Mean Sun is exactly one solar day Due to the combined effects of the eccentricity of the Earth s orbit and the tilt of the Earth s rotation axis the real sun arrives at our local meridian a little early at certain times of the year and a little late at other times The difference between real solar time and mean solar time is called the Equation of Time Mean Equinox True Equator Coordinate System Specifies that the X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and true rotation axis of the Orbit Epoch date specified Mean Motion The uniform rate of the s
96. on the assigned access constraints Turn ON the Use Target Pointing Attitude option then use the Select Targets button to choose the targets A Target Pointing Attitude window appears Target Pointing Attitude ERS1 Available Targets Assigned Targets we Aircraft Facility Santiago ET EE sms m lew Time 30 000 sec QR Arearargett Facility WhiteSands v Santiago Satellite Shuttle se WhiteSands TargetTimes 7 GroundVehiclet 7 GroundVehicle2 BA sunchVohiciot OK Apply Cancel Help L You can also point a satellite at a facility area target or another satellite 6 36 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Highlight the target you wish to select in the Available Targets list and use the right arrow to move it to the Assigned Targets list Set the Slew Time for the time span in which you wish the satellite to change from its original attitude to a target pointing attitude and the amount of time required to change its pointing to another target Target Times You can also specify the time period during which the satellite points at the selected target In the Target Pointing Attitude window highlight the target of interest in the Assigned Targets list then click use the Target Times button A Target Schedule window appears Access Times J Use Access Times Target Facility WhiteSands Facility Santiago Satellite TDRS_4 Facility WhiteSands
97. orbits Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Attitude Type Description Spinning The satellite s Z axis is assumed to be the spin axis and is fixed in inertial space The direction of the spin axis is specified through two angles as determined by the Orientation Type see the following section The spin rate is specified in revolutions per minute positive values indicate rotation in a right handed sense with respect to the spin axis The initial orientation of the satellite is specified by using the spin offset and offset epoch fields The spin offset is an angular measure of the difference between the satellite orientation at the offset epoch from the orientation achieved by orienting the Z axis Spin about Nadir The satellite s Z axis is assumed to be the spin axis and aligned to nadir The other spin related fields are defined in the same manner as described for the spinning attitude above Spin About Sun The body fixed Z axis points to the Sun and the satellite Vector rotates about the Sun vector The other spin related fields are defined in the same manner as described for the spinning attitude above Inertially Fixed Maintains a constant orientation of the body fixed axes with respect to the inertial coordinate system The orientation of the body fixed axes is specified by three angles or a quaternion as determined by the Orientation Type see the following section External Attitude File You can use externa
98. perimeter points using the Point Table and buttons in the lower portion of the window If you define the sensor pattern using the Enter From Area Target Point Type enter the area target s file name To define the sensor pattern using the fields in the Custom Pattern window enter latitude and longitude or azimuth and elevation for each defining point Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 7 PRO Sensors then use the Insert Point button Repeat the procedure for the other perimeter values Use the Change Current Point option and the Modify Point button to modify an existing point in the list Use the Delete Point button to remove a point from the Point list The following figure illustrates a custom pattern sensor shaped like an arrow Figure 12 3 Custom pattern cone 0 dgarees Boresight y theta 90 degrees gt x radius Cross Section 3D View Advanced Rectangular Sensor Analysis The rectangle sensor type can be selected from among the options available on the definition tab of the sensor Basic Properties window 12 8 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual Sensors Enter the Verticle and Horizontal HalfAngles to define the retangular sensor shape Basic Properties Pointing a Sensor The Pointing tab enables you to point or direct a sensor by describing the sensor s direction relative to the object it is a subobject of or by selecting one or more targets for the sen
99. so that time periods set don t overlap If the Deconflict field is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the field is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the field is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that the overlap exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that the overlap is fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue If you ignore the message the satellite points at the first target until the target is no longer in sight Basic Properties Pass Break The Pass Break tab of the Basic Properties window for satellites allows you to specify the event that defines the boundary between passes or revolutions of an orbiting satellite 6 38 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual O A A T TE Satellites Pass breaks can be defined as the time that the satellite crosses a specified latitude boundary in either the ECF or ECI coordinate system You can define the pass break by choosing the direction of motion Ascending or Descending when the satellite crosses the specified latitude The default definition of the pass break is a 0 latitude in the inerti
100. solar radiation pressure Acceleration caused by drag is E A Y pV ap cp mha 2 Acceleration caused by solar radiation is ss c 4 E FAM 8ncr where Q coefficient for solar radiation GQ coefficient for drag A satellite cross sectional area M satellite mass p atmosphere density V satellite speed relative to the atmosphere L luminosity of the sun c speed of light r distance of satellite from sun The modified Harris Priester atmosphere density model uses the following default values for the specified parameters Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual D 3 HPOP Technical Notes Table D4 Harris Priester parameters Symbol Value F10 7 Solar Radio Flux 150 V Diurnal Bulge Lag Angle 30 e Diurnal Bulge Exponent 6 The user can specify any fixed value of F10 7 between 65 solar minimum and 275 slightly higher than the highest recorded solar maximum D 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Appendix E HIGH RESOLUTION MAPS TECHNICAL NOTES Overview The High Resolution Maps module is based on the Relational World Databank 2 RWDB2 RWDB2 is available to the public in ASCII format from the Earth Science Information Office of the U S Geological Survey The RWDB2 database was designed for producing small scale maps not for applications requiring high geodetic accuracy such as navigation Chapter Contents DEMO Sat es ee Gal acd ale ce biden ain casein ala aa hee en OR E
101. sun and moon drag and solar radiation pressure Pitch A rotation about the Y axis of a reference coordinate system This reference coordinate system can be a local system moving with the object a body fixed coordinate system or an inertial coordinate system Pitch is defined relative to the inertial coordinate system within STK Planet A solar system object that orbits around the Sun The word planet originates from the Latin for wanderer A11 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Posigrade Orbit An orbit in which the projection of the satellite s position on the Earth s equatorial plane revolves in the direction of the rotation of the Earth The inclination of a posigrade orbit is less than 90 degrees Precession Rotation of the orbital plane caused by the non spherical shape oblateness of the Earth Precessional motion is similar to that of a simple top the normal to the equatorial plane sweeps out a cone shaped surface in space with a semi vertex angle equal to the inclination 7 As the orbit precesses the line of intersection of the equator and the orbital plane line of nodes rotates westward for a posigrade orbit and eastward for a retrograde orbit Print Setup Files menu Set print parameters such as orientation width height layout output device color mode background and file format Properties Menu Pull Down Menu that allows the user to set basic graphics and constraints properties for
102. terms doesn t impact orbit decay estimates This allows significant performance advantages and provides a quicker turn around for the analyst User inputs include an initial orbit and satellite mass area and drag coefficient The program implements the Jacchia 1971 atmospheric model to compute the drag effects Additionally Lifetime considers the effects of the Earth s oblateness through J5 solar and lunar gravity and solar radiation pressure when computing the orbital perturbations The module is based on algorithms developed at NASA s Langley Research Center Terrain The Terrain module provides precise three dimensional 3 D terrain elevation data for the entire globe When used with STK Terrain exploits sophisticated multi dimensional interpolation algorithms to provide accurate 360 azimuth elevation masks for satellite access calculations from any point on the Earth s surface These algorithms also provide altitude information for user defined facilities and ground based targets For users of the VO module Terrain allows a vivid 3 D visual depiction of the Earth s true surface relief and its effect on satellite accesses 1 14 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction The data has a resolution of less than 30 arc seconds or approximately 1 kilometer at the Earth s surface In its compressed format the complete data set requires over 400 MB of storage However the data can be read directly from the CD ROM
103. that constellation into a chain 18 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Figure 18 1 A simple chain defined as Target LEO Relay Ground Station Picture captured in STK s Visualization Option VO module When the Chains module is activated the STK Browser window includes a Chains icon 8 amp and a Constellation icon EJ in the lower portion of the window aw The name of a chain object should adequately describe the objects within and or intent of i E id Hint each chain to help you distinguish among chains and to facilitate use of the chain in a scenario Basic Properties of a Chain A chain is a list of objects either single or constellation in order of access To identify the objects in a chain select Basic in the Properties pull down menu Because chains consist of a number of different objects there is no one marker in the Map window for a chain Therefore a chain doesn t possess graphics properties Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 18 3 Chains Module Definition The Define tab allows you to identify the objects in the chain and to order those objects for access purposes Chain Basic Properties Definition Description m Available Objects Chain Objects T2 Downlink Satellite ERS1 Sensor Downlink T2 Horizon Facility WhiteSands 455 Satellitel Ship CruiseShip Shuttle 4 TDRS 4 LA TDRS 5 SE CruiseShip Iceberg JT M
104. that the overlap is fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue The sensor target can be selected from the list of assigned targets External Pointing Files If you wish to use an external sensor file select External as the Pointing Type then specify the correct the file name Basic Properties Resolution The Resolution tab enables you to define the resolution of the sensor in terms of focus and image quality 12 16 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual Sensors Downlink Basic Properties Definition Pointing Resolution Description m Focus Constants Focal Length m 0 000 Detector Pitch 0 000 um OK Apply Cancel Help In the Focus Constants field enter the focal length and detector pitch of the optical sensor These constants are used in the computation of the Ground Sample Distance GSD for the sensor The GSD is computed as detector pitch range focal length sin elevation GSD Graphics Properties Sensor Attributes The fields in the Attributes tab allow you to specify the graphical display of the sensor in the Map window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 17 Sensors attributes Projection Display Times Color green nf Line Style Solid Line Width 1 4 OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in the Attributes tab a
105. the current animation time Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 43 Satellites Field Description Leading Trailing Orbit Track Orbit tracks are only visible when the Perspective Map Projection is selected Graphics Properties Display Times The fields in this tab allow you to control the time periods when the satellite graphics are displayed in the Map window ERS Graphics Properties Attributes Pass Display Tines Contours Display Status Use Intervals 4 Stop 31 Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 1 Nov 1997 03 59 59 00 Deconflict None t OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite graphics can be displayed or removed from the Map window based on time intervals specified here Choose among Use Intervals Always On or Aways Off If you choose the Use Intervals option the Start and Stop Times specified in the list box are used as the time intervals during which satellite graphics display in the Map window If you choose the Always On option satellite graphics always display in the Map window regardless of the 6 44 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites intervals specified in the list box If you choose the Always Off option satellite graphics never display in the Map window To specify the times during which satellite graphics should display in the Map window use the Add button To modify a time interval in the list box highlight the time period of interest and use the Cha
106. the object above or below the reference ellipsoid Altitude is measured along the normal to the surface of the ellipsoid Graphics Properties Attributes The fields in the Attributes tab are used to specify the graphical display of the area target in the Map window SearchArea Graphics Properties Attributes Color Bus E 4 Inherit Settings Line Style Solid 4 Show Label Line Width 3 Z4 Marker Style Es OK Apply Cancel Help There are six fields in the Attributes window 10 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Area Target Table 10 6 Area target atributes Field Description Color Select the color in which you wish the area target to appear in the Map window Line Style Choose among Solid Long Dash Dotted Dot Dash or Dashed Marker Styles Available options include square circle star plus sign point or an X You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your STK Home STKData Pixmaps directory Pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style options menu Line Width 1 narrow 5 wide Inherit Settings If ON the inherit settings defined in the scenarios Map Attributes tab are used If OFF STK ignores the inherit settings for the scenario Show Label Only available if the Inherit Settings feature is turned OFF If ON the area target label displays in the
107. the satellite is loaded e File Load Load the selected TLE data and replace all previous TLE data currently associated with the satellite File Insert Add the selected TLE data but keep previous TLE data currently associated with the satellite Online Load Go directly to Analytical Graphics Inc World Wide Web site to download the latest TLE sets Max TLE Limit Limit the number of TLE sets that can be saved with the satellite If the limit set in the Max TLE Limit field is exceeded STK purges the oldest TLE data based on the TLE Epoch date TLE File Displays the selected TLE file Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 25 Satellites Option Description TLE Selection Displays one or more TLE sets Advanced Advanced options for multiple TLE sets are available using the Advanced button Element Set Switching Method Epoch 4 F Apply To All Element Sets Start Time 14 May 1997 08 38 09 39 Range 0 000 nm TE 1 19883U 83021B 97134 35983094 00000274 00000 0 10000 3 0 0332 2 19883 000 5416 086 8407 0001586 319 6873 274 1416 01 0026866220242 LL Element Set Number OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in this window are discussed in the table following 6 26 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table 6 13 TLE advanced options Satellites Option Description Switching Method Defines when to switch between TLE sets Epoch
108. the status area If the object is a vehicle or vehicle track a message window appears displaying the object s location pass number vehicle crossing time and pass direction ascending or descending pad You can change the animation time in the status bar by clicking on the time displayed in E the bar and typing over it You can also type in today tomorrow yesterday and now asa A Hint time Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 3 17 The Map Window Animating a Scenario As you define and analyze a scenario using STK you can animate the scenario to more fully understand time based relationships and interactions Because satellite systems are so dynamic it is important to analyze the scenario in motion For the animation of a scenario to be meaningful the objects in the scenario with time dependencies should be properly defined For example vehicles must have ephemeris within the animation period to be affected by the scenario animation Animating the scenario displays vehicles moving along their ground tracks the intersections of sensors with the central body and the subobject locations for planet and stars If you re animating a scenario in the Map window and need to perform other tasks in STK you may want to first Pause the animation and then begin other tasks If you animate while multitasking all other processes applications are slowed down Animation and its Relationship to Vehicle Tracks I
109. this manual Making Choices in STK Another fundamental concept in STK involves toggle buttons option menus lists and radio buttons that provide you with a choice of options Selecting Multiple Objects You can select multiple objects in the Browser window by pressing and holding the to select tangent objects or to select miscellaneous objects Once you ve selected multiple objects in the Browser you can use the Report and Graph tools to collectively display information about the objects 2 18 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Toggle Buttons Toggle buttons are those which flip between two opposite conditions Toggle buttons appear raised when they are not selected If you click on them they appear pushed in or depressed indicating that they are selected For example on the Pass tab of the Graphics Properties window for a vehicle you can click on a toggle button Ll such as Orbit Lead Type to turn the lead orbit tracks ON or OFF in the Map window The picture following shows several toggle buttons In UNIX toggle buttons are typically square Figure 2 3 Satellite Pass tab illustrating toggle buttons radio buttons and option menus Selected Radio Button Option Menu Attributes Pass DisplayTimes Unselected Overall i HP Show TUSCE eee d e Visible Sides Show Pass From rms To Last r Trailing Leading Ground Track Orbit Lead Type Time 4 1200000 sec W Lea
110. to insert a previously defined object into the current scenario A7 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Instance A specific occurrence of an object class For example the ERS1 vehicle is one instance of the vehicle class J2 Perturbation An analytical orbit propagator that accounts for secular variations in the orbital elements due to the first order Earth oblateness effects J4 Perturbation An analytical orbit propagator that accounts for secular variations in the orbital elements due to first and second order Earth oblateness effects J2000 Coordinate System Specifies that X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and mean rotation axes of the Earth at January 1 2000 at 12 00 00 00 UTC J2000 0 2000 January 1 5 JD 2451545 0 TDB Barycentric Dynamic Time Julian Date JD The sequential day count reckoned consecutively beginning on 1 January 4713 BC The Julian Date for 1 January 1990 was 2 446 892 Keplerian Elements A set of six parameters which together describe the shape and orientation of an elliptical orbit around the Earth as well as the position of a satellite in that orbit at a given epoch The usual elements are Right Ascension of the Ascending Node Argument of the Perigee Mean Anomaly Semi Major Axis Inclination and Eccentricity Kepler s Equation An equation that relates Mean Anomaly M Eccentric Anomaly E and Eccentricity e namely M E e sinE The equation is us
111. ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch and v1 through v3 are the three components of the vector This format is primarily used for rockets where the pointing direction is known but the orientation about the pointing vector may not be known The vector specifies the orientation of the body X axis in the ECF frame The body is then rotated to constrain the body Z axis and provide the minimum angle relative to nadir For example 123 456 1 0 0 0 0 0 The AttitudeTimeECFVector format doesn t require a Sequence keyword A sample AttitudeTimeQuaternion format is provided below for your reference Listing C 1 Attitude File Format S BI tk v 3 0 EGIN Attitude NumberOfAttitudePoints ScenarioEpoch 1 Jan 1995 00 00 00 0 AttitudeTimeQuaternions 0 000 0 0000000000 0 0000000000 0 0000000000 1 0000000000 15 558 0 0678338906 0 0000000000 0 0000000000 0 9976966289 30 644 0 1333127632 0 0000000000 0 0000000000 0 9910740170 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK END Attitude Az El File aem Format The data in an external az el file should start at zero azimuth and go to an azimuth of 360 Elevation values can range from 90 to 90 The format of each data line is azimuth elevation A sample Az El file is shown below Listing C2 Sample Az El File Format stk v 3 0 BEGIN AzElMask NumberOfPoints 67 Begin AzElMaskData co JAUO oo0o0o0o0o0o
112. under the specified All condition Select one of the following options Direct Sun total sunlight Lighting Penumbra or Direct Sun partial or total sunlight Penumbra partial sunlight Penumbra or Umbra partial sunlight or total shadow Umbra total shadow Umbra or Direct Sun total shadow or total sunlight Solar Lunar Only applies when calculating access to a star or Obstruction planet Obstruction occurs when access to the star or planet is blocked by the Sun or Moon Constraints Temporal The fields in the Temporal tab allow you to impose time based constraints on the facility or target 9 16 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities amp Targets Basic sun Temporal Start End Local 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 GMT 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 FW Local Apparent 00 00 000000 o000 000000 00 00 0000 z400000000 00 00 0000 Duration m mn ome F Max 5500 00 sec oo 5500 00 sec OK Apply Cancel Help Table 9 10 Facility target temporal constraints Fields Local GMT Local Apparent Duration Description Constraints apply to Start and end local time constraints The local All time offset from GMT for facilities and targets is set in the basic properties for the specified facility or target Start and end GMT time constraints Start and end local apparent times Using local All apparent time at noon the sun is at the h
113. vector to the Sun is in the direction of the orbit normal The orbit normal is parallel to the orbital angular momentum vector which is defined as the cross product of the inertial position and velocity vectors Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Constraint applies to P V F T R P V F T R P V 6 55 Satellites Fields Description Constraint applies to Min Max Grazing The grazing altitude is defined by the closest P V Attitude distance that the line of sight between the satellite and the other object comes to the Earth This constraint can be used to prevent a communications link between the two objects from getting too far down into the atmosphere which might degrade the quality of the link Grazing Altitude Background Constrain access periods based on whether the Earth is or is not in the background This constraint can be used to limit access from the satellite to another vehicle Space Constrains accesses when only space is in the background of the other object e Ground Constrains accesses when only the ground is in the background Secondary Object Primary Object Min Max Ground Measured with respect to targets or facilities Elevation Angle The elevation angle is measured relative to the target or facility as the angle between the local horizontal and the direction of the satellite 6 56 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Fields
114. w N 61 62 63 99 First order Second order Third order Special boundaries Pre unification German administration lines First order boundaries in the water Second order boundaries in the water Third order boundaries in the water Disputed lines or lines under discussion Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual High Resolution Maps Technical Notes Comments o Provincial boundaries are provided for the United States and Canada only Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual E 9 High Resolution Maps Technical Notes NOTES E 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual STK USER S MANUAL INDEX Adding an Object 2 6 2 Advanced Analysis Astrodynamics 1 10 e Attitude Simulation 1 10 Attributes 2 12 Data Management 1 11 Output Device 2 12 Y Data Visualization 1 11 Page Layout 2 12 Sensor Constraints 1 10 Prinert Command 2 12 a Sensor Definition 1 10 A Advanced Analysis 1 9 Attitude Targeting 1 10 About MK 17 9 Advanced Constraints Accelerator Keys 2 21 Aircraft 6 54 7 10 Access 13
115. year Glossary of Terms Equidistant Cylindrical A Map projection type that is mathematically based on a cone that is tangent at one parallel or conceptually secant at two parallels North or south pole is represented by an arc Equinoctial Elements Specify an orbit by the size and a set of composite elements that collectively describe the shape and orientation of the orbit The composite elements are the projections of the eccentricity and nodal vectors onto the orbit plane This element set has the advantage of being well defined for all orbit types Equinox The moment at which the Sun as viewed from the Earth appears to cross the celestial equator The vernal equinox occurs on 21 March of each year while the autumnal equinox occurs on 22 September Exclusion Zone An area on the Earth s surface inaccessible to a spacecraft s antennas or sensors For example the areas near the pole are exclusion zones for geostationary satellites May also refer to a region of space within which a vehicle may not be accessed Exit Files menu Quit the current STK session Facility A fixed location on the Earth s surface representing ground stations launch sites tracking station or other structures providing satellite support functions Field of View FOV The subtended angle of visibility for a viewing object or sensor Figure of the Earth The shape of the Earth as approximated by a spheroid of revolution 1 e a ge
116. 0 Description 2 17 First Pass Number 6 40 Display Times 9 9 iuge cou Mia MF a g ixed Boresight 12 COPI aanas Ete Fixed Coordinate System 6 12 6 29 Fixed Sensors 12 12 Fixed DeltaV 85 Graphics Properties Fixed Sensor Pointing 1 2 10 Attributes 9 6 Fixed Time of Flight 8 5 Flight Path Angle 6 11 6 12 is El Me ide Focus Constants 12 17 Display Times 299 Force Models 6 15 6 18 Load TLE 14 20 Frequency Unit 5 10 Position 29 2 Properties of 9 1 G Sun 9 1 3 Gaussian Quadratures 13 18 Tempora see 0C Geocentric Position 9 5 10 5 Facility Database 14 1 14 5 codec c ANN as Querying the Database 14 6 uc dU EE QU Ad Global Attributes 14 search Results 14 7 Global Positioning System GPS 18 2 Facility Database File Format C32 GMT 6 53 Facility TIE 14 20 Graph Styles 15 15 Field of View Constraint 12 21 Options
117. 0 000000 Cd 2000000 Average F10 7 150 r Solar Radiation Pressure FT Use r Third Body Gravity Cp zoo 7 F Use Solar Gravity W Use Lunar Gravity OK Apply Cancel The fields available in the HPOP Force Model window are described in the table following Table 8 Force model options Maximum Degree The maximum degree of Geopotential coefficients to be included for Earth gravity computations Valid range is from Maximum Order The maximum order of Geopotential coefficients to be included for Earth gravity computations Valid range is from 0 to the Maximum Degree Option Description Earth Gravity Specify 0 to 70 Drag Specify the following 6 16 CD Coefficient of drag Atmosphere Density Model Additional parameters depending on model selected see table below Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Option Description Solar Radiation Pressure If ON specify the coefficient of solar radiation pressure Third Body Gravity Choose to include one or both Solar Gravity Effects of solar gravity on the satellite Lunar Gravity Effects of lunar gravity on the satellite Physical Data Enter the area mass ratio in square meters per kilogram The size of the gravity field used greatly affects the time required to compute the orbit of the satellite For this reason we recommend that lower degrees and order be specified
118. 1 Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles ExternallAttude Ele a dd e rete e ea 7 6 Graphics Properties Attributes sss 7 6 Graphics Properties Display Times 7 8 Aircraft Ground Vehicle amp Ship Constraints sse 7 9 Constraints Advanced Aircraft Only 7 10 Route To define a route for your ship aircraft or ground vehicle open the Basic Properties window for the object In the Route tab you can define the trajectory which the object follows At the top of this panel the Start Time and Stop Time fields specify the temporal boundaries of your aircraft ground vehicles and ships The default values for Start Time and Stop Time are your scenario start and stop times The Step Size field specifies the interval between calculated ephemeris output points The default value is 60 seconds You can choose to use the Great Arc Propagator or an external file containing route information The Great Arc Propagator defines aircraft ground vehicles and ships that follow a point by point path over the surface of the Earth at a given altitude The waypoints specified represent a particular latitude longitude altitude and speed along the path Great Arc paths each of which lies in a plane that contains the center of the Earth are used to connect the waypoints 7 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Route attitude Atmosphere Description Start Time 1 N
119. 1 Classical coordinate relationships vyeti inne e aia 6 7 Figure 6 2 Satellite elevation angle constraint 0 eter 6 49 Figure 6 3 Satellite exclusion zone constraint 22 eee tenet etree eee 6 57 Figure 221 EXtended CONG sess EL Lote RE ots 12 4 Figure T 2 2 Hal POWE CORNE y ett eee tle desee t ces tta 12 6 Figure 12 3 Custom patteri cone ua e te eee Pede beet 12 8 Figure 13 1 A typical Map window showing access between the ERST satellite and theSantidgo facility ada v tette eee Dent eeu 13 5 Figure 13 2 A sample Access Report showing access data for the ERST satellite to The Santiago tac ct een 13 6 Figure 13 3 A sample AER Report showing access data for ERS1 to the Santiago PAGING te tos ast A at Maan 13 7 Figure 13 4 A sample Graph Data window showing access data for the ERS1 Satellite to the Santiago facil viciosa ni ile 13 9 Figure 13 5 Diagram showing access scheme for targeted sensors 13 11 Figure 13 6 A sample AER Report showing lighting data for the Shuttle 13 13 Figure 13 7 A sample Lighting Times Report for the Shuttle sssse 13 14 Figure 13 8 Sample Lifetime report summarizing Keplerian elements 13 21 Figure 13 9 Sample Lifetime graph showing the evolution of the orbital parameters height of apogee height of perigee and inclination ee 13 22 Figure 13 10 The Map window showing a Walker seed satellite and its children two planes each with tw
120. 1 GroundStation Target2 Leo Relay 1 GroundStation The Individual Object Access Report lists pair wise access times for each object in the chain Use the scroll bars on the right and bottom of the window to view additional data You can also click and drag the corner of the window to enlarge the size so that all data displays 18 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Complete Chain Access The complete chain access is the time period during which access between all objects in a chain is possible through one or more individual strands A chain access encompasses the total contiguous time period during which mutual visibility of all chain objects is possible through one or more individual strands The Complete Chain Access Report shows access times during which access between all objects in a chain is possible through one or more individual strands Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 18 11 q i a A i i Hint Chains Module The Report window can remain open even if the STK Report Tool window is closed Creating Graphs for Chains Graphing functions are also available for the coverage definition and figure of merit objects Choose the graph type you wish to create then choose the appropriate elements for the X and Y axes When you finish use the Display button to display the graph Interval Strand Access Graph Following is an example showing individual strand access graph Figure
121. 11 1 Star definition options Field Description Position The star s position at the reference epoch of J2000 Right Ascension The angle in the equatorial plane measured in a right handed rotation about the inertial Z axis from the inertial X axis Declination The angle out of the inertial equator measured towards the inertial positive Z axis How the star moves relative to the solar system barycenter expressed in arc seconds per year Proper Motion The visual brightness of the star Currently this field isn t used Magnitude 11 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Stars amp Planets Field Description Parallax The apparent motion of the star due to changes in the Earth s position relative to the solar system barycenter Basic Properties Defining a Planet The Definition tab allows you to identify the ephemeris for a planet Jupiter Basic Properties Definition Description Ephemeris Source JPL DE403 Jupiter 4 y Analytic v File E Radius 0 0000 nm OK Apply Cancel Help You can define ephemeris using Jet Propulsion Laboratory JPL DE403 file shipped with STK or specify a file of your own that conforms to the external planetary file format Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 11 3 Stars amp Planets Table 1 1 2 Planet definition elements Field Description Ephemeris Source Specify one e JPL DE403 STK is shipped with
122. 18 t ading a Satellite TEs oia et e ed ee ES 14 18 lSadiig a Facillty ILE tct tot ettet itt oth eet 14 20 GbJect Desernptilon a teer SE te tet ns 14 22 REPORTS SCESRAPEISSS ad ab p UR tira NET Using the STK Report Graph ToOol sse 152 Changing Time Periods for Reports amp Graphs oo eee 15 3 Managing Report Graph Styles sssssssssse 154 RED OME WIC tat a Cono rm as 15 5 heport Properties ario eee nie obit Feuer eee eei e ere dee ases 15 6 CONTENU c E 15 7 Heade RA 15 11 Goa an Mare oH 15 12 Graphi Properties ud herr here re edet olt ea 15 15 COMME iii ER e tdt etel ER e El n Elo citet 15 15 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual ix Table of Contents Layos a es aos E C rs 15 17 DYNAMIC DISPLAYS S STRIP CHARTS otros ata HORDE OEM WA AA e t Oe D ER E UR Ee Rus 16 1 Chapter Come ET 16 1 The STK Dynamic Display Strip Chart Tool Window 0 eee 16 2 Managing Dynamic Display Strip Chart Styles ec eee 16 3 Dynamic Display WINDOW 2 5 eter id nites oce tette tee 164 Dynamic Display Properties 16 5 Monza 16 6 Strip GE WN Wise te C ee ee p eter rt ice Pe Peel eee eds 16 8 Strip Chart die ostiis 16 10 ena E 16 11 PAV OU E m 16 13 SRA TOPICS Teide hee nemen hl ene he eet Mnt pete 17 2 Selecting an HMTL Browser 17 2 Opening Help from the Browser Window sRR 17 3 Opening Help from a Property Window emm 17 3 CNO Emir nc LI E CS 17 3 P
123. 2 0 022 2 838 32 000 1 161 0 019 2 836 34 000 1 139 0 012 2 835 36 000 T3112 0 008 2 835 38 000 1 005 0 003 2 835 END Torques Color Bitmap Pixmap bmp xpm File Format You can import a color pixmap xpm for UNIX or bmp for PC file to be used as a map background image or graphics marker for an object To create a pixmap use a pixmap utility such as pixmap UNIX or MS Paint PC The pixmap application can be found at ftp x org it currently resides in the R5contrib folder Listing C 6 Pixmap File Format XPM static char star width height num_colors chars_per_pixel 20 16 4 pU colors C ff ffff c 9D9b9b Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C 19 Importing Files into STK a c 12ff86 b c 000000 pixels EM EM bbbbbbabbbbbbb bb bbbabbbbbbb bbb bb bb bbbb bbbb b b bbbbb bbbbb bbbbbb bbbbbb bbbbbbb t bbbb b b bbbbb tt st bbbbbb bb bbbb t 4t bbbbbb bbbbbbb tit 44 obbbbbabbbbbbb tit 44 obbbbbabbbbbbb tt HERE LDAHHHIRIHIE FERETE AEAEE HERE EEEH Database File Formats You can use your own databases to import satellites cities facilities and stars into STK The individual databases used by the Satellite City Facility and Star Database tools are discussed in the sections following Satellite Database The Satellite Database is
124. 2 Basic Properties Setting Animation Options sss 54 Basic Properties Setting Units of Measure 5 7 Entering Units in Text Fields 5 11 Basic Properties Setting Default Databases 5 11 SS A TN 5 12 Adding Terrain Elevation Data sssssm 5 13 Graphics Properties Global Attributes sss 5 14 Graphics Properties Sun Lighting sss 5 16 Basic Properties Setting the Time Period The Time Period tab allows you to specify the Epoch of your scenario and the Start Stop Times of your scenario in established units Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Tutorial Basic Properties Time Period Animation Units Database Environment Terrain Description Period Start 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 Stop 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 Epoch 1 Jan 1897 00 00 00 00 OK Apply Cancel Help To ensure that all vehicles have ephemeris in the same time frame propagate the vehicles using the scenario s Time Period tab If you change the Start and Stop Times in this tab STK automatically propagates all vehicles in your scenario over the specified time period Formats for all time related fields are dependent upon the Time Units set at the scenario level Refer to page 5 7 The scenario s Time Period is also used as the default time period for operations involving objects that don t have an implicit sense of availability A vehicle
125. 23 Table Gz7 Car iia Ra et Permet An C 26 Table ES Cardi2 s at beet ba e mee be aed oe a e C 27 Table C 9 City database tiles 2 2 mee e rec e c qnt C 30 Table C510 stkCItyDD cd flle descriptioh aeter tt tt edges C 30 Table C 11 stkFacility database files 00 0 eee RR C 32 Table C T12 stkFacilityfa filedescrIptio n uito to ete ee Hore en o ets C 33 Table C 13 stkStarDb database files sss C 34 Table C 14 stkStarDb cd file description C 35 Table C 15 stkStarDb bn file description ooo C 36 Table D 1 Physical COmStants 1 ce De od ee bent D 2 Table D 2 Astronomical time SyStEM 0 eect nnn e D 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual xix Table of Contents Table D 3 Coefficients of drag and solar radiation pressure vo ee D 3 Table D 4 Harris Priester parameters RR D 4 Code Listings Listing BeA STK CUSTOM Pattern Flea eme lente desee e a d B 6 Listiig B 2 AZsEl Mask FOrmMa i iene e t e LER RR EE B 8 Listing B 3 Angle off boresight pattern iaith e eaaa ieat B 10 Listing Ge hy JATITUdE File FO aE ny Geek e t e eee C7 Listing E 2 Sample AzEl Ele format caca faac ctt echec laica C8 Listing C 3 ECITimePosVel File Forats a em C 15 Listing C 4 Sample Planetary Ephemeris File Format eee C 17 Listing C 5 Sample Torque File Format ssssssmmmmRRRRRRRRRRR C 18 Listing 6 6 PixMap File FORMA cots erret re A EE C 19 Listing C 7 Example of owner mission file for the
126. 24 0248 0002246 262 3037 227 1814 01 0027393100088 L 23757U 95074A 96096 09776230 00000555 00000 0 17404 4 0 0063 2 23757 022 9772 189 2860 0013321 265 4654 094 4354 14 9762623401449 City Database The City Database is comprised of a total of three files You can create your own City Database by following the format expected required by STK For example the stkCityDb database the database shipped with STK includes the following files Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C29 Importing Files into STK Table C9 City database files File Contents stkCityDb cd Main database file stkCityDb cc Counties stkCityDb gd Latest update information The first file contains fixed width fields where one row represents a single entry The remaining are in the standard STK database file format File formats for the city database are described in the subsections following stkCityDb cd File This is the main City Database file it contains all searchable fields The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C10 stkCityDb cd file description Column Description 0 6 City Key Unique integer identifier 7 36 City Name 37 38 2 City Type 0 Populated Place 1 Administration Center e 2 National Capital 3 Territorial Capital 39 58 Country 59 98 Province State 99 101 Province rank 102 112 Population C30 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK
127. 2409 181 5343 847500 2736 385312 073 159870 353 054485 826122 414937 807491 542 408 157 462 596 317 448 561 206 808 858 089 536 179 646 784 6019616 386 3413 286064 278 605297 336 5465600 255 2679 825521 327040 698 1541199 4796037 111 1900 073243 4026407 100 1090 739409 3173770 169 268 218800 2256394 786 551 622744 1293406 737 1353 600749 304459 508 2123 316980 690574 686 2847 230851 1671895 2620053 3516214 4342422 6975286 6998208 6871206 6594825 6172911 966 781 250 338 537 867 220 550 580 3512 710923 4108 079054 4622 658410 5046 835053 5428 751874 5111 591744 4679 511693 4138 440091 3497 126345 5612720 047 2767 253486 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 556 1123544 523 4924947 255 006 2061262 792 4123656 465 1963 443438 1103 122498 Importing Files into STK 14220 000 6901901 712 2950788 969 3226084 412 206 220628 4767 503483 5217 967451 14400 000 6857030 937 3770548 411 2252316 806 705 310130 4322 121510 5580 806890 END Ephemeris Planetary Ephemeris File pe Format The date field that is used for planetary is Julian Ephemeris Date Julian Ephemeris Date is the Julian Date representation of Terrestrial Dynamical Time TDT which is equal to Atomic Time TAI plus 32 184 seconds UTC differ
128. 3 1811 Ground Vehicles 6 54 7 10 e od a id Launch Vehicles 6 54 7 10 MEE Qu c NM Ca Missiles 654 7 10 Bal F Satelites 6 54 7 10 Rd Sensors 12 24 Sur E Ee SH 6 54 7 10 t 13 SES SN Advanced Options ios s be d s ad Close Approach TooI 13 32 a APPIA i e Advanced Settings Access Graphics 13 34 LOP 6 20 iocus P sed Advanced TLE 6 26 9 AER Data Acknowledge 4 A Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 11 Index Access _ 13 7 AER Report 13 13 Lighting 13 13 Aircraft Access 13 3 Basic Properties Attitude 7 4 Route 7 2 Constraints Advanced 6 54 7 10 Basic 6 47 SuUNn 6 50 Temporal 6 52 Description 2 17 Graphics Properties Attributes 7 6 Display Times 7 8 Great Arc Propagator 2 Properties of 7 1 Step Size 7 2 Swathi 13 23 Alignment at Epoch 6 13 ALO 18 7 Allow Async Allow Connect
129. 360 0 The longitude of a point is the angle between the projection of the position vector in the equatorial plane and the prime meridian It is measured as increasing in a counterclockwise sense when viewed from the north pole Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 5 PRO Terrain WSS Note Facilities amp Targets Field Description Attitude Specified above or below the reference ellipsoid Altitude is measured along the normal to the surface of the ellipsoid Basic Properties Az El Mask In the Az El Mask tab specify the type of data to be used for the facility s azimuth elevation and mask If you choose Terrain the data specified in the Terrain tab of the scenario s Basic Properties window If you specify Az El Mask enter the file name of the az el mask file in the Mask field The file should be in the format detailed in Appendix C of this manual In the Height Adjustment option specify the adjustment in height from the Earth s surface to the facility s or target s true height This is useful for positioning a specific sensor or point of interest Terrain data doesn t include structures such as buildings Refer to Appendix C for detailed information about file format requirements for importing data into STK Graphics Properties Attributes The fields in the Attributes tab control the graphical display of the facility or target in the Map window 9 6 Satellite Tool KitO
130. 4 2817197887316 46U 60007B 96206 07691753 00000013 00000 0 22917 4 0 0897 2 46 066 6913 068 8100 0237430 118 0002 244 5344 14 3768009787795 1 58U 60013A 96206 11147628 00000075 00000 0 18707 4 0 0205 2 58 028 3283 091 6008 0165323 173 5795 186 6915 13 4601762576200 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C 25 Importing Files into STK stkActiveTLE gd File This is the generic database file It contains information concerning the last update of the database This file is used by the online update option to determine which records to supply This file is in a basic STK data file format Listing C9 Example of stkActiveTLE gd file BEGIN DatabaseUpdate Version 1 0 LastUpdate 19970405 END DatabaseUpdate TLE File Format TLE files consist of a listing of two line element sets as provided by the U S Space Command USSC TLE sets are used by the Merged Simplified General Perturbation MSGP4 propagator within STK The following table describes the format of a TLE set Table C7 Card 1 Column Description 1 Card number 2 Blank 3 7 Satellite or SSC number 8 Security classification 9 Blank 10 17 International number C26 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Column 18 19 20 21 32 33 3443 44 45 52 53 54 61 62 63 64 65 68 Table C8 Card 2 Column 2 3 7 9 16 17 18 25 26 27 33 Importing Files into STK Description Blank Epoch Year Epoc
131. 6 8 Mixed Spherical 6 10 Spherica 6 1 1 Copy Function 2 15 Country 144 Country File Format C 31 Creating a Chain 18 3 Creating a New Object 2 6 Cursor Position Latitude and Longitude 3 17 Custom Sensor Angle Off Boresight B 9 Az El Mask B 7 Reference Plane B 2 Custom Sensor Patterns 12 6 B 1 Customizing a Report Access 13 8 Cut Function 2 15 Cylindrical Position 9 5 10 5 D Data Management 1 11 Data Visualization 1 1 1 Database City 141 14 2 Facility _ 14 1 14 5 Satellite 14 1 14 8 Star 14 1 14 14 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Index Database Defaults 5 12 Database File Formats C 20 Database Tab 5 11 Database Type 5 12 Date Format 5 9 Dedlination 6 12 11 2 14 16 Declination Angle 6 34 Deconf
132. 6 92 1 Nov 1997 14 04 46 3329 578 1 Nov 1997 14 41 03 57 1 Nov 1997 15 36 33 3329 999 1 Nov 1997 16 12 51 35 1 Nov 1997 17 08 21 3329 781 1 Nov 1997 17 44 39 30 1 Nov 1997 18 40 09 3329 807 1 Nov 1997 19 16 26 81 1 Nov 1997 20 11 56 3330 166 1 Nov 1997 20 48 13 83 1 Nov 1997 21 43 43 3329 799 1 Nov 1997 22 20 00 28 1 Nov 1997 23 15 30 3330 518 1 Nov 1997 23 51 48 43 2 Nov 1997 00 00 00 491 569 Global Statistics Min Duration 1 Nov 1997 23 51 48 43 2 Nov 1997 00 00 00 491 569 Max Duration 1 Nov 1997 22 20 00 28 1 Nov 1997 15 30 3330 518 Mean Duration 3032 894 Total Duration 51559 205 zzi This report shows the Start and Stop Times of the different lighting conditions along with the obstructing body in the cases of Penumbra and Umbra Lifetime Module The Lifetime tool estimates the amount of time a satellite can be expected to remain in orbit before atmospheric drag and other perturbations cause it to decay Based upon algorithms developed at NASA s Langley Research Center Lifetime includes a highly accurate Jacchia 1970 atmosphere model to compute drag effects between altitudes of 90 km and 2500 km and a U S Standard Atmosphere 1976 model for altitudes below 90 km Lifetime also 13 14 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools uses a simplified Earth gravitational model to enhance performance and provide quicker results Since the inclusion of higher order terms doesn t significantl
133. 9 Missiles 8 9 Targets 9 9 Display Dynamic See Dynamic Display Distance Unit 5 8 Diurnal Rotation 1 12 DODS Elements 6 10 Drag 6 16 6 19 Drag Area 13 16 Drag Coeffient 13 16 Drag Cross Sectional Area 6 20 2 20 Duration 6 53 9 17 10 9 Dynamic Display 16 1 Content 16 6 Properties 16 5 Title ______ 16 7 E Earth Gravity 6 16 6 19 Eccentric Anomaly __6 7 Eccentricity 6 5 6 23 ECF Velocity Alignment Radial Constraint 6 32 7 6 8 7 mole ECI Velocity Alignment Nadir Constraint 6 32 7 5 8 6 ECITimePosVel File Format C 15 Edit Menu Copy 2 15 Cut 2 15 Paste 2 15 Element Set Number 6 24 6 27 Elevation Angle 648 9 12 10 8 l 6 Elevation Rate 9 12 Ellipse Osculating 6 14 Elliptical Orbit 6 15 Elset Number 5 15 Ephemeris File Format
134. 97 04 00 00 0 Remove Add Change 1 Nov 1337 00 00 00 00 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 Deconflict None 4 OK Apply Cancel Help Facility and target graphics can be displayed or removed from the Map window based on time intervals specified here Choose among Use Intervals Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 9 Facilities amp Targets Aways On or Always Off If you choose the Use Intervals option the Start and Stop Times specified in the list box are used as the time intervals during which facility target graphics display in the Map window If you choose the Always On option facility target graphics always display in the Map window regardless of the intervals specified in the list box If you choose the Always Off option facility target graphics never display in the Map window To specify the times during which facility target graphics should display in the Map window enter the Start and Stop Times then click on the Add button Use the Change button to modify a time interval Use the Remove button to remove a time period from the list You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that time periods don t overlap If the Deconflict option is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the option is set to None no changes are made to time interval
135. Always Off If you choose the Use Intervals option the Start and Stop Times specified in the list box are used as the time intervals during which 12 20 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual Sensors facility target graphics display in the Map window If you choose the Always On option facility target graphics always display in the Map window regardless of the intervals specified in the list box If you choose the Always Off option facility target graphics never display in the Map window To specify the times during which facility target graphics should display in the Map window enter the Start and Stop Times then use the Add button Use the Change button to modify a time interval in the list Use the Remove button to remove a time period from the list You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that display time periods don t overlap If the Deconflict field is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the field is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the field is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that the overlap exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that the overlap is fixed c
136. Database File Format C 34 Stars i14 Access 1 3 3 Attributes 1 1 4 Basic Properties Definition 11 2 Definition 11 2 Description 2 1 7 Graphics Properties 1 1 4 l 17 Index Attributes 1 1 4 Properties of 1 1 1 Star Database 14 14 Starting STK 2 3 State 144 Status 14 10 Status Bar 3 6 3 17 Step Count 12 19 Step Size Aircraft 7 2 Ground Vehicles 7 2 Launch Vehicles 8 2 missiles 8 2 Satellites 6 3 Ships 7 2 Stereographic Projection 3 1 1 STK Exiting 2 3 STK Dynamic Display Window 162 STK External Propagator 6 27 STK Files Importing C 1 STK Hierarchical Structure 2 3 STK PRO 1 9 Advanced Analysis 1 9 High Resolution Maps Module 1 15 HP
137. Default margins are 0 25 inches Attributes The options in this section allow you to specify the format of reports and graphs when printing Choices are Font Style Choose the font to be used to print text for reports and graphs Available fonts can be found in the STK run control file a4 x E The Lines per Page field is based on a nonproportional font such as Helvetica For reports i it is best to use a nonproportional font such as Helvetica 10 point so that the printed Hint report looks professional For graphs you can choose a larger font Selecting a File Sometimes you may wish to import an object file or data into your scenario Click on the button in the current window to browse through a list of available files A Select File window appears For information about importing specific types of files in STK lt please refer to Appendix B of this manual Note 2 14 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Editing in STK STK now features traditional Copy Cut and Paste options so that you can easily use data in more than one place These features are available through the Edit menu in the Browser for vehicles facilities targets area targets planets stars and sensors Opening an STK Module or External Application STK includes a large family of products that are integrated with the STK application Some functions are seamlessly integrated into STK such as Comm IPC and
138. Display WINdOW actos innara Lt pee ttes tonne He tete aes 164 Dynamic Display Properties sopcast t e es 165 E A A eene ec e Les hdd 16 6 Strip hart WIDICIONW voices e reti des retener e eere t eres 16 8 Strip Chart Properties sss nen 16 10 TODEA iine eter eee gay Suet s eee iretur petiere octal 16 11 EayOllbe xir E oe tele T uU EU de eO E 16 13 The STK Dynamic Display Strip Chart Tool Window The STK Dynamic Display Strip Chart Tool window is the control panel for generating dynamic display reports and strip charts It allows you to open an existing style or create a new one and manage the dynamic display and strip chart styles available 16 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Figure 16 1 An example of the STK Dynamic Display Tool window STK Dynamic Display Tool ERS Display Active Constraints Attitude Quaternions Open B1950 Position Velocity Beta Angle Classical Orbit Elements ECF Acceleration ECF LLR Position Style ECF Position Velocity Eclipse Times Properties Estimates Euler Angles Add J2000 ECI Acceleration LLA Position S LOP Mean Elements Lifetime Remove Lighting Times METE Position Velocity Make Copy 32000 ECI Position Velocity Change Cancel Reports and dynamic displays use the same style files to define the content and format of O the report or dynamic display If you change a report style
139. E database the TLE Load Results window appears The results window displays facility data available including facility name latitude longitude altitude and an abbreviation If there are a number of facilities resulting from the search select the items of interest in the list Use the Select All button to select all cities in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected facilities in the list Other options in the Facility Database Search Results window are described in the table following Table 14 11 Facility TLE Load options Field Description Create Facility or Target Class Choose to insert the facility as either a facility or target class If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the facility you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text Create Constellation Chains module only box When you re satisfied click the OK button to insert the selected items into the current scenario The Browser and Map windows are updated to display the new facilities or targets I You can insert more than one facility at a time If several facilities are highlighted they are x E all inserted when you click the OK button Dr Hint Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 21 City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Object Description If you load a facility or satellite using the TLE Load tool and the cross reference option is ON the following information is entered
140. EphemerisLLATimePos Importing Files into STK Description Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat is the geodetic latitude in degrees lon and alt are the geocentric longitude and altitude in degress and meters respectively and velocity is interpoated from position 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 A sample ECITimePosVel format is provided below for your reference Listing C 3 ECITimePosVel File Format stk v 3 0 BEGIN Ephemeris umberOfEphemerisPoints 81 EphemerisEciTimePosVel ScenarioEpoch 1 Feb 1997 00 00 00 0 0 000 4482020 588 6164585 645 2729927 393 4547 234623 951 470332 413 978539 180 000 3612448 002 6260360 709 3667378 031 5094 799967 111 016509 4981 283095 360 000 2655428 996 6204621 135 4516086 319 5516 897019 728 292472 4430 320111 540 000 1634481 691 5999568 188 5256140 144 5803 862975 1544 431356 3776 895453 720 000 574473 966 5651265 575 5870727 714 5950 379934 2316 641762 3039 516766 900 000 499160 298 5169344 113 6346549 050 5955 453865 3026 155186 2238 552297 1080 000 1561180 749 4566590 678 6674072 962 5822 172445 3656 750499 1395 366976 1260 000 2587239 838 3858453 389 6847641 465 5557 286368 4195 125756 531 501142 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Importing Files into STK 1440 4631 1620 4957 1800 5170
141. Epoch of the TLE Mid Point Mid point between two TLE epochs TCA Time of Closest Approach Calculated by propagating the first and second TLE sets over the time period between two their respective epochs and then determining the closest point between the two paths This option provides the smoothest possible switch between two TLE sets Override Set the switching time between two TLE sets using the Start Time field Disable Ignore the selected TLE set if you attempt to disable all of them STK will use the first in the time period Start Time Set the time at which the switch between one TLE set and a second set occurs Only available for the Manual Switching Method Range Not an editable field Displays how far apart the satellites are when switching occurs Element Set Number Use the scroll bar to select the second of two TLE sets 2 n then set the switching options for the TLE in this window Custom Propagator StkExternal The StkExternal propagator allows you to read the ephemeris for a satellite from a file For information about the ephemeris file format refer to Appendix C of this manual Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 27 PRO Advanced Analysis Satellites Turn the External Ephemeris option ON then specify the file of choice The file must end in a e extension Basic Properties Attitude The Attitude tab of the Basic Properties window for a satellite can be used to specify
142. Graphics Properties Display Times sss 12 20 Constraints BASIC Saxe 121b iti etie e prt oe pas oer ee ee bead tete orna 12 21 Constralmis SUA 28 hed a nd LLLA tI ER ea UE 12 22 Constraints Temporal ssssssse emen 12 24 Go straints Advanced E 12 24 Constraints Resol iais siiin ir 12 25 USING SIK TOOLS aaa INES A E E N Aum Pe O a eem 13 3 Calculating Access between Objects ssssssse 13 3 Setting Access Graphics for the Map Window 13 5 ESE ohdenwanleatet 13 6 Viewing Azimuth Elevation and Range Data for ACCESS ssss 13 7 Using the Custom and Dynamic Display Options 0 0 0 0 ee 13 8 Creating Graphs for Access Data sss 13 8 Removing Accesses from the Map Window eee 13 9 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual vii Table of Contents Accesses and Their Defining Objects 13 10 IQIMUING vais MEE 13 11 Viewing ThE AERJReDOIT a eos erret ct tl ctu Led cette Me 13 13 Viewing a Lime Data REDON occ oen tic ee tee 13 13 LETS MOM ses es bet rect e ost Ta tL s 13 14 A P 13 17 Computing Hfetlme x t ett a 13 19 PIPE TAS ISSUES oro octets dreht idas 13 20 REE tu 13 21 Gic EE 13 22 Swath Advanced Analysis Module sss 13 23 Vehicle SWat atacado Lind Pind ib Ee edid ds 13 23 SEBISOI2S Weltblea tte sot tete a ua 0 Eel teet bun UI M a 13 25 Walker Constellation etn tnn tiene ne nnn tena edente 13 26 REMOVE ACCESSE
143. HE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOUR ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE GOVERNED BY PARAGRAPH 3 HEREOF 2 2 SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 2 3 Analytical Graphics does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will be uninterrupted or error free You are advised to test the Software thoroughly before relying on it Satellite Tool Kit Software License Agreement Software License Agreement 3 LIMITATION OF REMEDIES 3 1 IN NO EVENT WILL ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS OR TIS SUPPLIERS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DIRECT OR OTHER DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS OR ANY AUTHORIZED ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS DEALER HAD BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOR SHALL ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY 3 2 SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 4 TERMINATION The license granted under this agreement is effective until terminated You m
144. K Tools Field Description Number of Sats per Enter the number of satellites to be generated in each plane of Plane the constellation s Inter Plane Spacing Enter the number of slots between the first vehicle in adjacent planes f RAAN Spread Enter the number of degrees to be divided by the number of planes to yield the difference in right ascension of the ascending node between adjacent planes Color by Plane If ON all of the satellites within a single plane of the constellation display in the same color in the Map window Remove Remove all of the child satellites associated with a Walker seed Constellation satellite from your scenario If you haven t saved the constellation before you remove it the data is lost The RAAN spread is useful for small constellations in preventing undesirable plane orientations For example if there were two orbit planes inclined at 90 a RAAN spread of 180 would result in two perpendicular orbit planes while a RAAN spread of 360 would result in all of the satellites being in the same plane and in danger of head on collisions To remove the Walker Constellation you must bring up the Walker window for the lead satellite When a Walker constellation is created the original seed satellite is duplicated as part of the constellation The new satellites are considered as children of the seed If you bring up a Walker window for a child satellite all fields are grayed out In addit
145. Kit User s Manual User Interface into the new scenario all characteristics and attributes of that object are present and all subobjects i e sensors are also inserted as well To insert an object that was previously defined and saved highlight the scenario in the Browser window select Insert from the Files menu An Insertwindow appears Figure 2 2 Typical Insert window File Type Facility Filter net doc sheila f Directories Files Baikonurf ila Facility1 f ila amaya PODSFaf ila desktop alabama Perthf ila desktop arkansas Santiago f ila desktop charon Wallops f ila desktop earth WhiteSands f ila desktop eureka la Jun p lt is Selection Inet doc sheila OK Fiter Cancel Click on the File Type option menu at the top of the window and highlight the class of object you re searching for in the menu that appears Check the Filter and Selection text boxes to ensure that they are pointing to the directory where the file is located If the Selection text box isn t pointing to the correct directory highlight the path in the Directories list or enter the correct path in the Filter text box and click on the Filter button at the bottom of the window or press Enter When the correct directory displays highlight the object in the Files list that you wish to insert into the current scenario and click on OK Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 7 User Inter
146. My Tutorial La ooo ox 000 Shuttle Time 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 00 Paused La 000 ox 000 Shuttle Time 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Paused 3 12 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual The Map Window Projection types Stereographic and Azimuthal Equidistant Tutorial Earth View 1 1 0 e Tuterar Earth view 1 TERT ENE lada pn o v e s My Tutorial My Tutorial La 000 tom 000 Shuttle Tine 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 0 Pausad Alte ooo Lov 000 Shuttle Tine 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 0 Paused Projection types Hammer Aitoff and Perspective S Tavra Earth View T rs inl S eara Enn view 1 a Tio amp n w 5 e af aie laj aalaju cele eal Hi My Tutorial E 12 iz La 3818 Lon 5876 Shuttle Tine 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 0 Paused lee asis Lev 5978 Shuttle Time 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 0 Paused i Center To set the center point for the map projection selected enter the exact latitude and longitude degrees in the respective fields You can also click at a location in the Map window to identify the center point If you click in the Map window to set Latitude Longitude coordinates t
147. NED BY BOTH YOU AND ANALYTICAL GRAPHICS Satellite Tool Kit Software License Agreement Software License Agreement 8 NOTICES Any notices regarding this agreement shall be sent to Analytical Graphics Inc 660 American Avenue Suite 200 King of Prussia PA 19406 9 ACCEPTANCE By opening the accompanying software media you agree to all of the terms of this license Agreement If you do not agree to these license terms and conditions return the software within thirty 30 days of purchase for a refund of the purchase price 10 FREE WIDGET FOUNDATION WIDGET SET COPYRIGHT BY Copyright 1995 BertBos Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the author not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The author makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness in no event shall the author be liable for any special indirect or consequential damages or any damages
148. OP sssss 1 13 LH GULTIe ione E ee Rte S RR oe 1 14 A A a ot e a le 1 14 Higa Resolutio Mapsin aiit tacto ette ae ean tpe d 1 15 Additional RESOUNCES 200000 eue eode t e non Sake 1 15 Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for use by both new and experienced satellite systems analysts New users of STK may wish to reference the STK Tutorial to learn about the system in a structured environment Experienced STK users can reference the Index and Table of Contents of this manual to locate specific information and instructions This manual assumes that you have a working knowledge of your computer workstation and operating system For information about how STK works refer to Chapters 2 and 3 of this manual or review the tutorial How This Manual Is Organized This manual is organized into 18 chapters and a number of Appendices that provide additional information 1 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 includes a summary of each chapter and provides a list of additional resources that may be of help Chapter 2 User Interface Chapter 2 includes an overview of the STK user interface It provides instructions for completing basic functions in STK such as creating and manipulating objects in a scenario defining the printer setup defining the properties of an object and making choices in STK Chapter 3 The Map Window Chapter 3 provides an explanat
149. OP Module 1 11 Lifetime Module 1 14 LOP Module 1 13 Terrain Module 1 14 STK Report Tool window 1 5 2 STK Strip Chart Window 16 2 STK Structure 2 3 STK Tools 1 3 1 stkActiveTLE Database Files C 2 1 stkActiveTLE fr File C 23 stkActiveTLE gd File C 26 StkActiveTLE om File C 24 l 18 stkActiveTLE sd File C 2 1 StkActiveTLE tce File C 25 stkActiveTLE wr File C 23 stkCityDb cc File C31 stkCityDb cd File C 30 stkCityDb gd File C 32 stkFacility Database Files C 32 stkFacility cc File C 33 stkFacility fd File C 33 stkFacility gd File C 34 stkStarDb Database Files C 34 stkStarDb bc File C 36 stkStarDb bd File C 35 stkStarDb bn File C 36 stkStarDb gd File C 37 Stranids 18 8 Strip Charts 16 1
150. RE LICENSE AGREEMENT Analytical Graphics Inc Analytical Graphics provides the program and manual the Software and licenses its use to you You assume responsibility for the selection of the Software to achieve your intended results and for installation use and results obtained from the Software 1 LICENSE 1 1 You may a use this Software only on one single computer at any one time a computer being hereby defined as one central processing unit a single display and associated peripheral equipment Satellite Tool Kit amp Software License Agreement Software License Agreement all at one location and b make one 1 copy of the Software in any machine in any readable form for backup purposes in support of your own use of the Software on a single computer 1 2 You must reproduce and include the copyright and other proprietary notices of Analytical Graphics on any copy of all or any portion of the Software and all such copies shall be subject to all the terms and conditions of the Agreement 1 3 YOU MAY NOT USE COPY MODIFY OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE OR ANY COPY MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION THEREOF IN WHOLE OR IN PART EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE AGREEMENT 2 LIMITATION AND WARRANTIES 2 1 THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE YOU ASSUME T
151. S cisci er pop geredet a 13 29 Close Approach Tool Modulle 2 5 2 ettet ne into e tcs denies 13 29 TIME PONOG tac care da eR a CORE 1331 ACCESS CONSTA ii dd de As 13 31 Search CO Ml rin 13 32 Advariced OptOFis s eor ce e m ep e o atre i etes 13 32 Computing Close Approaches sssss eem 13 34 Export Shapeflle TOOL a Ir tddi 13 35 Change cot ou 13 35 CITY FACILITY SATELLITE amp STAR DATABASES sssssseeee PART City Database rst E E EE hallar s 14 2 Querying a Database ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeenn 14 3 Viewing Search TResullts iot ete e eoe 144 Object DESNU satt tee ed coe d i et nas i llibre telea 14 5 viii Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Table of Contents FatellitysEXatabeise s oi e o eo o eS 145 Querying a Database aves e tco e Ne ela Se RC ee 14 6 Viewing Search RESUMES i as eroe teet t tte ttu e o Eee a 14 7 ODJectDescnptlOLr uoce cg nce e bre ec ate e Sc te 14 8 Saltellite EXatebase ues Due fresco Le ia 14 8 Qu erying a Database 3 5 rte eee dete tete 14 10 Viewing Search Resulta ete ee ed 14 11 Online Update T 14 12 Object Descriptions i m c E hebt te t edes 14 14 star Databases eine eeu teer cette aet CE GS ag 14 14 Cueryirig a Database dett eite dett tta ettet ater 14 15 Viewing Search Results revocada ti tote arte dst tdeo bes tae d 14 17 OBDJectIDescrptlOn suo echt et etm ete eut tat ce 14 17 Edad BE eee LS A A S Cete 14
152. Satellite IDRS_4 1 Nov 1997 00 42 40 37 1 Nov 1997 00 55 36 85 1 Nov 1997 01 55 46 80 1 Nov 1997 02 22 39 97 1 Nov 1997 03 24 31 57 1 Nov 1997 00 47 19 85 1 Nov 1997 01 01 11 82 1 Nov 1997 02 22 09 97 1 Nov 1997 02 28 21 00 1 Nov 1997 03 55 18 51 m Scheduled Times Facili Facility Santiago Satellite TDRS 4 Facility WhiteSands Satellite TDRS 4 1 Nov 1997 00 18 40 34 1 Nov 1997 00 42 40 37 1 Nov 1997 00 55 36 85 1 Nov 1997 01 55 46 80 1 Nov 1997 02 22 39 97 1 Nov 1997 03 24 31 57 1 Nov 1 Nov 1997 00 47 19 85 1 Nov 1997 01 01 11 82 1 Nov 1997 02 22 09 97 1 Nov 1997 02 28 21 00 1 Nov 1997 03 55 18 51 Satellite TDRS 4 4 1 Nov 1997 00 18 40 34 1 Nov 1997 00 42 10 37 Deconflict None af Remove Add Change OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 37 Satellites You can choose to use the access times determined between the satellite and the selected target by turning the Use Access Times option ON If you wish to define other times during which the satellite should orient toward a selected target enter the Start and Stop Times then use the Add button To modify a time listed in the Scheduled Times list highlight the time period of interest so that the Start and Stop Times display in the text boxes then modify the values and use the Change button You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified
153. Table 10 7 Basic constraints for an area target ssssssssssssss 10 8 Table 10 8 Area target temporal options sssssssssssmRRR 10 9 Table T1 1 Stardefiniti rr ODtIOLis 5 1 is rte E e eom beoe oe es ato Ds 112 Table 11 2 Planet definition elements sssssssRRR 11 4 Table 11 3 Star planet graphic attributes eenei ae a a 11 5 Table 12 1 Conic Sensor options i ecir rtc e rg eet 12 3 Table 12 2 Half power sensor OPtlONS 2 cece cece e cece eee tte eeeeee teeters 12 5 Table 12 4 Orientation methods sssssssssssRRR 12 11 Table 12 5 About Boresight Settlrgs s ich eoe tenter tee m teen 12 11 Table 12 6 Sensor graphics attributes 2 etic nner etree terre 12 18 Fable 12 7 Sensor SUM COMSUAINMS 2 oot eee OR he tbe i eb 12 23 Table 13 1 Access graphics Options cece eect eee eee eet eee m 13 5 Table 13 2 LIGMUMG options uu te ated itte ter ecce sedi ates 13 12 Table 13 3 Lifetime Options tette eee 13 16 Table 13 4 Advanced options for Lifetime ssssssssssA 13 18 Table 13 5 Vehicle swath options ssssssssRRR nett eee eee eeeee tenes 13 24 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual xvii Table of Contents Table 13 6 Swath OPONSE eee tete et s 13 25 Table 13 7 Options for a Walker constellation sseeeessse 13 26 Table 13 8 Satellite spacing for sample Walker satellites
154. The report is organized by sections and then by lines of data You can have any number of sections and lines in the report Data elements are shown in an hierarchical format tO You can double click an item in the Elements list to copy it to the Report Contents You can i also double click an item in the Report Contents list to remove it from the list Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 7 Note Warning Reports amp Graphs STK automatically creates the first section and first line of a new report style for you The first step in creating your own report style is to click the New Section button Next create a new line of data by using the New Line button Now you can specify the data elements to be included in the first line Copy the element you wish to include in the report to the Report Contents list Use the Up and Down arrows to change the position of the items in the Report Contents list Add new lines and sections as needed You can also change the units of measure for a section line or element using the Units button Changes you make to a particular section affect all lines and data elements associated with that section To change one line in a section make your changes to the line after all changes have been made to the section associated with that line Options Section If you select a section in the Report Contents list the Options window contains fields that allow you to specify the step size to
155. X and Z axes point towards the mean vernal equinox and mean rotation axis of the Earth at the Orbit Epoch Mean of Epoch X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and mean rotation axis of the Farth at the Coord Epoch True of Date X and Z axes point toward the true vernal equinox and true rotation axis of the Farth at the Orbit Epoch True of Epoch X and Z axes point toward the true vernal equinox and true rotation axis of the Farth at the Coord Epoch Mean Equinox X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and true True Equator rotation axis of the Orbit Epoch Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 13 PRO Advanced Analysis Satellites Special Options STK allows you to set special options for the propagator that take into account elliptical factors For the J2 and J4 propagators use the Special Options button to display the Special Options window This option is not applicable to the Two Body propagator m Ellipse Options 4 Osculating w Secularly Precessing Table 6 7 Ellipse options Option Description Osculating Representative of the particular point on a satellite trajectory but the actual trajectory differs from its two body counterpart at other points in time If ON the relationship among the Semimajor Axis length nodal Mean Motion and Period of the satellite is different from the relationships observed in the Path tab The variation is due to the fact that conver
156. a database of ephemeris for each planet in our solar system plus the Sun and Moon Ephemerides supplied by JPL cover a time span from 1960 to 2060 e Analytic Analytic representation of a planet s state as a reference of time File An external ephemeris file used to define the planet Radius Radius values update automatically when you choose a JPL DE403 file Graphic Properties Star Planet Attributes The Attributes tab allows you to specify the graphical display of the star or planet in the Map window James R Wertz ed Spacecraft Attitude Determination and Control Kluwer Academic Publishers 1990 p 816 Table L 2 11 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Stars amp Planets Star Graphics Properties Attributes Color LightSkyBlue 3 Inherit Settings Marker Style 3 4 JE Show Label OK Apply Cancel Help There are four fields in the Attributes tab Table 11 3 Star planet graphic attributes Field Description Colors The color in which you wish your star or planet to appear Marker Styles Available options include square circle star plus sign point or an X You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your Home stkData Pixmaps directory Pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style list Inherit Settings If ON the settings defined in the scenario
157. able 7 3 Options in the Attributes tab Field Color Line Style Line Width Marker Style Inherit Settings Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Description The color of the object s marker and tracks in the Map window The type of line used to represent the object s route Choices are Long Dash Solid Dashed Dotted or Dot Dash The width of the object s route in pixels in the Map window The type of marker used to represent the object s current position Choices are Square Point Plus Sign Star Circle or an X You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your Home stkData Pixmaps directory pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style list If ON the object s label and trajectory are displayed in accordance with the scenario s graphics attributes set through the Attributes tab of the scenario s Graphics Properties window If OFF the options here override those set at the scenario level Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Graphics Properties Display Times The fields in this tab allow you to control the time periods when the object s graphics are displayed in the Map window CruiseShip Graphics Properties Attributes Display Times Display Status Use Intervals 4 Start Stop Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 1 Dec 1997 11 40 18 89 A Remove Fra Change 31 Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 1
158. acility or target class Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 14 7 a Hint City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Field Description If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the facility you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text box Create Constellation Chains module only When yov re satisfied click the OK button to insert the selected items into the current scenario The Browser and Map windows are updated to display the new facilities or targets You can insert more than one facility at a time If several facilities are highlighted they are all inserted Object Description If you load a facility or target using the Facility Database tool the following information is entered into the object s Long Description field Site Name Network e Latitude East Longitude e Altitude Satellite Database The U S Space Command USSPACECOM currently keeps track of more than 7000 orbiting objects USSPACECOM continuously generates data describing the orbits of these objects and makes it available through a variety of sources The data is in a form known as two line element sets TLE each 14 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases set is 2 lines that are 69 characters wide Three satellite databases stkSatDb stkAllActive stkAllComm stkActiveTLE StkAllTLE stkSatDbAll were shipped with STK for your conveni
159. age window 13 34 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Close Approach initial Satellite Database search undertaken 1791 TLEs are out of date consider increasing range or updating database 1805 possible vehicles found in Satellite Database Candidate vehicle Application STK Scenario Scenario2 Vehicle P AM D 20572 removed due to orbit propagation error Candidate vehicle Application STK Scenario Scenarioz Vehicle Westford_Needle 21693 removed due to orbit propagation error Candidate vehicle Application STK Scenario Scenarioz Vehicle rd_Stage 23186 removed due to orbit propagation error Candidate vehicle Application STK Scenario Scenarioz Vehicle Centaur_Motor 24666 removed due to orbit propagation error 1 vehicles found to have access within the specified constraints Close Approach processing completed _T GFP SSS CAT adds the satellites meeting the search parameters to the Browser window as objects in the scenario and displays accesses in the Map window Textual reports for each identified close approach can be generated using the Reports option in the Access window Export Shapefile Tool This tool enables you to export the shape data for a sensor or area target to an ASCII file In the case of a sensor choose to export Swath or Pattern data Specify the file name Change Icon Tool This tool available on UNIX platforms allows you to change the icon with which a given object is represente
160. aint profile is most appropriate for surface vehicles and aircraft Small animation time steps may be needed to properly visualize satellites with spinning attitude profiles External Attitude File You can use external attitude data by entering an attitude file containing quaternions Turn the Attitude File option ON and specify the attitude file to use If ON the file overrides the default attitude profile during the time span of the quaternions contained in the file The external attitude file format is described in Appendix C of this manual Graphics Properties Attributes The Attributes tab allows you to specify several aspects used to represent the launch vehicle or missile in the Map window Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 8 7 oe i z E Hint Launch Vehicles Missiles Field Color Line Style Line Width Marker Style Inherit Settings LaunchVehicle Graphics Properties Attributes Trajectory Display Times Contours Color green af Line Style Solid P Line Width 1 Marker Style H Inherit Settings FF Show Label JE Show Ground Track JT Show Trajectory OK Apply Cancel Help Table 8 4 Options in the Attributes tab Description The color of the object s marker and tracks in the Map window The type of line used to represent the object s route Choices are Long Dash Solid Dashed Dotted or Dot Dash The width of the object s rout
161. al system on the ascending side of the orbit the ascending node The pass or revolution definition is a convention that satellite systems use to describe various periodic data If the specified latitude crossing is outside of the satellite s range of motion the north point or south point of the orbit is used as the pass break for specified positive or negative latitudes Due to the precessional and nutational motion of the Earth s spin axis the crossing of the ascending node may occur at a time slightly different from the time when the satellite crosses the Earth fixed equator Table 6 18 Pass Break fields Field Description Specify either Descending going south or Ascending going north for the latitude crossing at the beginning of a pass Direction Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 39 Satellites Field Description Coordinate Specify either an Inertial or Earth Centered Fixed coordinate System system in which the latitude should be measured Latitude The latitude crossing at which a new pass will begin First Pass The pass number corresponding to the initial conditions of the satellite Basic Properties Mass In the Mass tab of the Basic Properties window for satellites you can specify the satellite s moment of inertia tensor and its mass Specify the satellite s moments of inertia The rows and columns in this matrix are ordered to correspond to the X Y and Z body fixed
162. alOr is ata tb etes 8 5 Basic Properties Attitude A 8 6 Extera Att dele corta rated 8 7 Graphics Properties Attributes sss 8 7 Graphics Properties Display Times sss 8 9 Graphics Properties Contours ssssss meme 8 10 l evel Acldimejes tacet t to Tee Ete tete iu RU 8 11 Even UE ultrasonidos 8 12 Launch Vehicle Missile Constraints s 8 12 Basic Properties Trajectory To define a trajectory for your launch vehicle or missile open the Basic Properties window for the object In the Trajectory tab you can define the path which the object follows At the top of this panel the Start Time and Stop Time fields specify the temporal boundaries of the object The default values for Start Time and Stop Time are your scenario start and stop times The Step Size field specifies the interval between calculated ephemeris output points The default value is 60 seconds Launch vehicles and missiles each have their own special propagator in addition to the option of using external files to define their trajectories Simple Ascent Propagator Launch Vehicles The simple ascent propagator creates an ascent trajectory based on the launch and insertion parameters supplied by the user The trajectory is a simple 8 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Launch Vehicles amp Missiles curve rising vertically from the launch pad that smoothly turns over to insert with a zero flight path ang
163. alia Brazil CIS Canada China ESA FG France Germany IMSO ITSO India Indonesia Israel Italy Japan Korea LU Luxembourg Malaysia Mexico ATO orway Spain Sweden Thailand Turkey UK USA USSR END Owner C 24 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK BEGIN Mission COMM CIVIL COMM JOINT COMM MIL COMM TEST END Mission stkActiveTLE tce File This file contains all TLE sets for the satellites in the database Single entries are supported in this file The element sets represent the latest available TLE data for each satellite Listing C 8 Example of stkActiveTLE tce file for the satellite database 5U 58002B 96205 98321854 00000027 00000 0 14099 4 0 0120 2 5 034 2513 066 1786 1857117 028 0627 340 8690 10 8174658925824 11U 59001A 96206 36121278 00000133 00000 0 54518 4 0 0203 2 11 032 8804 202 5230 1520485 273 9362 068 9389 11 7409173258396 1 20U 59007A 96205 92525397 00000273 00000 0 12273 3 0 0535 2 20 033 3429 027 2653 1734225 118 0074 260 6629 11 4072245022537 22U 59009A 96206 45877471 00000102 00000 0 21719 4 0 0014 2 22 050 3006 204 3086 0233615 047 3113 314 7242 14 6177602893174 1 29U 60002B 96206 44555374 00000100 00000 0 17005 4 0 0402 2 29 048 3958 249 9969 0027300 167 7961 192 3614 14 6569320293349 1 45U 60007A 96206 26539704 00000031 00000 0 19837 4 0 0516 2 45 066 6922 269 7390 0272137 172 8883 187 6200 1
164. alt with as a group or you can specify the display and color of particular features within the category such as demilitarized zone lines and specified claimed lines To make the display and color of all map details uniform use the Select All button Hi Resolution Maps Module This module contains comprehensive very high resolution mapping data for the entire globe The data includes coastlines rivers lakes and political boundaries at approximately 1 arc second or 30 meter resolution This is ideal for visualizing ground tracks and coverage areas over small geographic regions Special data access algorithms have been incorporated to support rapid visualization of localized map data The data was extracted from the 1995 CIA RWDB2 database and requires almost 200 MB of storage It is formatted for optimal performance with STK 3 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual The Map Window If you have the Hi Res Map module more detail levels are available as subcategories of using the Advanced button To set the Display and Color of individual subcategories you must first set the display of the parent category Once the parent category options are set select the individual subcategories of interest and change them Map Projection The fields in the Projection tab allow you to set the graphical display of the world in the Map window Earth View 1 Map Properties Attributes Details Projection images Text Annotation Reso
165. alues entered to the option selected in the Units tab D If you wish to specify Date Units as Mission Elapsed it is best to enter the dates in the Time Warning Period and Animation tabs before you change the Date Unit to Mission Elapsed This is because the Mission Elapse Time is measured relative to the existing scenario epoch 5 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Scenarios Entering Units in Text Fields Values can be entered into text fields within STK using any valid unit for the dimension being entered For example if you wish to enter a value in a text field associated with time the value can be entered in seconds hours minutes or days This is true regardless of the current units selected STK converts the values entered to the unit specified in the Units tab Abbreviations that can be entered are shown in parenthesis in the previous table Basic Properties Setting Default Databases The Database tab allows you to set the default databases for the city facility satellite and star databases You can specify a database shipped with STK or one of your own that conforms to STK s format requirements Tutorial Basic Properties Time Feria Animation Units Database Environment Terrain Description Database Type Satellite 4 m Database Defaults Database stkSatDb sd zl Directory stk2 v3group STKData Databases Satellite m Auxiliary Database JT Use auxiliary database Database E
166. ameters approach that integrates analytically derived equations of motion computing the average effects of perturbations over an orbit This approach allows large multi orbit time steps and typically improves computational speed by several hundred times while still offering high fidelity computation of orbit parameters LOP implements the 1976 Standard Atmosphere to compute drag effects Additionally LOP considers the effects of the Earth s oblateness through JA the resonant effects of tesseral harmonics solar and lunar gravity and solar radiation pressure when computing the orbital perturbations The module is based on algorithms developed at NASA s Jet Propulsion Laboratory The LOP propagator uses the same orbital elements as those required by the Two Body J2 and J4 propagators For more information about the fields available for the LOP propagator refer to page 6 4 of this chapter Force Models The Force Models button of the Orbit tab allows you to set advanced options for the LOP propagator 6 18 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Earth Gravity Maximum Degree 12 Cd 2 300000 Maximum Order 12 Advanced Settings Third Body Gravity Solar Radiation Pressure use F Use Solar Gravity Cp 500000 W Use Lunar Gravity Atmosphere Height 48596 nm Physical Data Drag Cross Sectional Area aserre 7 SRP Cross Sectional Area nszew2 Vehicle Mass 000 000 kg
167. an Object sse 2 15 THE Property WINGOWS seda tetti entente rote et testeo tio 2 16 Describing an Object in STK sssssssssssse cinco 2 17 Using Multiple Windowvs ss nne 2 17 sing STK OOlSE ceti cett Pete trf t ted E t eb Pas 2 17 USING FIelps a eite o eite ere Le P es 2 18 Making Choices IF STI asi ac m te ets 2 18 Selecting MUltiple OBJECTS otto Dott Lf e eee ete Ete 2 18 Toggle Buttons tmt RE eut tatu tutt 2 19 o ife QUIS aU cT m 2 20 Radio BUON a d EL LM E 2 20 SSL A S Lee tete 2 20 Using Accelerator Keys 3 otl ett cte cb eta Ee 2 21 2 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Starting amp Quitting STK The very first time you run STK your cshrc or profile file is modified to include the path to STK To start an STK session for the first time type Install Dir gt STKv3 bin stk After the first time you only need to type stk and press at the user prompt to begin an STK session STK features a Start Up Wizard that helps you quickly and easily create or load a scenario You can set the Wizard to display at start up for every session or you can disable the feature To quit the current STK session select Exit from the Files menu When the Confirm window appears click OK to exit or Cancel to return to the current STK session QUIT Are You Sure All unsaved data will be lost OK Cancel The Browser Window The Browser window display
168. an specify a title to use as the column heading for the data element Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 9 Reports Graphs Options Section 2 Line 1 Lighting Times Suntight Duration Title Duration Summary Options WF Max 4 Std Deviation Format Floating Point Min gilbercenuinterval 4 Mean Percent Not Interval Number of Decimal Digits 3 As FF Total Summary Only W Include Instance Name with Title Y Discard Boundary Points OK Apply Cancel Help Table 15 4 Data element options Field Description Number of Decimal The number of digits to display to the right of the decimal Digits point for real numbers Format Choose among Floating Point Scientific e or Scientific E Multiple Instance This option is only valid if multiple objects have been selected in the Browser when generating the report If the Include Instance Name with Title option is ON the name of the object displays in the column title Summary Options Choose the appropriate Summary Options so that summary data is generated for the element Summary Options are only available for some data elements If they aren t applicable to the data element these options are disabled 15 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Header Reports Graphs The Header tab controls the general format options for the report style W Current Date FF Object Name I Short Description 3 Long
169. ary orbit lifetime theory or the SGP4 analytical theory The SGP4 theory estimates a satellite s orbital lifetime based on USSPACECOM SGP4 general perturbations theory It uses the satellite s 2 line mean elements and as such doesn t require any of the inputs in either of Lifetime or Lifetime Advanced windows As a purely analytical solution it doesn t provide time histories of the orbital elements suitable for reports and graphs Use the SGP4 Compute button to compute the lifetime based on this theory If you want a quick estimate cancel the calculations and adjust the Orbits Per Calculation and or Gaussian Quadratures fields in the Advanced window Since the integration of atmospheric drag effects is computationally expensive reducing the number of Gaussian Quadratures noticeably increases Lifetime s speed Some accuracy will be lost but the difference in total lifetime for near Earth satellites should be small Increasing the Orbits Per Calculation parameter can also significantly increase Lifetime s speed When the number of Orbits per Calculation is greater than one Lifetime assumes that the perturbations to the satellite s orbit remain constant over the number of orbits specified The Lifetime tool runs until either the satellite decays or the Orbit Count Limit is reached A satellite is assumed to decay when its height of perigee drops below 64 km Lifetime Results As stated earlier the Lifetime tool estimates the orbital life
170. assword Window Initial StartUp ss cinoranrcnn noo 17 4 Requesting Licenses by E Mail or FAX sss 175 ENterningLICASES od teste la tst e tee eh be alitas sisi 176 INetvvorkePelSs Words 2 d has Hot fala ads edo De da a a 17 8 OHNE Malal C 179 ABDOU ST Knnn O COTE 17 9 a GR zampe u aa aan aen aaaea at anspela 17 9 Other Help Menu Items eem 17 9 x Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents CHAINS MODE acta B OMNIA 18 1 Chals amp COMStEIAUOMS parido 1 neta ett t eet 182 Basic Properties of a Chain eee 18 3 DEMO 184 Constellation memo te tt a taie RUE Cette 18 5 Basic Properties of a Constellation sss 18 6 constellation oe case pene edet e xe CE MI LET 18 6 Generating Reports for a Chain sss 18 8 Creating Graphs for Chains ideo e ER RET ER etes 18 12 Dynamic Display Reports amp Strip Charts sss 18 13 GLOSSARY OF TERIS orco ce eL AE DEFINING CUSTOM SENSOR PATTERINS scooters P The Reference Plane Formats iet erect ea cdi trend B2 Te AzElMascEOIMA ttr rte nets B 7 The Angle Off Boresight Format sse B 9 IMPORTING FILES INTO TRE mera asocia CET ur El A A O O C3 ALE File aemy FORMAL cda 2r eret t RR rar C8 Custom Sensor File Format sssssesss eme C 9 Ephemeris FIE Format Eloisa tote taie ento C 9 Planetary Ephemeris File pe Format ss
171. at which you wish the sensor swath to appear Stop Time The time at which you wish the sensor swath to disappear Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 25 Using STK Tools Walker Constellation A Walker constellation consists of a group of satellites t that are in circular orbits and have the same period and inclination The pattern of the constellation consists of evenly spaced satellites s in each of the orbital planes p specified so that t sp The ascending nodes of the orbital planes are also evenly spaced over a range of right ascension RAAN spread The relative along track position of two satellites in adjacent planes is determined by a phase parameter f where fis an integer from 0 to p 1 The value of f represents the number of slots of angular measure 360 t by which the more easterly satellite leads the more westerly satellite STK makes it easy to generate a Walker constellation First define a vehicle with the characteristics and orbit you need then open the Walker tool for that vehicle Number of Planes 2 Number of Sats per Plane 2 Inter Plane Spacing 1 RAAN Spread 360 000 deg Color by Plane Apply Cancel The fields available in the Walker window are Table 13 7 Options for a Walker constellation Field Description Number of Planes Enter the number of orbital planes to be used in the constellation p 13 26 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using ST
172. atellite in a circular orbit of the same period typically expressed as degrees or radians per second or as revolutions per day T is the orbital Period 2x i n T radians sec Mean Motion Dot The time rate of change of mean motion indicating the degree to which perturbation forces acting on the satellite are changing the size of the orbit A9 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Mean of Date Coordinate System An inertial coordinate frame in which the direction of the X axis is defined by the mean vernal equinox and the Z axis is defined by the mean spin axis of the Earth at the time of the state vector The term Mean indicates that precession is accounted for but nutation is not Mean of Epoch Coordinate System An inertial coordinate frame in which the direction of the X axis is defined by the mean vernal equinox and the Z axis is defined by the mean spin axis of the Earth at a user specified epoch The term Mean indicates that precession is accounted for but nutation is not Mercator Projection can be thought of as being mathematically based on a cylinder tangent at the equator Any straight line is a constant azimuth line which is also called a loxodrome or rhumb line The north and south poles cannot be shown in this rectangular projection since they are at infinite distance Meta Key A special keyboard key that typically has a unique shape such as the diamond on the Sun workstation Meta key or a unique w
173. ax Angle 180 000 deg OK Apply Cancel Help In the Available Objects list use the right arrow or double click on the object you wish to include in the chain to move it to the Chain Objects list You can also use the double click feature to remove an object from the Chain Objects list You can include a mix of object classes in a single chain The example chains shown in this chapter include a constellation which is explained in detail on page 18 5 Constellation properties can affect access calculations for a chain refer to page 18 7 for a detailed explanation of constellation criteria Use the up and down arrows to change the order of the objects in the Chain Objects list Since the access calculations for the chain you create are performed for the objects in the order they re listed in the Chain Objects list box consider the ordering of the objects carefully 18 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Figure 18 2 A more complex chain defined as 2 Targets Leo 2 Relays 2 Ground Stations Picture captured in STK s Visualization Option VO module Constellations With STK Chains module you can group a set of like objects such as a group of facilities ground stations or satellites into a single unit called a constellation Constellations differ from chains in that they group objects together and can be included as an object of a chain The name of a chain object should
174. axes respectively 6 40 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Graphics Properties Attributes The Attributes tab allows you to specify several aspects used to represent your satellite in the Map window Table 6 19 Options in the Attributes tab Field Description Color The color of your satellite s marker and tracks in the Map window Line Style The type of line used to represent your satellite s path Choices are Long Dash Solid Dashed Dotted or Dot Dash Line Width The width of the satellite path in pixels in the Map window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 41 Satellites Field Marker Style Inherit Settings Description The type of marker used to represent your satellite s current position Choices include Square Point Plus Sign Star Circle or an X in addition to pictures from STK object icons and other graphical images You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your lt Home gt stkData Pixmaps directory pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style list If the Inherit Settings feature is ON the satellite s label ground track pass label and orbit track are displayed in accordance with the scenario s graphic attributes set through the Attributes tab of the scenario s Graphic Properties window If this feature is OFF the options available in this field override tho
175. ay terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the software in your possession and providing written notice of such termination and destruction to Analytical Graphics The license granted under this Agreement will terminate if you violate any of the terms and conditions of the Agreement You agree upon such termination to promptly destroy all copies of the Software in your possession and to certify in writing to Analytical Graphics that such action has been taken Satellite Tool Kit Software License Agreement Software License Agreement 5 LAW TO GOVERN This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania 6 NO TRANSFER None of your rights duties or obligations under this Agreement may be sold sublicensed assigned rented leased loaned or otherwise transferred without the prior written consent of Analytical Graphics and any attempt to so sell sublicense assign rent lease loan or transfer without Analytical Graphics prior written consent is void 7 YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT a YOU HAVE READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS b THIS AGREEMENT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE UNDERSTANDING AND CONTRACT BETWEEN US AND SUPERSEDES ANY AND ALL PRIOR ORAL OR WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF AND c THIS AGREEMENT MAY NOT BE MODIFIED AMENDED OR IN ANY WAY ALTERED EXCEPT BY A WRITTEN AGREEMENT SIG
176. bations J2 Perturbation first order and J4 Perturbation second order propagators account for secular variations in the orbit elements due to Earth oblateness These propagators don t model atmospheric drag or solar or lunar gravitational forces J2 and J4 are zonal harmonic coefficients in an infinite series representation of the Earth s gravity field J2 is approximately 1000 times larger than J4 and is a result of Earth oblateness The even zonal harmonic coefficients of the gravity field are the Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 3 Satellites only coefficients that result in secular changes in satellite orbital elements The J2 propagator includes the first order secular effects of the J2 coefficient while the J4 propagator includes the first and second order effects of J2 and the first order effects of J4 The J3 coefficient which produces long period periodic effects isn t included in either propagator Since the second order J2 and the first order J4 secular effects are very small there is little difference between the orbits generated by the two propagators Orbit Epoch The Orbit Epoch defines the time at which the established orbit elements on the right hand side of the tab are true Coordinate Epoch The Coordinate Epoch specifies the epoch of your input coordinate system Some STK coordinate systems require an epoch in order to be fully defined If you select a system with a pre established coordinate epoc
177. bit 6 15 l Icons Object See Object Icons Impact Azimuth 8 5 Impact Elevation 8 5 Impact Geocentric Latitude 8 3 85 Impact Geodetic Latitude 8 3 8 5 Impact Longitude 83 8 5 Importing Data into STK 2 14 Importing Files C Attitude C 3 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual AZE Bitmap 19 Database C 20 City 929 Facility C 32 Satellite C 20 Star C34 Ephemeris C 9 Pixmap C 19 Planetary Ephemeris C 17 TLE C726 Torque C18 Inclination 6 6 6 23 14 10 Individual Object Access Report 18 10 Individual Strand Access Report 18 8 Inertial Coordinate System 6 29 Inertially Fixed 6 33 Initialize from Default Attitude 6 36 Insert As Link Function 2 8 Insert Point 3 17 10 3 12 8 Insert Window 2 7 Inserting an Object 2 6 Integrated Attitude 6 35 International Atomic Time TAI 1 12 International Number
178. bjects reports unique to Chains and more Appendix A Glossary of Terms Appendix A provides definitions for terms commonly used in STK Appendix B Defining Custom Sensor Patterns Appendix B explains how to define and create custom sensor patterns Several diagrams and examples are provided Appendix C Importing Files Appendix C provides examples of file formats in case you wish to add or create files for use in STK Appendix D HPOP Technical Notes Appendix D provides additional information about the High Precision Orbit Propagator HPOP module including equations and models used Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 7 Introduction Appendix E High Resolution Map Technical Notes Appendix E provides technical information about the High Resolution Map module including rank data and pertinent comments Conventions Used in This Manual Certain typographic and formatting conventions have been followed in this user s manual to help you quickly and visually understand various kinds of information Keyboard keys are displayed as graphical representations of the keys For instance represents the Enter key on a conventional keyboard User commands that must be typed are shown in a typewriter font For example tar xvf dev rstO is one of the commands used when installing the STK product Mouse conventions such as click double click and drag are used often in this manual Click means to press and rel
179. calculated in seconds relative to the epoch date specified in the scenario s Time Period tab e Epoch Minutes EpMin Date calculated in minutes relative to the epoch date specified in the scenario s Time Period tab Epoch Hours EpHr Date calculated in hours relative to the epoch date specified in the scenario s Time Period tab Epoch Days EpDay Date calculated in days relative to the epoch date specified in the scenario s Time Period tab Local Gregorian LCLG Local time zone date and time displayed in Gregorian format 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 0000 UTC Gregorian UTCG Universal Coordinated Time UTC date and time displayed in Gregorian format 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 0000 Local Julian LCL Local time zone date and time displayed in day of year format 306 97 00 00 00 0000 UTC Julian UTC UTC date and time displayed in day of year format 306 97 00 00 00 0000 5 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Field Description YYDDD ddd YYDDD MSGP4 Epoch date format Julian4 UTCJ4 UTC date and time displayed in day of year format with four digits representing the year 306 1997 00 00 00 0000 Julian Date Date Number of days from GMT Noon on 1 January 4713 B C YYYYDDD hhmmss YYYYDDD Julian Date Offset JDateOff Number of days from GMT Noon with user specified offset e Mission Elapsed MisElap Time since user specified epoch Enter epoch in text
180. cator Projection 3 10 Meta Keys 2 21 Mid Point 6 27 Miller Projection 3 11 Missiles Access 13 3 Attitude 8 6 Attributes 8 7 Basic Properties Attitude _ 8 6 Constraints Advanced 6 54 7 10 Bassic 647 SuNn 6 50 Temporal 6 52 Contours 8 10 Description 2 17 Display Times 8 9 Graphics Properties Attributes 8 7 Contours 8 10 Display Times 8 9 Propagator 8 3 Properties of 8 1 Step Size 8 2 Swath 13 23 Mission 14 10 Mission Elapsed MisElap 5 9 Mixed Spherical Coordinate Type 6 10 Modify Point 3 17 10 3 12 8 Mollweide Projection 3 1 1 Motion Dot Dot 6 23 MSGP4 Element Set Numbe
181. cesses Too sss Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 5 Introduction Chapter 14 City Facility Satellite Star Databases Chapter 14 is the second of four chapters devoted to the tools available in STK It provides instructions for using the four database tools in STK These tools are useful in quickly searching for and inserting objects into STK Chapter 15 Reports Graphs Chapter 15 is the third of four chapters devoted to the tools available in STK It provides a detailed summary of the reporting and graphing features available in STK In addition it provides instructions for modifying existing report and graph styles and creating new ones Chapter 16 Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Chapter 16 is the last of four chapters devoted to the tools available in STK It provides a detailed summary of the dynamic display and strip chart features available in STK In addition it provides instructions for modifying existing dynamic display and strip charts and creating new ones Chapter 17 Using Help Chapter 17 provides an overview of the STK Help menu as well as instructions for displaying full text manuals in Adobe Acrobat Reader and updating data files online It also provides instructions for using the Licenses window in STK 1 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction Chapter 18 Chains Module Chapter 18 contains information about the Chains module including the Chain and Constellation o
182. cesses from all objects in a scenario regardless of the objects involved This is a scenario level tool This function is useful when you calculated accesses between more than one pair of objects and wish to clear all access graphics Close Approach Tool Module The Close Approach Tool CAT is a fully integrated module available for STK that enables you to analyze and assess the potential for collision or close proximity between a satellite and other objects in space As the 1996 Cerise collision demonstrated analysis of space object proximities has become a significant concern in mission analysis Using CAT you can search STK s Satellite Database of over 8 000 tracked space objects specified by NORAD two line element sets based on apogee perigee and range tolerances Once you specify the range tolerance allowed between a specified satellite and Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 29 CAT Module Using STK Tools other objects CAT quickly analyzes the information against all objects in the database Time Period Start 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Stop 1 Jan 1997 04 00 00 00 m Access Constraint Max Range 5 000 km m Search Constraint Auto Max Apogee 674 000 km wv Override Min Perigee 668 000 km Compute Advanced Cancel Help Once these options are set use the Compute button CAT searches for possible matches in the specified database based on the apoge
183. cify the name of the constellation in which the star is located such as Andromeda When you ve entered as many search criteria as possible click the Perform Search button The query assumes an implicit AND between search criteria You cannot search for EITHER OR parameters Note 14 16 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite 4 Star Databases Viewing Search Results Once you ve queried the database the Star Database Search Results window appears If there are a number of stars resulting from the search select the items of interest in the list Use the Select All button to select all stars in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected stars in the list Other options in the Star Database Search Results window are described in the table following Table 14 9 Star Database search results options Field Description If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the stars you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text Create Constellation Chains module only box When you re satisfied click the OK button to insert the selected items into the current scenario v You can insert more than one star at a time If several stars are highlighted they are all x inserted when you click the OK button 4 Hint Object Description If you load a star using the Star Database tool the following information is entered into the obje
184. comprised of a total of six files You can create your own Satellite Database by following the format expected required by STK For example the stkActiveTLE database i e all satellites considered active and having a two line element TLE set available includes the following files C 20 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Importing Files into STK Table C3 stkActiveTLE database files File Contents stkActiveTLE sd Main database file stkActiveTLE fr Frequency Information stkActiveTLE wr Write Ups stkActiveTLE om Owner Mission stkActiveTLE tce Two line Element Sets stkActiveTLE gd Latest update information The first three files contain fixed width fields One row represents a single entry stkActiveTLE sd File This is the main Satellite Database file it contains all searchable fields The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C4 stkActiveTLE sd file description Column Description 04 SSC number Valid values are 00001 99999 KEY FIELD Leading zeros are expected by STK 5 19 Common name This is any common name that may be used There may be multiple entries for a satellite these may differ in the common name 20 34 Official name This is the unique official name for the entry 3541 International number Unique number assigned to all objects achieving orbit and observed by USSC Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C21 Importing Files into STK C 22 Column 46 55 56 65 66 68 69 76
185. conds sec Gregorian UTC UTCG Degrees deg Kilograms kg dBW dBW Hertz Hz Meters m Degrees deg Degrees deg Feet ft Statute Miles mi Meters m Kilometers km Astronomical Units Au Earth Radii Re OK Apply Cancel Help To choose the unit of measure to be used throughout the scenario highlight the unit of interest in the Units list then highlight the unit value you wish to set as the default in the Change Unit Value list The value now displays to the right of the unit in the Units list For any changes to take effect you must click OK or Apply For the purposes of this manual scenario units are assumed to be Degrees Seconds Kilograms Meters and UTC Gregorian If you select different scenario units the fields and entries in your windows may appear slightly different from those shown in this manual Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 7 Scenarios Table 5 3 Units options Field Description Distance Unit Distance can be displayed in one of the following units Feet ft Statue Miles mi Nautical miles nm Meters m Kilometers km Astronomical units au Earth radii re Time Unit Time can be displayed in any one of the following units Seconds sec Minutes min Hours hr Days day Date Format Dates can be displayed in a variety of formats Available formats are Epoch Seconds EpSec Date
186. ct s Long Description field e Harvard Revised Number Henry Draper Number SAO Catalog Number Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 17 City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases e 5th Fundamental Catalog Right Ascension J2000 e Declination J2000 Visual Magnitude e Proper Motion Right Proper Motion Ascension Declination e Parallax Constellation Load TLE STK allows you to identify and insert satellites and facilities based on their two line element sets There are two types of TLEs that can be loaded using the Load TLE tool facility and satellite Type Satellite Z4 Two Line Element Set File interesttce rat FF Cross Reference Database J stkSatDb sd E Open Cancel Loading a Satellite TLE You can perform a satellite TLE load using one of the default databases shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search Choose the type of TLE load then specify the TLE set file name Enter the correct file name in the Database field 14 18 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite Star Databases You can also cross reference the TLE file with a specified database to provide additional information By default the Cross Reference Database option is ON and the path is set to the stkSatDb database shipped with STK If ON search results include additional information such as the satellite s name international number ow
187. cted values of the monthly mean 10 7 cm solar radiation flux F17 and geomagnetic index Ap Refer to Appendix C for the format of this file Use the Solar Flux Data field to specify whether you want to use Nominal 50 percentile or 20 97 7 percentile solar flux and geomagnetic index data Nominal flux predictions represent an average case longer lifetime 20 values represent the worst case shorter lifetime Graphics If ON the satellite s final orbit displays in the Map window The ground track spans the length of the last orbit and is not intended to represent the exact point of decay SGP4 Compute The SGP4 theory estimates a satellite s orbital lifetime based on USSPACECOM SGP4 general perturbations theory It uses the satellite s 2 line mean elements and as such doesn t require any of the inputs in either of Lifetime or Lifetime Advanced windows As a purely analytical solution it doesn t provide time histories of the orbital elements suitable for reports and graphs Use the SGP4 Compute button to compute the lifetime based on this theory Advanced Use the Advanced button to define the speed and accuracy of the calculations to be performed when estimating a satellite s orbital lifetime Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 17 Using STK Tools Orbit Count Limit 99999 Orbits per Calculation 10 Gaussian Quadratures 1 JT Use 2nd Order Oblateness Correction Rotating Atmosphere OK
188. ctory other than the current directory highlight the object in the Browser window select Save As from the Files menu Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 9 Warning q Y e LS A Dr Hint User Interface Saving a Modified Object If you modify a previously saved object and you wish to save it under the same name the modifications apply to all instances of that object in all scenarios Consider the impact to other users who may need the original object To avoid potential problems with other scenarios use the Save As function Saving the Scenario without Children If you select this option for Save or Save As only the selected object itself is saved Thus you can save a scenario without saving any of its subobjects or you can save a vehicle or facility without saving its attached sensors Removing an Object from a Scenario You can remove an object from a scenario by highlighting the object in the Browser window and selecting Remove from the Files menu The object is no longer a part of your scenario If you saved the object previously it s available for you to import into other scenarios or even this one if you change your mind If you didn t save the object and it was newly created the object won t be available for other scenarios To delete an object from STK you must be outside of STK and use commands native to your operating system 2 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User
189. d 6 54 Basic Sun Temporal Description Display Times Graphics Properties Attributes Display Times Great Arc Propagator Properties of Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 13 3 74 7 6 74 7 2 7 10 6 47 6 50 6 52 2 17 7 8 7 6 7 8 1 2 7 1 Index Route 7 2 Step Size 7 2 Shortcut Keys 2 21 Show Scroll Bars 3 6 Sinusoidal Projection 3 1 1 Site Name 14 6 Slew Time 6 37 Small Distance Unit 5 10 Solar Beta Angle 6 55 Solar Data 13 17 Solar Exclusion Angle 651 9 15 12 22 12 23 Solar Gravity 6 17 Solar Radiation Pressure 1 12 6 17 6 20 D 2 Cross Sectional Area 6 20 Solar Lunar Obstruction 6 52 9 16 Specular Reflection 1 12 Spherical Coordinate Type 6 1 1 Spherical Position 9 4 10 4 Spin About Sun Vector 6 33 Spinning 6 33 Spinning About Nadir 6 33 SSC Number 6 23 14 10 Star Database 14 1 14 14 Description Tab 14 17 Querying the Database 14 15 Search Results 14 17 Star
190. d 3 14 Map Details 3 6 Map Projection 3 9 Text Annotation 3 15 Map Properties Button 3 5 Map Window 3 1 3 2 Animation Steps 3 4 Map Properties Button 3 5 Scroll Bars 3 6 Status Area 3 17 Status Bar 3 6 Tool Bar 3 3 3 6 Markers Turn 5 15 Mass 6 20 6 40 13 16 Mass Unit 59 Max Connections 4 4 Max TLE Limit 6 25 Maximum Degree 6 16 6 19 Maximum Drag Altitude 6 22 Maximum Order 6 16 6 19 Mean Anomaly 6 7 6 23 Mean Equinox True Equator 6 13 Mean Longitude 6 9 Mean Motion 6 23 Mean Motion Dot 6 23 Mean of Date 6 13 Mean of Epoch 6 13 Menu Edi 2 15 Files Help 2 18 Tools 2 17 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Index Windows 2 17 Mer
191. d Aircraft Only sss 7 10 LAUNCH VEHICLES amp MISSIEBS 20 ro en t oe BEL Basi amp Properties Trajectety x rie eR e hes 8 2 Simple Ascent Propagator Launch Vehicles sss 82 Ballistic Propagator Missiles sss 8 3 External Propagator tus aaa ete deitate 8 5 Basic Properties Attitude uec ierit tette retinet teen edes 8 6 External Atitude Fl ai 8 7 Graphics Properties AttriDUtesS 2 Geb teet boas rtt peter b ebbe ded enun 8 7 Graphics Properties Display Times ssssse non conncror cnn 8 9 Graphics Properties Contours sssssss emm 8 10 Hv baGre poM EE 8 11 Bos NISUS 8 12 Launch Vehicle amp Missile Constraints sss 8 12 FACIUTIES amp TARDE caca Basic Properties POSILIOIY eiu Lee treten dde 9 2 Geodetic PO Mist ds 9 3 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual v Table of Contents Sphierical POSO VA oe dsd EE 9 4 Cartesian POSION ii A aii A A 94 Eylindrical POSIIOT s Lit ri rtest ie tee e pile dte tse Lon ce 9 5 Geocentric POSILIOTIS 15 2 raton Ai 9 5 Basie Properties ARE MK ait erar tee redde eerte ends 9 6 Graphics Properties Attributes sssssssse eme 9 6 Graphics Properties Az El Mask sssssssse eee 9 8 Graphics Properties Display Times sssss corn orrncnoncnrnn 9 9 COMSUAIES BASIC fee era e e e ee o nae 9 10 CONSI UA a td dsd 9 13 Constraints Temporal zt de Det i
192. d 9 16 AREA TARGE totales Basic Properties BOUIPhgdatyz is ot eet e teet nt eden Lees ecd 10 2 Base Properties GEMM Olds 1a rr cout di A 10 3 A entere tete ee drole ee etn ne ne 104 Spherical POSO Ei HR er Per eme a rU 10 4 Cartesiar POSO Vea 1 o tertie rci tet re eret Eee eee Lot e net eo Ind tege 10 5 Cylindrical POSWIOMN 4 accio eL s 105 Geocentric POMO 2 555 sacs e et e err rte gel ca Wels da aceasta 105 Graphics Properties Attributes sssssssss eee 10 6 GonsStraiNts BASIC nsise m 10 7 Constraints Temporal ern ea E rr ai Akt aae ei o rS 10 9 STARS E PRANET a ra tac Lalit Basic Properties Defining a Maroon a ioe ante ets 11 2 Basic Properties Defining a Planet 11 3 Graphic Properties Star Planet Attributes 11 4 vi Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents SENSORS ur tta ndn bad tc dd Basic Properties IDeflitiOD sss iia iocus te iia ee eere its 12 2 COME SAO atte ET 12 3 Fell ROWE SCMSOM sh ect Ts oe e Maca ie pe T can es ad a 124 Ule M 12 6 Rectangular Senso est cemere ovo ee RET e Etre eter abate 12 8 Basic Properties Pointirig a SENSora cesset tete tete 12 9 Fixed Sensor PONING pis 12 10 Targeting I O rita He tue 12 13 External Pointing Elles et Et et ts lebe tee 12 16 Basic Properties ResSoOlttiOri a a eh iei eret a tete that erac tege 12 16 Graphics Properties Sensor Attributes 12 17 Graphics Properties Projection ssssss nono nonn cnn ncnrcnnn 12 18
193. d Type Time 4 1200000 sec Text Box Selected Toggle W Trail Type Time 24 1200 000 sec JE Trail Type Time 24 1200 000 sec Button OK Apply Cancel Help coco o o _ o vm Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 19 User Interface Option Menus Option menus shown in the Graphics Properties window allow you to select one and only one item from a list that appears when you click and hold the associated option menu button To select an item other than the one currently displayed on the face of the option menu click on the option menu and use the mouse to highlight the item of interest in the list that appears then release the mouse Option menus can be identified by small rectangles on the right side of the button or a down pointing arrow y to the right of the field s name Radio Buttons Radio buttons lt gt occur in a group You can select one and only one item in the group of radio buttons similar to the way the radio buttons work in your car For example the Pass tab of the Graphics Properties window features radio buttons that allow you to choose between displaying all pass data in the Map window or displaying a specified range of pass data In Motif radio buttons are typically diamond shaped Lists Lists such as the Items list shown in the Map Details tab allow you to select multiple items in a scrollable area The Map Details tab allows you
194. d in the object tree in the Browser window Highlight the object you wish to change and select Change Icon from the Tools menu In the Change Icon window select the icon you wish to use and click OK or Apply Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 35 Using STK Tools Orbit Wizard If you create a satellite in STK an Orbit Wizard appears The Wizard is designed to assit you in creating any one of six standard orbits Sun Synchronous Orbit is designed to pass overhead at the same local time each revolution GeoStationary Orbit is designed to remain over one point on the ground Repeating Ground Trace Orbit is designed to provide a repeating ground coverage cycle Molniya A highly elliptical orbit that is useful for communications over the Northern hemisphere Critically Inclined Orbit is maintained at a fixed latitude Critically Incclined Sun Synchronous Orbit is maintained at a fixed latitude and passes overhead at the same local time each revolution Once you ve chosen the type of orbit youwish to create the Wizard prompts you to define the orbital parameters for the satellite These parameters can then be updated as needed in the Orbit tab 13 36 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 14 CITY FACILITY SATELLITE STAR DATABASES Overview STK provides several tools that assist you in generating facilities satellites targets and stars quickly and easily Several comprehensive databas
195. d planets You can use one of the standard dynamic display styles shipped with STK to display data One of the most popular standard dynamic display styles is the J2000 ECI Position Velocity dynamic display style for a vehicle An example of the dynamic display is shown in the following figure Select a style in the Style list and use the Open button to open the dynamic display 16 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Figure 16 2 Asample standard dynamic display showing J2000 position and velocity data for the ERS1 vehicle The data changes as the animation moves forward or backward in time Time CUTCG 1 Nov 1992 00 00 00 00 x km 7125 849756 y km 729 929576 z km 0 000000 vx km sec 0 112356 vy km sec 1 096863 vz km sec 7 377688 The options available in the display window are discussed in the table following Table 16 2 Files menu options for dynamic display windows Field Description Close Closes the dynamic display window Units Opens a Units window that allows you to change the units of measure for the report or graph If the Use Default Report Units option is ON default units are used If the Make Default Report Units option is ON the units of measure set here are used as the default units for all data generated Changes made in this Units window do NOT affect the units set at the scenario level or permanently change the units for the report sty
196. d the relative position vector minus Satellite Tool KitO 90 The elevation angle is positive for objects above this plane Elevation Rate The time rate of change of the elevation angle usually expressed in degrees per second or radians per second End Time The time at which animation ends Ephemeris A time ordered tabulation of vehicle position for a number of dates Ephemeris Time ET A time measurement calculated from the observed motion of the moon introduced to eliminate dependency on the Earth s rotation Measurements with highly accurate atomic clocks show that the rotation period of the Earth is slightly irregular but in practice the difference between ET and Universal Time UT may be ignored The absolute difference between the two measurements has increased over the last 100 years to about 60 seconds Epoch An arbitrary fixed instant used as a chronological reference for celestial reference systems and orbital motions Epoch Seconds Date calculated in seconds relative to the epoch time specified in the scenario s Time Period tab Equation of the Center The relation between True and Mean Anomaly used as a first approximation to Kepler s Equation In its simplest form f M 2e sin M where f True Anomaly M Mean Anomaly and e eccentricity Equation of Time The difference between Mean Solar Time and real solar time ranging from a minimum of 15 toa maximum of 15 minutes during the
197. data elements of interest to the appropriate axes listed on the right side of the window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 11 Dynamic Displays Strip Charts i b You can double click an item in the Elements list to copy it to the Y axis You can also n double click an item in any of the axes to remove it from the list Hint Use the left arrow to remove elements from the axes list You can add a title to each axis If the Log10 option is ON data points along that axis display as log10 instead of linear You can also change the units of measure for a graph element using the Units button Options You can change the graphical display of individual data elements for the style Options Cartesian Position Fixed y Title y Line Point Color YELLOW dl Color YELLOW m Style Solid sd Style None Width 2 24 Size T7 af The name of the element appears in the Title field Other options are described in the table following Table 16 6 Graph element options Field Description Line Change the color style and or width of the line connecting data points in the chart Point Change the color style and or width of the individual data points in the chart 16 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Layout Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts The fields in the Layout tab allow you to choose the general display options for the strip chart lt Strip Chart
198. dditional time up front to generate a well defined pattern than to be uncertain of the fidelity of the results Chapter Contents The Reference Plane Format ococcccococococccccncccononnnocnncnonononnnnncnnnnnn cono nnnncnccnnns B 2 The AzEl Mask Format i dai B 7 The Angle Off Boresight Format sees B 9 The Reference Plane Format In the reference plane format the custom sensor pattern is defined by the intersection of the sensor s projection with a plane perpendicular to the sensor reference direction boresight at a specified distance from the origin of the sensor The intersection is described in polar coordinates 1 Define the geometry of the problem graphically In Figure B 1 and B define the sensor elevation sweep angles from nadir in this case 40 and 50 respectively The angles 6 and y define the forward and aft sweep in this case both 30 B 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Defining Custom Sensor Patterns Figure B 1 The desired relative geometry of the satellite and the custom sensor pattern Velocity Vector Distance RSS NON 6 Forward Sweep Nl y aft Sweep nadir The location of the reference plane is measured relative to the sensor location and is different than the distance from the sensor to the surface of the Earth 2 Using a piece of polar coordinate graph paper diagram the sensor as it would appear in the reference plane Use t
199. de is designed to get you up and running in minutes It includes installation instructions a warp speed start tutorial and a quick reference for basic functions in STK The quick start is available via the Help menu in STK and on the CD ROM STK Help Files During an STK session you can find answers to your questions using STK s comprehensive Help system This easy to use system contains information about the features and functions in STK you don t have to leave the software to find your answers STK User s Manual STK User s Manual provides detailed information and instruction for performing tasks using STK s features and functions STK User s Manual is available in hard copy and PDF format STK Professional Tutorial STK Professional Tutorial provides a hands on overview of STK features and functions It is the natural follow up for learning the 1 16 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction basics of STK The tutorial sections each require approximately 1 hour of your time to complete STK Professional Tutorial is available in hard copy and PDF format STK Frequently Asked Questions STK FAQs provides answers to over 200 frequently asked questions Search Analytical Graphic Inc s database for the information you need STK FAQs are available via our Web site at www stk com STK Release Notes STK Release Notes which may have been shipped with this document clarify known limitations or provide addit
200. de of the satellite s Time Period CAT automatically adjusts the Stop Time to match the Stop Time of the satellite You cant set a Start or Stop Time outside of those set for the satellite s ephemeris in the satellite s Basic Properties window If you attempt to do so an error message displays and the changes are discarded Access Constraint In the Max Range field enter the maximum allowable distance between the current object and any other object in the database During analysis when CAT finds an object that is within the range specified in this field the object and the associated time is flagged and displayed The Max Range Constraint is automatically set for the satellite Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 31 Warning Using STK Tools Search Constraint If you choose Auto the Max Apogee and Min Perigee values are automatically updated whenever the Time Period changes based on the satellite s minimum and maximum altitude for the time period If you choose Override the Max Apogee and Min Perigee values are used regardless of the Time Period specified These values are used to develop a preliminary list of possible objects from the specified database that pass close to or through the satellite s orbit Advanced Options Use the Advanced button to specify the satellite database to be searched and to set other limitations and graphics display parameters Database File Name stkAlITLE sd E
201. dge Limits 13 24 Filled Limits 13 24 Switching Method 6 27 T Tabs 2 16 TAI See International Atomic Time Target Pointing 6 36 Target Times 6 37 Target Schedule 6 37 Target Times 6 37 12 15 Targeting a Sensor 12 13 Targets Access 13 3 Attributes 29 6 Az El Mask 9 6 9 8 Basic 9 10 Basic Properties Position _ 9 2 City Database 1 4 2 Constraints Basic 9 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Index SUN 9 13 Temporal 9 16 Description 2 17 Display Times 9 9 Facility Database 1 4 5 Fixed Sensors 12 12 Graphics Properties Attributes 2 6 Az El Mask 9 8 Display Times 9 9 Load TLE 14 20 Position 9 2 Properties of _9 Sun _ M 9 13 Temporal
202. ding on the accesses to the other targets 13 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Figure 13 5 Diagram showing access scheme for targeted sensors Target 1 id a 2 00 1 00 12 00 3 00 4 00 5 00 6 00 Access Intervals Legend Sensor Pointing Nontargeted Lighting You can display lighting conditions for your vehicle in the Map window by using the lighting tool The lighting tool is only available for vehicles its menu item is disabled for other objects Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 11 Using STK Tools Color Line Marker Style Line Width A Sunlight CHOCOLATE af Solid ss 3 4 Penumbra CHOCOLATE sl Solid Z4 3 2 A Umbra CHOCOLATE al Solid 3 4 Show Sunlight Penumbra Line at Vehicle Altitude 4 Show Penumbra Umbra Line at Vehicle Altitude Reports AER Data Time Data OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in the Lighting window are discussed below Table 13 2 Lighting options Field Description Sunlight If ON a line is drawn on the Map window s where the vehicle is in complete sunlight Penumbra If ON a line is drawn on the Map window s where the Sun is partially blocked by the Farth and therefore the vehicle is only in partial sunlight Umbra If ON a line is drawn on the Map window s where the Sun is completely blocked by the Earth and t
203. dition solar flux and planetary geomagnetic index information must also be supplied Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 15 Note Using STK Tools Lifetime TDRS 4 m Satellite Characteristics Solar Data DER AISA SRURBIIID Solar Flux File SolFIx0685 dat Reflection Coefficient 1 00000000 Solar Flux Data Nominal 24 Drag Area 13 6500 m 2 Area Exposed to Sun 15 4300 m 2 Advanced Compute Report SESE Susan I Graphics SGP4 Comput Graph E E gt The fields available in the Lifetime window are discussed in the table following Table 13 3 Lifetime options Option Description Drag Coefficient The satellite s drag coefficient usually taken to be between 2 0 and 2 2 Reflection The satellite s reflection coefficient used in solar radiation Coefficient pressure calculations A value of 0 indicates that the satellite is transparent to solar radiation a value of 1 indicates that it is perfectly absorbing A value of 4 3 means that it is flat specularly reflecting Drag Area The mean cross sectional area of the satellite perpendicular to its direction of travel Area Exposed to The satellite s mean area projected perpendicular to the Sun s Sun direction Mass The mass of the satellite 13 16 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Option Description Solar Data An ASCII file containing predi
204. dow A Help file for the specific tab appears in the Help window Licensing To run STK you will need one or more software licenses The STK interface provides an easy orderly procedure for obtaining the necessary licenses Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 3 Using the STK Help Menu Password Window Initial Start Up When you start STK for the first time a Password window appears indicating that STK is unable to find a password No STK password has been found Please request and enter passwords from AGI m Request Password Request via AGI Web Site Request via E Mail F AX m Enter Password Enter Passwords Ea The Password window presents the following options Table 17 1 Password options Button Request via AGI Web Site Request via E Mail FAX Enter Passwords 17 4 Description Obtain your license s via the web If you choose this option STK launches your web browser and connects you to AGI s web site If you wish to obtain your license s via e mail or fax select this option to display an e mail FAX form that can be used to send AGI the correct information After you obtain your password s select this option to display the STK Licenses window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Using the STK Help Menu Requesting Licenses by E Mail or FAX If you choose to obtain passwords using the Request via E Mail FAX option a Request w
205. e File that identifies the STK database and STK home directories as well as certain defaults set for the STK session stkrc3 File UNIX STK Run Control File File that identifies the STK database and STK home directories as well as certain defaults set for the STK session Stop Time Parameter that specifies when a specified function is to end Subsolar Point The point on the Earth directly below the Sun Sun Elevation Angle The elevation of the Sun relative to the selected object Sun Lighting Vehicle Graphics Properties Controls the way available Sunlight conditions for the scenario are graphically displayed in the Map window A14 Swath Tools menu Delineate the visible areas for the system or the points on the ground from which the vehicle or sensor can be seen Target Point of interest on the ground that does not move Text Annotation Scenario Graphics Properties Allows the user to specify text to display in the Map window at a specified latitude and longitude and or at a specified X Y coordinate TDRS Tracking and Data Relay Satellite Special satellite used for communication by the government and military Used heavily by NASA during shuttle missions to provide a communications link when the shuttle is out of view of a ground station Time Period Scenario Basic Properties Defines the general time span a range of several hours days or weeks for analysis and propagates the orbits for all sat
206. e in pixels in the Map window The type of marker used to represent the object s current position Choices are Square Point Plus Sign Star Circle or an X You can also add a custom marker by creating a pixmap file with a marker extension and saving it to your Home stkData Pixmaps directory pixmaps can be any size Once created custom markers are available in the Marker Style list If ON the objects label and trajectory are displayed in accordance with the scenario s graphics attributes set through the Attributes tab of the scenario s Graphics Properties window If OFF the options here override those set at the scenario level Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Graphics Properties Display Times The fields in this tab allow you to control the time periods when the object s graphics are displayed in the Map window c LaunchVehiclel Graphics Properties Attributes Trajectory Display Times Contours Display Status Use Intervals 4 Start Stop 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 1 Jan 1997 04 00 00 00 AY Remove Fra Change 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 1 Jan 1997 04 00 00 00 Deconflict None uf OK Apply cancel Help Launch vehicle and missile graphics can be displayed or removed from the Map window based on time intervals specified here Choose among Use Intervals Always On or Always Off If you choose the Use Intervals option the Start
207. e perigee and range constraints set here as well as any apogee or perigee thresholds set in the Advanced window When CAT has prepared a preliminary list of satellites for which the possibility of a close approach exists it checks the specified Time Period then temporarily loads and propagates each of these satellites over that time period If accesses between a satellite on the preliminary list and the current satellite are determined to be within the specified range tolerance the satellite s involved are inserted into the current scenario and access graphics display in the Map window If no accesses are found the satellites are removed from the scenario and a message indicating that no matches were found displays in the Message window 13 30 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Time Period By default the ephemeris start and stop time periods are entered in the Start and Stop Time fields You can change these values if necessary If you enter an incremental Start and Stop Time within the approved time period for the satellite then change the Start Time to a value that exceeds the current Stop Time the Stop Time is updated in the same increment as previously entered For example if the Start Time is 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 and the Stop Time is 1 Jan 1997 01 00 00 00 and you change the Start Time to be 1 Jan 1997 02 00 00 00 CAT automatically changes the Stop Time to be 1 Jan 1997 03 00 00 00 If the Stop Time would be outsi
208. e use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Groupe Bull Agreed to this day of 19 By Title Satellite Tool Kit Software License Agreement STK USER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION tiesa S Who Should Use This Manual sm 1 2 How This Manual IS Organized cancer tte tree 1 2 Conventions Used in This Manual ssss meme 1 8 STK Professional Features ssssssssssse eee 1 9 Advanced Aa caida Ee te te ee fue ta 1 9 High Precision Orbit Propagator HPOP sssss 1 11 Long term Orbit Predictor LOP ssssss 1 13 Mi a ek obec denen cass A A A A AA 1 14 Tera ns ld 1 14 High Resolution Maps 5 eroe tote rre iib ete debio bete 1 15 Additional Resources s o es eet et p e eret eet i EP ERE 1 15 USER ERP GEA cana ee m MU SM Dem m Starting s Quitting STIS iode ote eet Eee ee 2 3 TIhebBrowser WIndgoW iii eee he epo ie 2 3 ODJeCU MEN asar edi ee b e ta tu t A De dede 25 Opening amp Closing a SCENANIO we ect teeter ce ee crono canina 25 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual i Table of Contents Creating a New Object nnns 2 6 Inserting an Existing Object into a Scenario ssssse 2 6 Last loaded FUNCTION cui irent te Pt rd eri 2 8 Linking an Object into a Scenario sssssss 2 8 al O isl Les c A NN 2 8 Saving to a Different Directory sss 2 9 Saving a Modified Object oo
209. e 3 10 Table 3 5 Advanced projection types e ee dte 3 11 Table 3 6 Text annotation position options 0oooociccccccccccccccccccccnnnnnnnncccininacincccnnn 3 16 Fable 4 1 Save preferences i oes cp ee rhet edd pter png s 4 2 Table 4 2 IPC Prefer emees ive sche tse lol DESIT eg 4 4 Tabl e 4 3 Online preferences tette edo P f ed tete 4 5 Table 51s Time period opHlots ne etr eere ate edet tta tero ied ves 5 4 Table 5 2 Animation options nte tr dee e eot denda 5 5 Tabl 5z3 DIS OptIOllS usate e a beet eH Lo e Metu inier o 5 8 Table 5 4 Database options ssssssssssIIIRI Ie 5 12 Table 5 55 Global attribUltes c tete endete eed doi gb m ees 5 15 T ble 5 6 Sun lighting OPIO x aor or Cot Tee eine 5 16 Table 6 1 Description of classical orbital elements sssssssssssssssssss 6 5 Table 6 2 Equinoctial coordinate type elements 2 eee 6 9 Table 6 3 Mixed spherical coordinate type elements sssssssssssss 6 10 Table 6 4 Sphetical elements ede b tee e e aces 6 11 Table 6 5 Standard coordinate systems 0 2 0 ee ene ee 6 12 Table 6 6 AAM Coordinate systems a a aa mes 6 13 Table 6sZ EI pse optlohs erae etae etie e etm bett de RI ERREUR OR RR E 6 14 Table 6 8 Force model options eet ttp e e ces 6 16 Table 6 9 Atmospheric Density Models 5 e Certe te ee e ed 6 17 Table 6 10 Force model options se e E a 6 19 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual xV Table of Cont
210. e C 17 Torque Elle tQLEOIMAE yest an e oerte ere e pte C18 Color Bitmap Pixmap bmp xpm File Format see C 19 Database File Formats essem emnes C 20 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual xi Table of Contents Satellite DAtaWAase exstet aee ntu tel Enea Nae ee tt ee C20 TLE FIG FM iii seni bola ree ein a bal eres C26 City Databases cicatrices C29 Facility Database ET C32 Stal Databases hfc oue 6o B tei th b Ae hie wd mutton te bees C34 Wels ida FIE S Zea A c ERES C 38 HPOP TECHNICAL NIG TES crmaodosta dere testae Rene mtn tape DET Techmica Notes a too oet AN D 1 ARSS dense eak aee eias aaka inana aia akanan D 2 HIGH RESOLUTION MAPS TECHNICAL NOTES n E 1 DEMOS e NN E 2 RW DB2 FEAtUIFES A ied a ee ee ies E 3 IS O E 3 AM da EA Akon e Ee ni de ed o IO E 4 ANS E 5 International Boundaries sssssssssseeeem ees E 6 Provincial BOuriclaries estacional esti E 8 List of Figures Figure 2 1 Typical Browser windOw ssssssssRR e 2 4 Figure 2 2 Typical Insert WIR GOW eret irre eee cette eh 2 7 Figure 2 3 Satellite Pass tab illustrating toggle buttons radio buttons and option MENUS rU MC S 2 19 xii Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 1 The Map WINdOW voir a a e 3 2 Figure 3 2 Map window with texture DackgrOUNd ooooiccccccccccooncncncnnnnnnninanininnns 3 15 Figure 3 3 Status bar in Map windOw sssssH Hm 3 17 Figure 6
211. e STK Report Graph Tool window is the control panel for generating reports and graphs It allows you to open an existing report graph style or create a new one change the time period of the report or graph and manage the report and graph styles available Figure 15 1 An example of the STK Report Tool window SFK Report Tool ERST Report Active Constraints Attitude Quaternions B1950 Position Velocity Beta Angle Classical Orbit Elements ECF Acceleration ECF LLR Position ECF Position Velocity Create Time Period Properties Estimates Euler Angles J2000 ECI Acceleration J2000 ECI Position Velocity LLA Position LOP Mean Elements Lifetime Lighting Times METE Position Velocity E 2 TT Remove Make Copy rj Eclipse Times Change Cancel Help E 15 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports Graphs Reports and dynamic displays use the same style files to define the content and format of e the report or dynamic display If you change a report style the dynamic display for that same style also changes If you wish to keep the original style but modify it use the Make Copy function This is also true of graphs and strip charts Warning Changing Time Periods for Reports amp Graphs Many of the standard reports and graphs include time dependent data With STK you can limit the time intervals for data reporting purposes and control the tim
212. e an access is created it maintains a close relationship with the defining objects If either of the defining objects is changed in such a way that the access times may be altered the access is automatically recomputed Also if either of the defining objects is removed from the scenario the access is automatically removed The term target is used here to refer to any type of object in STK not just an instance of the Target class Access and targeted sensors have a special relationship The on times for the targeted sensor are computed based upon accesses between the sensor and its assigned targets These on times are automatically updated whenever a targeted sensor or one of its targets are changed The interaction between a targeted sensor and another object that is not a target of the sensor can be somewhat confusing if the targeted sensor has multiple targets assigned to it If a targeted sensor could access multiple targets simultaneously a projection of the sensor to all accessible targets would be displayed during animation When accesses to a targeted sensor are computed however the pointing of the sensor must be uniquely defined at each point in time To accomplish this STK points the sensor to each accessible target until the end of that target s accessibility starting with the first accessible target A targeted sensor may therefore point toward a particular target for part or none of its accessible intervals depen
213. e between the line of sight from F T R P V Exclusion the source object to the object of interest and the line Angle of sight from the source object to the Sun for which access is considered valid For example enter 5 in the if you wish to ignore access to another object if it is within 5 of the Sun exclusion angle is 5 Area of Exclusion Solar Exclusion Arimte The minimum angle between the line of sight from F T R P V Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 51 Lunar Satellites Fields Description Constraint applies to Exclusion the source object to the source object of interest and Angle the line of sight from the object to the Moon for which access is considered valid Lighting Indicates that access is valid under the specified F T R P V condition Direct Sun total Sunlight Penumbra or Direct Sun partial or total Sunlight Penumbra partial Sunlight Penumbra or Umbra partial Sunlight or total shadow Umbra total shadow Umbra or Direct Sun total shadow or total Sunlight Penumbra Annular Eclipse Penumbra Full Sunlight Solar Lunar Only applies when calculating access to a star or Obstruction planet Obstruction occurs when access is blocked by the Sun or Moon Constraints Temporal The fields in this tab allow you to impose time based constraints on the satellite 6 52 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites
214. e central angle and the azimuth bearing Resizes map to its correct 2 1 aspect ratio Displays a Map Properties window Refer to page 3 5 for a detailed discussion about Map graphics properties Animation Time Steps Animation Steps increase or decrease incrementally as follows 3 4 0 01 0 10 0 50 3 00 5 00 10 00 30 00 60 00 180 00 300 00 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual The Map Window 600 00 1000 00 3600 00 For instance if you click the Increase Time Step button three times and the animation rate was originally set to the default of 60 00 seconds the new animation rate is 600 00 seconds Map Properties Use the A button to display the Map Properties window for the Map Map Attributes The fields in the Map Attributes tab allow you to control the display of the tool and status bars scroll bars and terrain data Earth View 1 Map Properties Attributes Details Projection images Text Annotation Resolution Map Display Options Show Tool Bar Show Status Bar F Show Scroll Bars 4 Show Elevation Regions OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 35 The Map Window Table 3 2 Map display options Option Show Tool Bar Show Scroll Bars Show Status Bar Show Terrain a Hint Description If ON the tool bar displays at the top of the Map window The tool bar controls animation Toggle ON and OFF to control t
215. e etes sci 6 3 Two Body J2 Perturbation amp J4 Perturbation Propagators 6 3 CODIBEDOGL S ha e ote oda bo to t Cote uev EA AY 6 4 Coordinate EPOC sucursal 6 4 Coordinate TP list 64 Coordinate Systems Standard sss 6 12 Coordinate Systems Advanced Analysis Module ssss 6 13 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 6 1 Satellites 6 2 Special OPIO zs t etti et EE e ee ea ace 6 14 HPOP Propagator Module ss 6 15 Force Models onc cad etos oin eee Rte bn a i Cobre ters 6 15 Long term Orbit Predictor Module 6 18 FOIS MO del ere Pec E ee ee ate ce des es CONT 6 18 MSGPAPropagealtor a u oem etu A dott RS 6 22 Managing EE Sets nara ad 6 24 Custom Propagator StkExternal sss 6 27 AS ec eceeceeceeeeeseesteeeteeeteesessetsesnieesieeentenats 6 28 AUttUCe TYPE selector omic ia eot eee eoe 6 29 Orientation IWC ies Sachi qt Ett E IR ttt 6 34 Integrated TIUS dto e ier reete Ret foe 6 35 Target PONING siei aeree nd temet etat ets 6 36 Basic Properties Pass Break sssssssssss emm 6 38 Basic Properties Mais ederet rrr is 6 40 Graphics Properties AXtrilDUtes 2 peccet doctr bose tete eth beat fetten 6 41 Graphics Properties Pass eit tete erar eee ree erras 6 42 Graphics Properties Display Times sss 644 Graphics Properties Contours ssssssss eme 6 45 C OnStralnts BASIC 5 2 tech
216. e is being applied An applied torque produces an angular acceleration about the object s center of mass True Anomaly The angle from the eccentricity vector to the object position vector measured in the direction of object motion True of Date Coordinate System An inertial coordinate frame in which the direction of the X axis is defined by the true vernal equinox and the Z axis is defined by the true spin of the Earth at a user specified epoch The term True indicates that both precession and nutation have been accounted for True of Epoch Coordinate System An inertial coordinate frame in which the direction of the X axis is defined by the true vernal equinox and the Z axis is defined by the true spin of the Earth at the time of the state vector The term True indicates that both precession and nutation have been accounted for Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Turn Radius Curvature of the arc between the current waypoint and the next Two Body Keplerian motion propagator considers the Earth to be a point mass with no perturbations Two line Element TLE Set A set of parameters that provides for accurate reconstruction of ephemeris for an extended period of time Umbra That portion of a shadow in which the Sun is seen as entirely obscured Units Scenario Basic Properties Establish the default settings for all units of measure used in a scenario Universal Time UT Local mean solar time on the Gree
217. e last ascending node crossing Time Past Perigee The elapsed time since the last perigee passage Figure 6 1 Classical coordinate relationships Tz Intersection of orbit plane with TX orbital anqular momentum vecorr o argument of perigee v true anomaly Q Right ascension of the ascending node RAAN i inclination Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 7 PRO Advanced Analysis Satellites Cartesian Coordinate Type X 2951 1052127 nm M 2500 1471428 nm The Cartesian coordinate type displays fields PR LAE ey D nm that allow you to enter the initial X Y and Z T AP x Velocity 0 3848413082 nm sec position of your satellite as well as the satellite s S Pra M v velocity 04542561400 nm sec initial X Y and Z velocities using the type of ES velocity 3 986836352224 nm sec Coordinate System selected Equinoctial Coordinate Type Advanced Analysis Module Semimajor Axis 3667 7646000 Equinoctial uses the center of the Earth as the pres AR os n 0 00000000 origin and the plane of the satellite s orbit as M ETT ER the reference plane p 055557636 a 0 65743965 The equinoctial coordinate type is only available when Mean Longitude 139 729053 deg an inertial coordinate system is selected Direction Retrograde 4 The advantage of this element set is that singularities are limited to retrograde equatorial orbits parabolic hyperbo
218. e minimum and or maximum search limits for inclination Owner The country which owns the satellite Mission The mission which the satellite performs Status Choose either Active or Inactive 14 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite Star Databases When you ve entered as many search criteria as possible click the Perform Search button The satellite query assumes an implicit AND between search criteria You cannot search for EITHER OR parameters Note Viewing Search Results Once you ve queried the database the Satellite Database Search Results window appears OSCAR 01 1961 0345 COMM CIVIL Not Available OSCAR 02 1962 0228 COMM CIVIL Not Available TELSTAR 1 1962 0294 COMM CIVIL 26 May 1997 16 32 15 17 RELAY 1 1962 0684 COMM CIVIL 1963 0044 pL A 1 A RELAY 2 1964 0034 COMM CIVIL 27 May 1997 01 28 03 91 ECHO 2 1964 004A COMM CIVIL Not Available SYNCOM 3 1964 0474 COMM CIVIL 6 Dec 1974 00 00 15 00 OSCAR 03 1965 016F COMM CIVIL 26 May 1997 23 06 13 26 OSCAR 04 1965 1080 COMM CIVIL Not Available rj Matches Found 135 Unique 135 Select All Deselect an Selected 1 Propagation Constellation F Auto Propagate Start Time 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 Create Constellation Time Step 60 000 sec Stop Time 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 OK Apply Cancel Help If there are a number of satellites resulting from the search select the satel
219. e step without changing the scenario s time parameters Report Time Periods Classical Orbit Elements Contents a r Section Intervals Classical Elements J2000 Semi maj Classical Elements J2000 Eccentric Classical Elements J2000 Inclinatior Classical Elements J2000 RAAN Classical Elements J2000 Arg of Pe Classical Elements J2000 True Ano Classical Elements J2000 Mean Ani 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 1 Nov 1997 08 00 00 00 Use Ephemeris Steps Step Size 0 017 hr 4 Write Intervals To Report Eee pee Es ea Time Intervals and Step Sizes are set for each section of the data You can t set time intervals or step sizes for a single line or element The contents of the entire report or graph are shown in the Contents list for reference only Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 3 Warning Reports amp Graphs The Time Period window for graphs doesn t display Section and Line information in the Contents list In addition the Write Intervals to Report option isn t available for graphs In the Contents list box highlight the section for which you wish to set time limits The Start and Stop Times currently set for that section appear in the Section Intervals portion of the Time Periods window Use the command buttons to add and modify the time periods for the section For Reports you can also order the time periods If you generate data using an extremely
220. ease a mouse button Double click means to press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession Click and drag means to press and hold a mouse button while moving the mouse then release the button once you stop moving to define an area on the screen Unless otherwise noted use the left mouse button to perform actions Window screen buttons are displayed in a sans serif font or a picture of the button is displayed For instance the manual may refer to the OK button or just display the button as Window titles are displayed in a bold italic sans serif font while tabs within a window are displayed in bold sans serif and fields in plain sans serif For example the Map Background tab of the Graphic Properties window contains the Background Image File field Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction e Notes to the reader are located in a shadowed box Information contained in these notes is important and should be taken into consideration Notes are identified by the heading Note and aL icon in the outside margin e Hints to the reader are located in a shadowed box Hints may contain shortcuts or helpful information to make your work easier They are identified by the heading Hint and a icon in the outside margin Warnings to the reader are located in a shadowed box Warnings contain important information for the user that may cause problems if not followed They are identified by the heading Warning and a
221. ed Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 13 Note Sensors Tracking Boresight Select this option to aim a sensor at one or more targets i e facility vehicle and or target The sensor s footprint only appears on the map when a given target is In view as determined by the sensor constraints and the targeted object s constraints As the sensor tracks a target its footprint changes shape until the target is no longer in sight A targeted tracking sensor actually slews or tracks its assigned targets as soon as one of its targets appears over the horizon No relative pointing is defined for this type of sensor Fixed Boresight Select this option to point a sensor by providing azimuth and elevation values for the sensor s boresight Since this is a targeted sensor its footprint only displays in the Map window when a target is in view However the sensor always points in a fixed direction The pointing of the sensor isn t affected by the target chosen The sensor appears during animation only if one of the assigned targets is visible within the defined view The body fixed Z axis for a facility or target points toward zenith and for a vehicle is attitude dependent For the STK default attitude with body fixed Z towards nadir positive elevation angles point sensors away from the Earth The default elevation angles are 490 for facility and target based sensors and 90 for vehicle based sensors Orientation
222. ed For information about the objects in STK and their characteristics please refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual STK tools such as reports and graphs are discussed in separate chapters due to their complexity Please refer to Chapter 14 for information about the four database tools Satellite City Facility and Star available in STK Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 1 Using STK Tools Chapter 15 for Report and Graph tools Chapter 16 for the Dynamic Display and Strip Chart tools Chapter Contents 13 2 ACCESS CNA ATI o o a a 13 3 Calculating Access between Objects oo sss 13 3 Setting Access Graphics for the Map Window ee 135 Generating ACCESS REDOMS eransi iasanen e aana a esee betae 13 6 Viewing Azimuth Elevation and Range Data for Access 13 7 Using the Custom and Dynamic Display Options ee 13 8 Creating Graphs for Access Data 13 8 Removing Accesses from the Map Window s 13 9 Accesses and Their Defining Objects 13 10 Wo aicH p 13 11 Viewing the AER Repo iit o Rn ede eee nd 13 13 VIEWING 4 Time Data Report ec cate tr en tetti hector etos 13 13 Lifetimes Modules s so se a RD 13 14 AVANCE e oett ete turco D te hoftes ee 13 17 COMPUTING LEUE succionar ett t ef Co cede en 13 19 MSIE Resucitado c n tete 13 20 ESTE SI RSEN PERI DE E M DUNS RO RTT EUN ado de 1321 euo 13 22 Swath Advanced Analysis Module 13 23 TA 13 23 Sen
223. ed coordinate system or an inertial coordinate system Yaw is defined relative to the inertial coordinate system within STK Zoom Change magnification without losing focus Satellite Tool KitO APPENDIX B DEFINING CUSTOM SENSOR PATTERNS Overview This appendix explains how to define a custom sensor pattern for a vehicle facility or target in STK There are three different methods for defining custom sensor patterns in STK In the following sections the same custom sensor pattern is created using each method Once the pattern has been defined it is saved to a pattern file STK reads the description when the file is referenced by a sensor attached to an object The example used in this appendix is to create a sensor pointing off the right side of the vehicle with a beam from 40 to 50 off nadir The sensor also sweeps forward and aft 30 It is assumed that the vehicle s attitude is such that the vehicle X axis is along the velocity direction which means that the custom sensor pattern is centered around a vehicle azimuth of 90 The sensor is designed so that the reference direction boresight is along nadir and therefore is outside of the pattern Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 1 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns It is important to note that the accuracy of computations performed using custom sensors is directly related to the number of points used to describe the pattern It is generally better to spend a
224. ed to calculate E for given M and e It is possible to calculate the True Anomaly from E Keyboard Accelerators See Accelerator Keys Latitude The angular distance north or south from the equator of a point on the Earth s surface expressed in degrees Line of Sight Geometric direction in which two objects have direct visibility of each other Local Apparent Time The hour angle between an observer s local meridian and the meridian passing through the true Sun A Sundial reads local apparent time Using this time reference the Sun is at its highest elevation at noon Local Satellite Time The time corresponding to a satellite s position in 1ts orbit relative to the Sun When the satellite crosses the projection of the Sun vector onto the orbit plane on the side of the orbit nearest the Sun 1t 1s satellite noon When the satellite crosses the projection of the Sun vector onto the orbit plane on the side of the orbit farthest from the Sun it is satellite midnight Local Gregorian Local time zone date and time expressed in standard Gregorian format 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 0000 Local Julian Local time zone date and time expressed in day of year format 306 97 00 00 00 0000 Longitude Angular distance along the equator from the Greenwich meridian to the point of interest Although the convention is to measure this angle from 0 to 360 eastward longitudes are often expressed 180 to 180 or 180 West to 180
225. ehicle parameters since the window was opened For changes made to the style definition you must create a new report window Report Properties Reports are divided into sections and lines Sections are blocks of similar data Data with different time dependencies must be placed in separate sections of the report Lines consist of various data elements included in the report 15 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports amp Graphs tO You can create a report that contains data for two or more object classes e g facility and i t vehicle ha Hint In the STK Report Tool window you can define the contents and format of the modified or new report style Select the style in the list and use the Properties button Content The Content tab allows you to select the data elements to be included in your report Report Style Properties Fac and Veh Position __ Content Header ET v Cartesian Positic Report Contents e Eclipse Times Cartesian Position y e EstimateBias Cartesian Position z LIA State eae 2 ne E LLR Siem Time a Lighting AER Cartesian Position J2000 x X Lighting Times Cartesian Position J2000 y e Residuals rtesian Positions 20007 4 Solar Intensity 4 Active Constrain KR Attitude Quaterr Attitude YPR e d Y New section New Line p OK Apply Cancel Help ppp ja o ja ja jo ja jo jo ja D
226. ellite s position on the Earth s equatorial plane revolves in the direction opposite to that of the rotation of the Earth The inclination of a retrograde orbit is greater than 90 degrees Right Ascension Angle measured in the inertial equatorial plane from the inertial X axis in a right handed sense about the inertial Z axis Right Ascension of Ascending Node RAAN The angle measured in the inertial equatorial plane from the inertial X axis to the ascending node of the satellite s orbit in a right handed sense about the inertial Z axis Rocket Defines a vehicle following an elliptical path that begins and ends at the Earth s surface Satellite Tool KitO Roll A rotation about the X axis of a reference coordinate system This coordinate system can be a local system moving with the object a body fixed coordinate system or an inertial coordinate system Roll is defined relative to the inertial coordinate system in STK Round trip Delay Time The time required for a signal to travel from an Earth station via a satellite to another Earth station approximately 250 milliseconds for a geostationary satellite Save As Files menu Use this command to save the current object under anew name Save Files menu Use this command to overwrite the original object file so that it includes any changes made since last saved Scenario The highest level object within STK Scenarios contain other objects and becomes the outline
227. ellites currently loaded in the scenario Time Step The time lapse between screen updates for animation Time Units Specify the unit of measure to be displayed when referring to time Options are seconds hours minutes and days Toggle Button UNIX platforms Square shaped button that allows the user to flip between two opposite conditions When a toggle button appears pushed in the option is ON Tool Bar Area located along the top of the Map window that contains animation command buttons such as Animate Forward Animate Reverse Increase Time Step Decrease Time Step Pause Reset Step Satellite Tool KitO Forward Step Reverse Zoom In Zoom Out Measure and Resize To Aspect Ratio Also contains a tool bar message window that displays a text description of any button on the tool bar when the user moves the cursor over a button Tools Menu Pull down menu that allows the user to perform specialized functions such as defining and displaying accesses lighting conditions vehicle sensor swaths and Walker constellations Tools are also available for creating reports and graphs and importing satellites Topocentric A coordinate system originating at a point on the Earth The axes are defined so that x is in the local north direction y is in the local east direction and z is along the inward normal to the surface Torque The vector cross product of force and the distance from the center of mass at which the forc
228. ence If you have a TLE that you wish to use for defining a vehicle use the Satellite Database tool to load the data as a vehicle in your scenario Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 14 9 Le s v DE Hint City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Querying a Database You can perform a satellite query using the default database shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search Enter the correct file name in the Database field Once you ve chosen the database enter as many search criteria as possible Use wildcard entries and to assist in the search if you know only a portion of the criteria For instance if you enter INTELSAT in the Name text box query results would include all satellites whose name begins with INTELSAT You can use the wildcards anywhere in the entry Table 14 5 Satellite Database options Search Criteria Description SSC The SSC number of the vehicle Common Name The common name of the satellite Official Name The official name of the satellite International The international number of the vehicle The international Number number format is YYYY DDD and an alpha indicator if there is more than one part of the satellite Apogee Min Max The minimum and or maximum search limits for apogee Perigee Min Max The minimum and or maximum search limits for perigee Period Min Max The minimum and or maximum search limits for period Inclination Min Max Th
229. ents Ta ble 6 1 1 MSGP4 orbital elements cct reete edes 6 23 Table 6 1 2 TLE Selection OPtlOns 1 thoi e Pede ada 6 25 Table 6 13 TLE advanced options ssssssssssssss RII eee eeeeees 6 27 Table 6 14 Staridard attittde types toner dete ete tete egt 6 30 Table 6 15 Other Attitude types Advanced Analysis Module 6 31 Table 6sT 6 Orientation types ceti tete o MU me oett tee oleae setas 6 34 Table 6 17 Integrated attitude options sssssssssssem nnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnos 6 35 Table 6 18 Pass Break flelds utter e tette etatis 6 39 Table 6 19 Options in the Attributes tab ssssssssssssRRR 6 41 Table 6 20 Options in the Pass tab ooooooooooooooococcccoconoconccoconononannnnnnnnnnnncoconincnnnns 6 43 Table 6 21 Satellite basic CONSEAIMtS ooooococncnccnnncncnccconoccccccococononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnns 6 48 Table 6 22 Satellite Sut CONSTANTES o e tte eee et d e deseen 6 51 Table 6 23 Satellite temporal constraints ssssssssssssss 6 53 Table 6 24 Satellite advanced constraints ssssssssssss 6 55 Table 7 1 Great Arc propagator elements sssssssssssssse 7 3 Table 7 2 Attitude AY DOS o e cedo feces e Pet cubus ct ee red epe 7 5 Table 7 3 Options in the Attributes tab 7 7 Table 7 4 Aircraft advanced constraints sss 7 11 Table 8 1 Simple Ascent propagator elements sssssss
230. erfectly circular orbit e Apogee Radius Perigee Radius Measured from the center of the Earth to the points of maximum and minimum radius in the orbit Apogee Altitude Perigee Altitude Measured from the surface of the Earth a theoretical sphere where the radius equals the equatorial radius of the Earth to the points of maximum and minimum radius in the orbit Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 5 Satellites Element 6 6 Description Period Eccentricity The Period is the duration of one orbit based on assumed two body motion Mean Motion Eccentricity Mean Motion identifies the number of orbits per day 86400 sec period based on assumed two body motion Inclination The angle between the angular momentum vector perpendicular to the plane of the orbit and the inertial Z axis Argument of Perigee The angle from the ascending node to the eccentricity vector lowest point of orbit measured in the direction of the satellite s motion and in the orbit plane The eccentricity vector points from the center of the Earth to perigee with a magnitude equal to the eccentricity of the orbit For a circular orbit the argument of perigee is defined to be zero perigee at the ascending node The last of three elements describing orientation allows you to specify the orientation of the orbital planes Choose either Right Ascension of the Ascending Node default The angle from the inertial X axis
231. es are shipped with STK for your use These databases include information about thousands of facilities cities satellites and stars Using the databases you can easily identify an object and insert it into the current scenario Chapter Contents City DJatalDaSe ite D ise teh ont etitm Lentbect eek ien fette ee atii 14 2 Querying a Database istae 14 3 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 14 1 City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases USAS 144 Object Descrnptioh aedi rie erit anal cerei ent petenda 14 5 Facility Data D ser nda ter adiccion d etude ea tere bd 14 5 Querying a Dateabase oerte ene entere ert te e aN 14 6 Viewing Search Results sss 14 7 ODject DESCNPUOM snein tee 14 8 Satellite Database coo ete IR eed eaeals 14 8 Querying a Database erre tenete nct n 14 10 USES A 14 11 A ec cede 14 12 Object DESCNPllOM isis tae di tte bt 14 14 Star Data ase ET 14 14 Querying a Database 14 15 Viewing Search Results eisian eea ei E 14 17 Object DESCN PUG isa 14 17 Lo E 14 18 Loading a Satellite TLE nina cnn 14 18 Loading a Facility ILE caet ened aca ke 14 20 Object DescrIptiOh a trt tiae tradet citra ia ted 14 22 City Database PRO Advanced Analysis Use the City Database tool to identify and insert cities as facilities or targets The city database contains thousands of cities around the world Individual ci
232. es the line along the 40 elevation contour The resulting pattern file for the Az El Mask format is then created using the edge points in the polar diagram and making the first and last points the same to close the pattern Listing B 2 Az El Mask Format Stk v 3 0 NumberPoints 27 AzElMaskData 60 40 65 40 70 40 B 8 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Defining Custom Sensor Patterns 75 40 80 40 85 40 90 40 95 40 100 40 105 40 110 40 115 40 120 40 120 50 115 50 110 50 105 50 100 50 95 50 90 50 85 50 80 50 75 50 70 50 65 50 60 50 60 40 EndPatternData The Angle Off Boresight Format In the Angle Off Boresight format the custom sensor pattern is defined by the angle between the edge points of the sensor and the boresight direction The custom pattern can be determined from a polar diagram where the concentric circles are lines of constant angle from the boresight The Angle Off Boresight format is an alternative to the Reference Plane format and provides for the input of the elevation sweep angles and the forward and aft sweep angles directly Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 9 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns Figure B 5 Polar projection for the Angle Off Boresight format 0 0 315 0 225 0 y Jie das 180 0 The pattern file is now created using the edge points and making the first and last points the same to close the pattern Listing B 3 Angle off bo
233. es to display vertically on the graph The number of grid lines to display horizontally on the graph The length of time for which the strip chart elements display before updating Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 USING THE STK HELP MENU Overview STK features a Help system that you can reference for help on functions and options available in STK You can access Help files while in the Browser window or through individual tabs and windows in STK STK Help is available through the Help menu at the top of the Browser window or by clicking on the Help button on the bottom right hand side of STK windows If you access Help through a window other than the Browser the Help files for the specific window display if you access Help from the Browser the Overview or Contents displays Chapter Contents STIR HEID TOPICS c c 17 2 Selecting AN AMIL BrOWSEP itecto doit 17 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 1 Using the STK Help Menu Opening Help from the Browser Window sm 17 3 Opening Help from a Property Window errereen 17 3 Bacon O NEANS 17 3 Password Window Initial Start Up sss 17 4 Requesting Licenses by E Mail or FAX 175 Entero bcenses it dt eee et See 17 6 NEAL eem meme 17 8 Online Manuals 2 ce tano etos eet eut ebbe eaa M etu nt eti eu ede 17 9 ADOS cda era ot Ee de Eos e Me E Tae 17 9 AGVUW eD SIEE iie eei este ene ertet dad bods 17 9 Other Help Menu Men
234. etween 90 and 90 An annotation positioned using X Y coordinates isn t affected by the Map Projection Lat Lon If you use Lat Lon to position the text the text moves with the Map as you change the Map Projection type and center point Enter the text in the large text box You can also specify a color for the text 3 16 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual The Map Window When everything is set click Insert Point The Items list is updated to reflect your addition and the Map window displays the text where specified To delete a previously saved text annotation highlight the text in the Items list box and click the Delete Point button The Insert Point button becomes a Modify Point button when you switch Edit Modes to Change Current Item You can also change a previously saved text annotation by using the Change Current Item option Status Bar At the bottom of the Map window the status bar shown below displays the current latitude and longitude of your cursor in the Map window the name of the object selected if any and the current scenario time Figure 3 3 Status bar in Map window Lat Lon WhiteSands Time 1 Nov 1997 01 00 00 00 Paused To select an object position your cursor over that object e g a ground track a facility a target or a sensor in the Map window and hold down the left mouse button The name of the object you ve selected appears in the center box of
235. evice The choices in this section allow you to choose the printer or directory to which the Map window prints Select either Printer Choose the printer on which you wish to print the Map window The default printer is the printer specified in your STK run control file File Choose this option to print the Map to a file in the format you chose in the File Format field Use the m button to browse through a list of files and specify the directory path and name for the file Printer Command Specify the correct print command specific to the platform for Graphic files in the text box 2 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Reports amp Graphs The options in the Reports amp Graphs tab control the way in which all reports and graphs generated during the STK session print including page layout attributes and output device Additional options for printing reports and graphs are Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 13 User Interface Table 2 2 Additional print options for reports amp graphs Option Description Page Layout The options in this section allow you to specify how you wish reports and graphs to print Choices are Lines Per Page Specify the maximum number of lines to be printed on a single page Wrap Lines Specify whether lines of text should wrap to the next line Margins Specify the Top Bottom Left and Right margins to be used when printing a report
236. face The Browser and Map windows are updated to include the previously defined object Last Loaded Function STK allows you to recall the last six objects opened or inserted into the current STK session The Last Loaded function available through the Files menu in the Browser features a pull right menu that lists the last six objects opened i e scenarios or inserted into a scenario ie vehicles facilities targets area targets planets stars sensors Linking an Object into a Scenario You can also insert a link to an existing object To do this highlight the scenario in the Browser window select Insert As Link from the Files menu Choose the object to which you wish to insert a link and click OK in the Insert window The object appears in the Browser window However object attributes and properties can t be changed Saving an Object To save a newly created object highlight the object in the Browser window select Save from the Files menu STK saves data in a hierarchical form meaning that when you save an object all subordinate objects are saved as well unless you choose the Save No Children option Thus when you save a scenario all objects within that 2 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual O ee ere User Interface scenario are saved to a file as well In the same manner when you save a vehicle facility or target any sensors attached to that object are also saved In addition relationships amon
237. fferent attitude profile types are provided below Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 29 Satellites When an axis is constrained that particular axis attempts to point to the desired location as close as possible while still maintaining its proper relationship with the other axes defined in the coordinate system When an axis is aligned that axis points directly to the desired object forcing the other axes to rotate accordingly Attitude Types Standard In each of the following attitude types the satellite s Z axis is aligned with the nadir direction Table 6 14 Standard attitude types Attitude Type Description Nadir alignment with ECF velocity constraint In this profile the satellite s Z axis is aligned with the nadir direction and the satellites X axis is constrained in the direction of the ECF velocity vector The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis i e to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 The Nadir alignment with ECF velocity constraint profile may not be appropriate for satellites in synchronous or highly eccentric orbits since the ECF velocity vector may be poorly defined and or alternating in direction Instead use the Nadir alignment with ECI velocity constraints profile Nadir alignment with ECl velocity The satellite
238. field D HH MM SS SS See warning following this table Angle Unit Angles can be displayed in Degrees deg Radians rad e Arc seconds arcSec Arc minutes arcMin Degrees minutes seconds DMS Hours minutes seconds HMS Mass Unit Two units of measure are available for mass Kilograms kg Pounds Ib 1 pound mass weighs 1 pound on the surface of the Earth Power Unit Power can be displayed in one of the following units Milliwatts mW Gigawatts GW Watts W dBm dBm Kilowatts KW dBW dBW Megawatts MW Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 5 9 Scenarios Field Frequency Unit Small Distance Unit Latitude Unit Longitude Unit Description Frequency can be displayed in one of the following units Hertz Hz Kilohertz KHz Megahertz MHz Gigahertz GHz Terahertz THz Small Distance Units are used to describe distances smaller than a meter Choices are Inches in Microns um Centimeters cm Nanometers nm e Millimeters mm Meters m Feet ft These two units of measure can be displayed in one of the following units Degrees deg Radians rad Degrees minutes seconds DMS Hours minutes seconds HMS Typically you may use either of the three unit combinations to pinpoint a facility position for example You can enter data in STK using any unit of measure STK converts the v
239. for longitude Population Min Max Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits for population Country Specify the country in which the city is located City Type Specify the type of city of interest Choose among Populated Place Administration Center National Capital Territorial Capital When you ve entered as many search criteria as possible click the Perform Search button The query assumes an implicit AND between search criteria You cannot search for EITHER OR parameters Viewing Search Results Once you ve queried the database the City Database Search Results window appears If there are a number of cities resulting from the search select the items of interest in the list Use the Select All button to select all cities in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected cities in the list Other 14 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual PRO Advanced Analysis City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases options in the City Database Search Results window are described in the table following Table 14 2 City Database search results options Field Description Create Facility or Target Class Choose to insert the city as either a facility or target class Create Constellation Chains module only If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the cities you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text box When you re satisfied click the OK button
240. for a proposed series of events that can be visualized Semimajor Axis Half the distance between the two most distant points on an ellipse For a circle the semimajor axis 1s the same as the radius of the circle Sensors Beam of some shape that points in a particular direction Sensors can represent transmitting receiving or sensing devices with associated attributes and or constraints They can also be attached to a vehicle facility or target They can also be used to define areas such as a satellite s field of view of constraint or areas such as a minimum elevation for a target in a valley Sidereal Time The time required for the Earth to rotate once on its axis relative to the stars equal to 23h 56m 4s of ordinary mean solar time A sidereal day consists of 24 sidereal hours and begins when the Vernal Glossary of Terms Equinox crosses the Greenwich meridian Sidereal time is therefore equal to the Hour Angle of the Vernal Equinox Sinusoidal Projection is mathematically based on a cylinder tangent on the equator May have several central meridians Solar Beta Angle The signed angle of the vector to the Sun relative to the orbital plane The signed angle is positive when the vector to the Sun is in the direction of the orbit normal The orbit normal is parallel to the orbital angular momentum vector which is defined as the cross product of the inertial position and velocity vector Solar Exclusion Angle Mi
241. from the U S Air Force Space Command or by contacting Analytical Graphics The mean orbital elements and file references required by the MSGP4 propagator are explained below Table 6 11 MSGP4 orbital elements Element Description SSC Number The catalog number of the spacecraft if created by a 2 line element set Orbit Epoch The universal date and time at which the specified orbit elements are true The format is YYDDD DDDDDDDD Mean Motion The number of revolutions per day Eccentricity Describes the shape of the ellipse A value of O represents a perfectly circular orbit a value of 1 represents a parabolic path Inclination The angle between the angular momentum vector perpendicular to the plane of the orbit and the inertial Z axis Argument of The angle from the ascending node to the eccentricity vector Perigee lowest point of orbit measured in the direction of the satellite s motion The eccentricity vector points from the center of the Earth to perigee with a magnitude equal to the eccentricity of the orbit Right Ascension The angle from the inertial X axis to perigee The ascending node is the point where the satellite passes through the inertial equator moving from south to north Right ascension is measured as a right handed rotation about the inertial Z axis Mean Anomaly The angle from the eccentricity vector to a position vector where the satellite would be if it were always moving at its average angular rate
242. g objects are preserved If you insert a vehicle any sensors attached to that vehicle are also inserted into the scenario The names of any subobjects owned by the object are saved in the object file If you save an object using a file name that already exists the existing file is overwritten and previous contents are lost When you change an object during an STK session none of the changes are saved to the object s file until you save either the object itself or save the parent of the object For example you can attach the same sensor to multiple vehicles within a given scenario and make changes to individual sensors attached to the different vehicles within the scenario so that they appear independently during animation If you save the entire scenario the properties of the last sensor saved define and overwrite the properties of any like named versions of that sensor You can also save the object by pressing the keys For more information about accelerator keys refer to page 2 21 Saving to a Different Directory The STKDb directory specified in your STK run control file serves as the starting point for any STK session Any time you select Open Insert or Save As from the Files menu the default directory appears in the Selection and Filter paths If you choose a different directory your choice remains in effect until you change directories via Open Insert or Save As again If you wish to save an object to a dire
243. ghlight UN search rea DIS Ong amp Santiago JT Static Highlight 2 q WhiteSands 7 GroundVehiclet Reports Graphs v GroundVehicle2 ACCESS Access FE Launchvehiclet x Missile1 AER AER mr f Missile2 im compute Custom Custom Remove Access Remove All Dynamic Strip Em Cancel Help Make sure your time period is set to include ephemeris for both objects during access Note It is best to check object constraints before performing access calculations Select the object for access determinations in the Associated Objects list then Compute An asterisk appears to the left of the object being accessed to indicate that access calculations have been performed If the Static Highlight option is ON the Map window updates to display access from the first object to the second object based on time and object constraints defined Access between the two objects displays in bold Objects for which accesses have already been computed appear with asterisks when the Access window first displays 13 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Figure 13 1 Atypical Map window showing access between the ERS1 Satellite and the Santiago facility Lon 156 63 Setting Access Graphics for the Map Window You can set graphics options for displaying accesses in the Map wind
244. gle in Max Range in Max Azimuth Rate in Max Elevation Rate in Max Range Rate in Max Angular Rate Min Max Altitude Description Constraint applies to Elevation is the angle between the relative All position vector and the plane tangent to the surface of the Earth at the location of the facility or target It is measured as positive in the direction of the outward normal to the surface The horizon is at 0 and directly overhead in 90 elevation The angle should be visualized from the perspective of the viewer or facility target as the angle at which the object being viewed appears above the horizon Local Horizontal Local Surface Normal Vector Measured as the distance between the two F T V objects The azimuth rate is the rate of change of the All azimuth angle The elevation rate is the rate of change of the All elevation angle The range rate is the component of the relative F T V velocity along the line of sight of the two objects The angular rate is the rotational rate of the relative position vector measured in the topocentric coordinate system Refers to the Altitude of the other object in All access calculations Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities Targets Fields Description Constraint applies to Propagation Enter the Minimum and or Maximum light time F T V Delay delay between the two objects It is equivalent to range d
245. h such as J2000 or B1950 the Coord Epoch field is disabled Coordinate Type There are six different coordinate types discussed in the subsections following Each coordinate type is a unique representation of the position and velocity of the satellite Some of the individual elements have two or more options Fields available in the lower portion of the window depend on the option you choose for the coordinate type 6 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Classical Coordinate Type Classical coordinates consist of the Semimajor Axis y 3867 7646000 nm traditional osculating Keplerian orbital Eccentricity y 0 00000000 elements that allow you to specify the shape Inclinaion 36 5000 deg and size of an orbit Some of these orbital Argument of Perigee 0 0000 deg elements described in the table below are Lon agen Node 98 5792 aeg a o y jaa paired and only certain combinations are Y valid The classical coordinate type is only available when an inertial coordinate system is selected Note Table 6 1 Description of classical orbital elements Element Description Orbit Size and The first two fields are linked If you choose one the other element also Shape includes appears Choose one of the following pairs first 2 fields Semimajor Axis Eccentricity default Half the length of the major axis of the orbital ellipse Eccentricity describes the shape of the ellipse where 0 a p
246. h Delta The amount of time between refresh updates For instance if you enter 1 0 STK attempts to refresh the screen once every second The actual refresh delta is limited by the minimum time necessary to redraw your screen The refresh time varies with processor performance graphics hardware options and scenario complexity High Speed STK refreshes the screen as fast as the system is able It doesn t rely on a timer to begin the refresh process You can also set the Start and End Times for the scenario by typing Now Today or Tomorrow in the appropriate fields These settings reference the current date and time based on the computer s internal clock If you save a scenario that includes these settings the animation time of that field is updated every time the scenario is opened to correspond to the current date and time or the next day If you select Real Time ensure that the setting of your real time clock is within the time window of your scenario or no activity occurs in the Map window when the scenario is animated 5 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Basic Properties Setting Units of Measure The options in the Units tab enable you to establish the default settings for all units of measure used in a scenario These settings are used for display and data input purposes throughout STK Tutorial Basic Properties SnallDistanceUnit LatitudeUnit LongitudeUnit Nautical Miles nm Se
247. h day to eight decimal places Blank N 2 Revolutions per day squared Blank N 6 Revolutions per day cubed Blank Bstar drag Blank Ephemeris Blank Element set number Description Card number Blank Satellite or SSC number Blank Inclination degrees Blank Right ascension of node degrees Blank Eccentricity decimal point understood Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C27 Importing Files into STK Column Description 34 Blank 35 42 Argument of perigee degrees 43 Blank 44 5 Mean anomaly degrees 52 Blank 53 63 Mean motion revolutions per day 64 Revolution number at epoch A sample TLE file is shown below for your reference Listing C 10 TLE File Format C28 0 2 0 2 ONO o 6909U 73081A 0102 6909 089 7704 13 6800259831943 6909U 73081A 0102 6909 089 7704 13 6800259831943 8746U 76023A 0049 8746 015 3575 1 0026721801907 8747U 76023B 0012 8747 015 3521 1 0027314701907 9478U 76101A 0615 9478 012 9069 1 0028020801458 10637U 78012A 0244 10637 035 6846 1 0025756801920 12089U 80098A 0816 12089 006 2358 1 0026574302452 96095 97701855 00000078 00000 0 70284 4 093 8156 0162024 105 7374 256 1702 96095 97701855 00000078 00000 0 70284 4 093 8156 0162024 105 7374 256 1702 96096 15457780 00000097 00000 0 10000 3 273 2760 0013056 142 8352 087 7876 96096 15673441 00000102 00000 0
248. h over the surface of the Earth at a given altitude Paths which lie in a plane that intersect the center of the Satellite Tool KitO Earth called Great Arc paths are used to connect the waypoints Greenwich Mean Time GMT The time as measured on the prime meridian running through Greenwich England There are two definitions of GMT The first is based on Universal Time UT 1 which is subject to irregularities in the rotation of the Earth The second is based on Universal Time Coordinate UTC which is a uniform time and is the definition used in STK For precise purposes it is recommended that the term UTC be used Ground Elevation Angle Elevation angle is measured relative to the target or facility as the angle between the local horizon and the vehicle Ground Sample Distance The smallest size of a resolvable object for a sensor at a known range and angle of incidence Ground Track The trace of the vehicle subpoints on the Earth s surface as it orbits around the Earth Half Angle The angle between the axis of a right circular cone and its surface Half Power The angle in an antenna radiation pattern in which the transmitted or received power is diminished by one half of the power as measured at the boresight This is equivalent to a three decibel difference Hammer Aitoff A Map projection that is a variation of the Lambert Azimuthal equal area projection which allows for viewing at both hemispheres simu
249. had Libya and India Pakistan Selected claimed lines Old Panama Canal Zone lines Old N Yemen S Yemen Old Jordan Iraq Old Iraq Saudi Arabia Neutral Zone lines Old East Germany West Germany and Berlin lines Old North South Vietnam boundary Old Vietnam DMZ lines Old Kuwait Saudi Neutral Zone lines Old Oman Yemen line of separation 6 Status and or rank is defined by the U S State Department Other lines in dispute indefinite or lines of separation may exist but were not input due to scale Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual E 7 High Resolution Maps Technical Notes 0 Rank 2 boundaries are found between El Salvador and Honduras Colombia and Ecuador Ecuador and Peru Venezuela and Guyana Guyana and Suriname Brazil and French Guyana French Guyana and Suriname India and China India and Bangladesh China and Russia Botswana and Namibia Zaire and Zambia Qatar and UAE UAE and Saudi Arabia Congo and Zaire and Iraq and Jordan Rank 3 boundaries are found between Cuba and USA Somalia and Ethiopia Egypt and Sudan Kenya and Sudan Oman and UAE India and Pakistan India and China and N Korea and S Korea Rank 4 boundaries are found between Malaysia and the Philippines and Russia and Alaska Rank 5 boundaries are found between Greece and Turkey Trinidad and Venezuela Japan and Russia Malaysia and Indonesia Pacific island groups and Russia and China Provincial Boundaries E 8 Rank Description Bl
250. hand rule about the nadir vector Azimuth Rate The time rate of change of the azimuth angle usually expressed in degrees per second or radians per second Azimuthal Equidistant A Map projection type that is mathematically based on a planet tangent to the Earth Spacing of the parallels is uniform B1950 Standard epoch defined as the beginning of the Besselian year 1950 when the longitude of the mean Sun is 280 0 measured from the mean equinox and corresponds to 31 December 1949 22 09 07 2 or JD 2433282 423 Basic Properties Properties menu Properties menu option for each object in STK including a scenario Basic Properties of an object define the object s parameters and special features Boresight The electromagnetic axis of an antenna that defines the direction in which the antenna is pointing Browser Window Displays the classes and instances of all objects within the STK application It enables you to control the information being displayed At the top of the window are four pull down menus Files Properties Tools and Help In the lower portion of the window is a group of icons representing each of the object classes available in STK Satellite Tool KitO Cartesian Elements Specify an orbit by three position elements and three velocity elements in a rectangular coordinate system Check Box Allows the user to flip between two opposite conditions When a check box displays a check mark the opti
251. hange the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue Constraints Basic The fields in this tab allow you to impose standard constraints for the sensor With the exception of the Field of View constraint the definitions of all constraints on this tab should be taken from the parent object of the sensor Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 21 Sensors Constraints Sun With the exception of the Solar and Lunar Exclusion Angles the definitions of all constraints on this tab should be taken from the parent object of the sensor 12 22 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors Basic Sun Temporal Advanced Resolution Sun Elevation Angle Sun Gnd Elev Angle Lunar Elevation Angle F Min 0 0000 deg F Min 5 0000 deg F Min 00000 deg F Max 90 0000 deg F Max so c000 deg FW Max 50 000 deg F Solar Exclusion Angle 0 0000 deg F Lunar Exclusion Angle 0 0000 deg F Lighting Direct Sun d Solar Lunar Obstruction OK Apply Cancel Help Abbreviations in the Contraints apply to column are as follows F facility T target V all vehicles S satellite M missile L launch vehicle G ground vehicle A aircraft B ship N sensor P planet star R area target Note Table 12 6 Sensor Sun constraints Fields Description Constraint App
252. he Map Window To import a background image that currently isn t displayed in the Available Images list use the Add button Figure 3 2 Map window with texture background Tutorial Earth View 1 Lon 179 42 To return to the default map display highlight the background image file entitled None and click OK Text Annotation The Text Annotation tab allows you to specify text to display in the Map window at a specified latitude and longitude and or at a specific X Y coordinate Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 3 15 The Map Window Earth View 1 Map Properties Attributes Details Projection images Text Annotation Resolution Text Lon Y Coordinate Edit Mode Add New Item Change Current Item Insert Item Delete Item Color green o E Text My Tutorial Position x v 180 000 60 000 OK Apply Cancel Help Adding and Deleting a Text Annotation To add new text to the Map window select Add New Item in the Edit Mode field then choose a position for the text to appear on the Map You can also set the position of the text directly from the Map window by clicking at the point in the Map window where you wish to place the text Table 3 6 Text annotation position options Option Description XY The 0 0 point for X Y is the center of the Map therefore X values must be between 180 and 180 and Y values must be b
253. he Terrain tab of the scenario s Basic Properties window Geodetic Position If you select Geodetic the following fields are available Table 9 1 Geodetic facility target options Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The geodetic latitude of a point is the angle between the normal to the reference ellipsoid and the equatorial plane Longitude Measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 The longitude of a point is the angle between the projection of the position vector in the equatorial plane and the prime meridian It is measured as increasing in a counterclockwise sense when viewed from the north pole Attitude Specified as distance above or below the reference ellipsoid Altitude is measured along the normal to the surface of the ellipsoid Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 3 Facilities amp Targets Spherical Position If you select Spherical the following fields are available Table 9 2 Spherical facility target options Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The spherical latitude is the angle of the position vector above the equatorial plane Measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 The longitude of a point is the angle between the projection of the position vector in the equatorial plane and the prime meridian It is measured as increasing in a counterclockwise sense when viewed from the north Longitude pole Rad
254. he center of the plot as the origin of the vehicle nadir vector and 0 of the polar plot to be in the direction of the vehicle X axis vehicle velocity direction Refer to Figure B 2 o O c ___ lt lt Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 3 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns Figure B 2 Polar coordinate paper showing the sensor coordinates 315 0 ffs a SS O CA Pa d PASE du 270 0 150 125 hool 75 so T T fa pen the alm ly IW oh EE bow 225 0 3 The radius values for the polar coordinates describing the custom sensor pattern are obtained by projecting the sweep angles and p onto the reference plane To do this assign an arbitrary fixed distance of the reference plane from the vehicle In this example a value of 100 is used Some trigonometry is used to calculate the radius values from Q and p To calculate r use the following equation e tan 6 SN ljacen B 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Defining Custom Sensor Patterns where Opposite equals r or the length of the line from the vehicle nadir vector to the sensor pattern edge in the reference plane and Adjacent equals the reference plane distance For this example the reference distance is 100 units Your calculations would be a 40 p 50 tan 40 r tan 50 s 100 100 r tan 40 x100 r tan 50 x 100 r 8391 r 119175 4 Once you have projected the sen
255. he complement of this angle horizontal The angle in the satellite local horizontal plane between the projection of the inertial velocity vector onto this plane and the local north direction measured as positive in the clockwise direction The magnitude of the inertial velocity vector Spherical Coordinate Type Advanced Analysis Module Spherical elements allow you to define the Raan 139 7291 deg Declination 0 0000 deg Radius 3667 7646000 nm path of an orbit using polar rather than EAR ee a rectangular coordinates Azimuth 351 5000 deg Velocity 4 0278773845 nm sec Table 6 4 Spherical elements Option Right Ascension of the Ascending Node RAAN inertial Longitude fixed Satellite Tool Kit User s M Description RAAN is defined as the angle from the X axis to the projection of the satellite position vector in the equatorial plane measured as positive in the direction of the Y axis anual 6 11 PRO Advanced Analysis Satellites Option Description Declination inertial Declination is defined as the angle between the satellite Latitude fixed position vector and the inertial equatorial plane measured as positive toward the positive inertial Z axis Radius The magnitude of the satellite position vector Flight Path Angle The angle between the velocity vector and the radius vector vertical or the complement of this angle horizontal Azimuth The angle in the satellite
256. he direction of the normal to the orbit plane The Constraint Offset angle is used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 The satellite s X axis is aligned with the Sun direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of nadir The Alignment Offset angle is used to modify the body fixed alignment vector This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis e g to align with the Y axis set the offset to 90 The satellite s X axis is aligned with the Sun direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of the normal to the ecliptic plane The Alignment Offset angle is used to modify the body fixed alignment vector This angle is measured from the X axis direction in a right handed direction about the Z axis e g to align with the Y axis set the offset to 90 6 31 Satellites Attitude Type Sun alignment with ECI Z axis constraint Sun alignment Occultation Normal constraint ECI velocity alignment with nadir constraint ECF velocity alignment with radial constraint Yaw to Nadir Description The satellite s X axis is aligned with the Sun direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of the ECI Z axis The Alignment Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed alignment vector
257. he display of tool bars on the right hand side and bottom of the Map window If ON the status bar displays at the bottom of the map window The status bar displays the position of the cursor in the Map window in latitude longitude animation running time and associated information If ON terrain regions are clearly marked in the Map window e 1 You can t animate a scenario if the tool bar option is turned OFF Map Details The Map Details tab allows you to select the type and resolution of details displayed in the Map window Typically these options aren t used when you choose a textured Map display STK is shipped with a number of map details including Relational World Data Bank II RWDBII maps RWDBII maps originally used by the CIA are now publicly available maps known for their accuracy Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual The Map Window Earth View 1 Map Properties Attributes Details Projection images Text Annotation Resolution Lat Lon Lines Show Lat Spacing J 30 000 deg J Lon Spacing Riv Rectangles Color black Background Image None mi Advanced Color white OK Apply Cancel Help Table 3 3 Options for Map details Option Description Items Select the details you wish to display Lat Lon Lines IF ON you can specify the spacing between latitude lines By default spacing between longitude lines is the same as t
258. he list Adding Terrain Elevation Data Use the Add button to select terrain elevation data from a CD ROM or another location for inclusion in the search list Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 13 Scenarios Type MUSE 4 Location N A El SW Corner N A NE Corner N A Resolution N A su Once you specify the file to be used general terrain information appears in the lower portion of the window so that you can verify that the file is the one you wish to use Use the Location field to specify the directory and file name of the terrain file Once you ve selected the file click OK to add the data to the search list Graphics Properties Global Attributes The Global Attributes tab allows you to set certain options globally so that all objects within the scenario inherit the attributes 5 14 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Scenarios Tutorial Graphics Properties Global Attributes Sun Lighting m Inherited Flags JE Show Labels IE Show Orbits JE Show Ground Tracks J Show Sensors 4 Show Pass Labels 4 Show Turn Markers Show El Set Number Map Display Options J Blink Object on Select OK Apply Cancel Help Fields available in the Global Attributes tab are described in the table following Table 5 5 Global attributes Option Description Show Labels If ON objects display in the Map window with text labels Show Ground If ON vehicle gr
259. he new Latitude Longitude values display in the fields of the Map Projection tab This feature is available even if your map is zoomed The Latitude field isn t available for Equidistant Cylindrical Mercator Miller Mollweide Sinusoidal or Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 3 13 The Map Window Hammer Aitoff Projections The Altitude field is only applicable if you choose a Perspective Projection Map Background The Background tab allows you to specify the background image to display in the Map window Earth View 1 Map Properties Attributes Details Projection images Text Annotation Resolution Image Show North Lat South Lat East Lon west Lon Add EE Al ivi rj Show No 4 0 0000 deg 0 0000 deg 0 0000 deg 0 0000 deg OK Apply Cancel Help STK ships with several background image files You can also supply your own files to display in the Map window if for instance you wish to display your company name and logo as the background for the Map window The image must be an XPM file for UNIX Select the image you wish to display in the Available Images list then use the right arrow to copy the image to the Displayed Images list Once there you can change the display size and location of the image using the North and South Lat and East and West Lon fields LeHors Arnaud XPM Manual version 3 4c Bull Research 1989 94 May 27 1994 3 14 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual T
260. he spacing between latitude lines If you wish to change the default turn the Lon Lines option ON and enter the spacing desired Spacing for both latitude and longitude lines can be set as small as 0 001 Background Select the image you wish to view in the Image field or the background color of the Map in the Color field If you set very small latitude longitude line spacing in the Map window performance may decrease unless only a small portion of the central body is visible in the Map window For printing purposes try printing with a white background color and dark black brown etc lat lon line colors Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 3 7 PRO Hi Res Maps The Map Window Advanced Details Use the Advanced button to fine tune the map display by controlling the display and color of specific map details Coastlines No Major_Ice_Shelves No green Minor_Ice_Shelves No green RWDB2_International_ Borders Yes DarkTurquoise Demarcated_or Delimited No green Indefinite_or_Disputed No green Lines of separation on lanNo green rj Select All Unselect All Display Yes m Color DarkTurquoise 4 OK Cancel Help Select the category of interest then specify whether the level of detail selected should be displayed in the Map window If the Display option is set to Yes specify the Color in which the details should be displayed Details in a specific category such as international borders can be de
261. herefore the vehicle isn t in sunlight at all Show Sunlight If ON the Map window displays the dividing line between Penumbra Line at sunlight and penumbra Vehicle Altitude Show Penumbra If ON the Map window displays the dividing line between Umbra Line at Vehicle penumbra and umbra Attitude 13 12 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Viewing the AER Report To view lighting conditions in terms of AER use the AER button The report shows azimuth elevation and range data for the Sun relative to the object selected Values are computed based on the local coordinate system of the vehicle To learn more about the commands available in the AER Report window refer to the Reports section in Chapter 15 of this manual Figure 13 6 A sample AER Report showing lighting data for the Shuttle Report Shuttle Solar AER Files Edit 24 Feb 1997 12 52 23 Vehicle Shuttle ECIVVLH Solar AER Elevation deg Range nm 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 183 351 E 80172886 790818 1 Nov 1997 00 01 00 00 183 063 E 80173024 532717 1 Nov 1997 00 02 00 00 182 832 E 80173175 411308 1 Nov 1997 00 03 00 00 182 645 80173338 651621 1 Nov 1997 00 04 00 00 182 492 5 80173513 420792 1 Nov 1997 00 05 00 00 182 365 80173698 831955 1 Nov 1997 00 06 00 00 182 261 E 80173893 948391 1 Nov 1997 00 07 00 00 182 174 E 80174097 787959 1 Nov 1997 00 08 00 00 182 104 80174309 327634 1 Nov 1997 00 09 00 00 182
262. ical Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual C 33 Importing Files into STK Other SCF SSC USAF END Network stkFacility gd File This is the generic database file It contains information concerning the last update of the database This file is used by the online update option to determine which records to supply This file is in a basic STK data file format Listing C 14 Example of stkFacility gd file BEGIN DatabaseUpdate Version 1 0 LastUpdate 19970405 END DatabaseUpdate Star Database The Star Database is comprised of a total of four files You can create your own Star Database by following the format expected required by STK For example the stkStarDb database the database shipped with STK includes the following files Table C13 stkStarDb database files File Contents stkStarDb bd Main database file stkStarDb bn Common Names stkStarDb bc Constellation Names stkStarDb gd Latest update information C34 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK The first two files contains fixed width fields where one row represents a single entry The remaining files are in the standard STK database file format File formats for the star database are described in the subsections following stkStarDb bd File This is the main Star Database file The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C14 stkStarDb cd file description Column Description 0 3 Harvard Rev
263. ighest elevation Minimum and maximum acceptable durations for computed accesses If accesses whose durations are outside these limits are computed they are discarded from the resultant list Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 17 Facilities amp Targets NOTES 9 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 10 AREA TARGETS Overview In some instances you may need to define a target in terms of a geographical PRO i AX Advanced you with this ability through the use of area targets which are defined Analysis area instead of a specific point location on the Earth s surface STK provides separately from targets Chapter Contents Basic Properties Boulhielalty ect tenete Loretta tr 10 2 ASE A e 10 3 CA 104 SPMENCAMPOSIMON scsi ibid i 10 4 Cartesian POSION rm 10 5 Cylindrical POSON seanina a aa aa 10 5 GEOCENING POSION icon a cdi 10 5 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 10 1 Area Target Graphics Properties Attributes ssssssss mem 10 6 GOMSTAINUS sc o M 10 7 Constraints Temporal evisos airis cintas 10 9 Basic Properties Boundary The Boundary tab is used to define the area target s perimeter Boundary Centroid Description Latitude Longitude Edit Mode Points 784399 77 6126 2 Add New Point 77 7679 71 1578 74 5279 69 0714 w Change Current Point 71 6591 69 1366 70 0291 71 9051 76 3086 Insert Point 754407 79 9598 Delete Po
264. ile until you save either the sensor itself or the owner of the sensor i e the facility target or vehicle to which the sensor is attached For example you can attach the same sensor to multiple vehicles within a given scenario and make changes to individual sensors so that they exhibit different characteristics during animation If you save the entire scenario the properties of the last sensor saved define and overwrite the properties of any like named versions of that sensor Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 1 Sensors Chapter Contents Basic Properties Definition sss 122 GOMIGSEMSOF Tiaiset 12 3 lali POVWBI SEAS eee eene ree atada 124 CUSLOMTVSEMSOM OS 12 6 Rectangular SENSO utili EC E ttes 12 8 Basic Properties Pointing a SENSO 00 ee eect tienen 12 9 Fixed Sensor PON asc eas ie tte dte D es Ah Ada 12 10 TADA ANO ii odo rettet ee OS 12 13 ExtermalPolrting PIGS 0 oct et Ho a E 12 16 Basic Properties ResolUtiOnl suoi toc op Leo pete e iod pee qot ue Jared 12 16 Graphics Properties Sensor Attributes sssss 12 17 Graphics Properties Projection sssssssss no nono nono nino 12 18 Graphics Properties Display Times 12 20 Constraints Basi ceterae t d e E OR be e dedo 12 21 GORSU CAIRNS SUIT A oe cad cece te AR Al oat Ea tad LL LCS wet E 12 22 Constraints Termporal tesla eoe tt ees rere tener trt enint 12 24 Constraints
265. in a scenario Using Multiple Windows To better control and organize the various tasks you perform in STK the Windows menu lists each of the windows whether Map or property that are open during an STK session You can select the window of interest to bring it to the front This is especially useful if the scenario includes multiple Map windows and you have a number of object property windows open In addition you can toggle between allowing only one instance of the same window to be open at any one given time or allowing multiple copies of the same window to be open simultaneously Using STK Tools You can use specialized STK tools to perform analyses tasks and assist you in defining and displaying accesses lighting conditions vehicle swaths and Walker constellations Tools are also available for creating standard and Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 17 User Interface customized reports viewing report data in graph form to better analyze data easily importing known satellites with user friendly search parameters removing accesses and restoring the Map window STK tools are discussed in detail in Chapters 13 through 16 of this manual Using Help STK features detailed Help that can assist you in completing tasks by displaying on line instructions You can display general Help in the Browser window or task specific Help in individual Property windows An overview of the Help system is provided in Chapter 17 of
266. in the background storing the results in data files for later evaluation Lastly databases of facilities cities and stars are provided High Precision Orbit Propagator HPOP A state of the art orbit generator that can generate orbits for a wide variety of Earth satellites It can handle circular elliptical parabolic and hyperbolic orbits at distances ranging from the surface of the Earth to the orbit of the Moon and beyond The HPOP includes modern high fidelity models for all of the major perturbations affecting an Earth satellite Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 11 PRO HPOP Introduction Joint Gravity Model GM 2 an advanced 70x70 spherical harmonic expansion offering the highest accuracy currently available in an unclassified Earth potential model Lunar solar point mass gravitational effects using the U S Naval Observatory Compressed Ephemeris to predict the positions of the Sun and Moon This ephemeris is accurate to within 0 03 arc second Atmospheric drag using the Harris Priester atmosphere model modified to take into account the diurnal bulge and the variation in the Sun s extreme ultraviolet flux to compute the atmosphere density The drag model assumes single collision specular reflection which is appropriate for most satellites Departures from this can be modeled by changing the area to mass ratio of the satellite Solar radiation pressure which assumes that the satellite is either a mirror
267. indow appears The following fields appear in the window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 5 Using the STK Help Menu Table 17 2 Request for licenses via e mail fax Field Description Registrant s Enter your name and other information AGI needs an e mail Information address or FAX number to return your passwords Also indicate how you heard about STK 4 0 by selecting the appropriate option Company Enter your company name and other information about your Information company Computer The Host ID for your computer automatically appears in the Information Host ID you don t need to provide this data Indicate the Platform on which you ll be running STK in the Platform field When you finish click OK to generate a text file that can be e mailed or FAXed to AGI Entering Licenses Use the Enter Passwords option in the Password window or select Licenses from the Help menu in the STK Browser window to open a Licenses window 17 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Using the STK Help Menu Licenses Host ID Type Update Passwords 830c9718 Demo v Load from File y Permanent 4 Enter Manually m Product Passwords Product Password Host ID Exp Date A STKv4 0 00000000 680c3718 Update Load Network Passwords Export Passwords to File For More Information Analytical Graphics Inc Voice 1 610 337 3055 Technical Support support amp s
268. ing effects apogee altitude decreases while perigee altitude remains nearly constant the argument of perigee moves around the orbit plane to the point of minimum atmospheric density The satellite may be thought of as rotating its apse line and adjusting its eccentricity so as to extend its life as long as possible Figure 13 9 Sample Lifetime graph showing the evolution of the orbital parameters height of apogee height of perigee and inclination Graph TLE Lifetime Files Edit Satellite TLE 3 Jun 1997 15 56 31 56 124 56 123 56 122 56 121 56 120 56 119 56 116 56 117 1 Jun 1991 00 00 01 00 4 Apr 1992 14 33 51 00 7 Feb 1993 05 07 40 00 Time UTCG Height of Apogee km Height of Perigee km inclination deg FR Clicked At X A el Restore r Nearest Point X 13 22 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools Swath Advanced Analysis Module Most satellites aircraft and other vehicles have on board sensors for observing or collecting data from areas on the Earth or equipment to communicate to and from points on the ground or other vehicles To assist in the analysis of these sensor vehicle systems STK provides the ability to draw lines on the Map that delineate the visible areas for the system or conversely the points on the ground from which the vehicle can be seen Vehicle Swath The vehicle swath di
269. int 71 9851 deg 76 3086 de OK my Cancel Help e If you dont specify a boundary with at least three points the area target is not defined Warning E You can specify the position of perimeter points by entering the appropriate values in the fields of this tab or by clicking on the point at which you wish to locate the object in the Map window If you define the area target by clicking in the Map window make sure that you click OK or Apply in the Boundary tab to confirm the constructed boundary To position the area target using the fields in the Boundary tab enter latitude and longitude for each defining point in the boundary then use the Insert Point button Repeat the procedure for the other perimeter latitude longitude values 10 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Area Target Use the Change Current Point option and the Modify Point button to modify an existing point in the list Use the Delete Point button to remove a point from the Boundary list Basic Properties Centroid The fields available in the Centroid tab allow you to set the area targets centroid position Boundary Centroid Description Position Type Geodetic Auto Compute Centroid Latitude 74 3188 deg Longitude 73 1584 deg JE Local Time offset from GMT 18000 0000 s Altitude 0 0000000 nm OK my Cancel Help The fields available in the Centroid tab depend on the Position Type you
270. into the facility s Long Description field Facility ID e X geocentric m e Classification Range units Azimuth limit 1 deg e Maximum range km 14 22 Astronomical latitude Y geocentric m Location Elevation limit 1 deg Azimuth limit 2 deg Time step Astronomical longitude Z geocentric m IOB type Elevation limit 2 deg Minimum range km MaxRF Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 5 REPORTS amp GRAPHS Overview The Report and Graph tools in STK summarize static data They are available for most objects and are helpful in presenting and visualizing relationships among data elements You can also include the data from one or more objects in a report or graph These tools are useful for high level presentations of complex information Chapter Contents Using the STK Report Graph Tool ssss 152 Changing Time Periods for Reports amp Graphs sss 15 3 Managing Report Graph Styles sssssssssseee 154 REPO Maso 15 5 REPO PrODEFtles t o bre enfer tette pedet inet 15 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 1 Reports amp Graphs Comte P ah tae Rok a oe ar tel Eso dba ara et 15 7 A det e e t o iet 15 11 CiraphiwWmdoNW sss aside e onec A 15 12 Graph Properties pd mte p itte Lr eb b he 15 15 Sola DEEE tt oa tn e meo er fo EO TO ad tA ua 15 15 LAYOUT 15 17 Using the STK Report Graph Tool Th
271. ion the Number of Planes field and Number of Satellites per Plane field shows the plane number and satellite number for the selected child satellite For instance if you defined a Walker constellation as having 2 Planes 2 Satellites per Plane an Interplane Spacing of 1 and a RAAN Spread of 360 the Map window would look similar to the one following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 27 DA Warning Using STK Tools Figure 13 10 The Map window showing a Walker seed satellite and its children two planes each with two satellites PCOS aaa EIS a Ca 2175 155 Lon 163 85 Vehicle11 Time 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Paused The next figure more clearly shows the configuration and spacing of the satellites Figure 13 11 Walker Constellation clearly illustrating the satellite configuration M e Se a E e icle21 mo ja Agrsfiiclel2 i t a ai TL s NG 1 A Ps X e A P4 x E X yd f A r M ES f P dd d d N a NY 13 28 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual Using STK Tools The table following describes the spacing between satellites in more detail Table 13 8 Satellite spacing for sample Walker satellites RAAN Argument of Perigee Satellites True Anomaly Seed Satellite Satellite1 1 Satellite 1 2 Satellite 1 Satellite22 Remove Accesses You can remove ac
272. ion isn t available if the STK application is selected Use this option to specify and display the constraints of an object This option isn t available if the STK application a scenario or a star or planet class is selected The Property Windows Property windows are divided into tabs and are used to display and specify the properties of objects Using the Property windows you can display the status of particular conditions and enter specifications All Property windows can be resized as needed to accommodate the data being displayed Any number of Property windows can be open at one time All Property windows contain four control buttons described below 2 16 Apply Applies settings and closes window Applies settings but leaves window open Closes window without applying settings Displays an on line help window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Describing an Object in STK When you create a scenario or any other object you may want to record ancillary information for future reference The Description tab of the Basic Properties window allows you to create a short and or long description of the object to be saved with the object The Short Description field is limited to one line of text and the Long Description field is limited to 511 characters including spaces and punctuation The Description tab exists as a basic property of the scenario and all objects that can be contained
273. ion of the Map window in STK including Map properties animating a scenario and other options that affect the graphical display of the scenario Chapter 4 The STK Application Chapter 4 provides instructions for defining basic properties at the application level and for setting IPC and online preferences Chapter 5 Scenarios Chapter 5 explains the concept of the scenario as both an object and a collection point for all other objects It also provides instructions for setting the basic and graphic properties of the scenario Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 3 Introduction Chapter 6 Satellites Chapter 6 is the first of three chapters devoted to different types of vehicles available in STK It includes instructions for creating and defining satellites The chapter also provides instructions for setting the satellite s basic and graphic properties as well as setting satellite constraints Chapter 7 Aircraft Ground Vehicles amp Ships Chapter 7 is the second of three chapters devoted to different types of vehicles available in STK It includes instructions for creating and defining aircraft ground vehicles and ships using the great arc propagator or an external file Chapter 8 Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Chapter 8 the last of three chapters that addresses vehicles in STK It provides instructions for creating and maintaining launch vehicles using the simple ascent propagator or missiles using the ballistic
274. ional details not fully explained in the current release of the STK User s Manual STK Release Notes are available in hard copy and PDF format Internet Sources For up to date answers and information about AGI and its products visit our web site at www stk com For general information about AGI and our products send e mail to info stk com You can also request on line help at support stk com and download notes models and other useful information at ftp stk com AGI s In View AGI s In View newsletter includes answers to frequently asked questions and provides tips on how to perform various analyses The Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 17 Introduction newsletter is published three times a year You can also send e mail for the In View newsletter to inview Ostk com Other STK Modules User manuals for several STK add on modules are available separately they contain detailed instructions and short tutorials Manuals are available for 6 Comm o Coverage 9 Interprocess Communications I PC modules 6 Precision Orbit Determination System PODS 0 Generic Resource Events amp Activity Scheduler GREAS o Missile Flight Tool MFT o Navigatorr o andmore 1 18 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual USER INTERFACE Overview New users and experienced satellite systems analysts will find that STK s user interface makes it easy to perform simple and complicated analysis tasks The
275. ir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 This attitude profile is commonly used for aircraft and surface based vehicles The ECF velocity alignment with radial constraint profile is most appropriate for surface vehicles and aircraft Small animation time steps may be needed to properly visualize satellites with spinning attitude profiles External Attitude File You can use external attitude data by entering an attitude file containing quaternions Turn the Attitude File option ON and specify the attitude file to use If ON the file overrides the default attitude profile during the time span of the quaternions contained in the file The external attitude file format is descried in Appendix C of this manual Graphics Properties Attributes The Attributes tab allows you to specify several aspects used to represent the aircraft ground vehicle or ship in the Map window 7 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Color MediumOrchid 4 J Inherit Settings Line Style Solid 24 F Show Label JE Show Ground Track Line Width 1 Z4 4 Show Turn Markers Marker Style Xo a CruiseShip Graphics Properties Attributes Display Times OK Apply Cancel Help T
276. ised Number 4 24 Currently not used by STK 25 30 I6 Henry Draper Number 31 36 mp 3 SAO Catalog Number 3740 5 Fundamental Catalog Number 41 74 Currently not used by STK 75 94 Right Ascension J2000 hhmmss sss 85 94 Declination J2000 ddmmss ss 95 107 Currently not used by STK 108 112 Visual magnitude UBV system 113 161 Currently not used by STK 162 168 Proper Motion Right Ascension J2000 169 174 l6 Proper Motion Declination J2000 175 Currently not used by STK 176 180 Parallax 181 230 Currently not used by STK Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C35 Importing Files into STK Column Description 231 250 Constellation Name 251 253 These are record terminators stkStarDb bn File This is the common name file There can be multiple rows for a single star The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C15 stkStarDb bn file description Column Description 0 3 Harvard Revised Number 4 16 Currently not used by STK 17 36 Common Name 37 39 These are record terminators stkStarDb bc File This is the constellation file It contains a list of all the valid star constellations This file is used to build the list of constellations available in the user interface If this file isn t available STK is unable to search for constellations of stars The file is in a basic STK Data File format Listing C15 Example of stkStarDb bc file BEGIN Constellation Andromeda Antlia Ap
277. isplay For example a sensor with Minimum Maximum Altitude settings of 500 km and 100 km and a Step Count of 3 would display projections at altitude of 500 km 750 km and 1000 km Persistence is the length of time the sensor s footprint remains visible on the Map during animation It is used to display sensor footprints for a specified period of time so that you can quickly and easily determine whether coverage requirements are being met Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 19 e 1r A 51 Hint Note Sensors In some cases you may wish sensor projection graphics to display at the altitude of a different object To do this turn the Track at Altitude option ON select the object of interest from the Available Objects list and use the right arrow to copy it to the Assigned Object field Only one object can be selected for the Assigned Object Graphics Properties Display Times The fields in this tab allow you to control the display of sensor graphics in the Map window Atributos Projection Display Times Display Status Use Intervals 4 Stop ct 1997 23 59 59 00 1 Nov 1997 03 59 59 00 A Remove Add change 31 Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 1 Nov 1997 03 59 59 00 Deconfict None 4 OK Apply Cancel Help Sensor graphics can be displayed or removed from the Map window based on time intervals specified here Choose among Use Intervals Always On or
278. ital plane sweeps out a cone shaped surface in space with a semi vertex angle equal to the inclination i As the orbit precesses the line of intersection of the equator and the orbital plane the line of nodes rotates westward for a posigrade orbit and eastward for a retrograde orbit Object An STK component capable of being manipulated In STK objects are scenarios vehicles facilities targets area targets stars planets and sensors Open Files menu Insert a previously saved scenario into the current STK session Only one scenario can be open at any given time Satellite Tool KitO Options Menu These menus allow the user to select one and only one item from a list that appears when you click and hold the associated menu button Orbit The gravitationally bound path followed by an object around a celestial body Orbital Elements The set of parameters that describe the size shape and orientation of an orbit in inertial space Orthographic Projection is geometrically based on a plane tangent to the Earth The point of projection is at infinity Directions from the center of the map projection are true Osculating Orbit The orbit along which a satellite would move if all perturbing accelerations were removed at a particular time At that time or Epoch the osculating and true orbits are in contact It is the osculating orbit not the true perturbed orbit for which the Keplerian elements are used Para
279. ite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases m Processing Option w Update Database Obtain Archived Database m Database Selection w All Databases 4 Specific Database stkSatDb sd Database Directory stk2 v3group STKData Database Archive Date 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Options available for online update are described in the table following Table 14 7 Online Satellite Database update options Field Description Update Option Choose either Update Database Obtain the latest satellite database information available Obtain Archived Database Obtain an older version of the database from the date specified in the Archive Date field If an update isn t available from the specified date STK displays a message indicating the date of the closest archived database available and an option to use that file Update Database Choose either All Databases Update all Satellite Databases available Specific Database Update only the database specified Database Directory Specify the directory in which the database files are contained Archive Date Specify the date of the archived database you wish to obtain Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 13 PRO Advanced Analysis City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases When you finish use the Go Online button to immediately begin downloading the latest information Object Descriptio
280. ius Distance of the object from the center of the Earth Cartesian Position If you select Cartesian the following fields are available Table 9 3 Cartesian facility target options Field Description X The X component of the object s position vector where the X axis crosses 0 0 latitude longitude Y The Y component of the object s position vector Z The Z component of the object s position vector where the Z axis points to the North pole 9 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities amp Targets Cylindrical Position If you select Cylindrical the following fields are available Table 9 4 Cylindrical facility target options Field Description R Enter the polar radius where R y Xey Longitude Enter the longitude measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 The longitude of a point is the angle between the projection of the position vector in the equatorial plane and the prime meridian It is measured as increasing in a counterclockwise sense when viewed from the north pole Z Enter the Z component of the object s position vector Geocentric Position If you select Geocentric the following fields are available Table 9 5 Geocentric facility target options Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The geocentric latitude of a point is the spherical latitude of the subpoint on the surface of the central body Longitude Measured in degrees from 360 0 to
281. ivided by the speed of light Line of Sight If ON access to the facility or target is F TV P constrained to a line of sight above the local horizon The default for this setting is ON Az El Mask If ON access to the object is constrained by F T V P azimuth dependent terrain masking The terrain mask used can come from terrain or a custom Az El Mask as defined in the basic properties of the facility or target The Line of Sight constraint should be turned OFF when the Az El Mask constraint is used to allow for az el masks containing negative elevation angles Constraints Sun The fields in the Sun tab allow you to impose constraints based on the positions of the Sun and Moon Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 13 Facilities Targets Basic Sun Temporal Sun Elevation Angle Sun Gnd Elev Angle F Min 0 0000 deg FT Max 930 0000 deg Lunar Elevation Angle F Min 0 0000 deg FT Max 90 0000 deg F Solar Exclusion Angle 0 0000 deg F Lunar Exclusion Angle 0 0000 deg F Lighting Direct Sun d Solar Lunar Obstruction OK apply Cancel Help Table 9 9 Facility target Sun constraints Fields Sun Elevation Angle Sun Gnd Elev Angle 9 14 Description Constraints apply to Elevation angle to the apparent position of the All Sun Measured with respect to the facility or target as the angle between the local horizon
282. l attitude data by entering an attitude file containing quaternions Turn the Attitude File option ON and specify the attitude file to use If ON the file overrides the default attitude profile during the time span of the quaternions contained in the file The external attitude file format is described in Appendix C of this manual Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 33 Satellites Orientation Type Use the Orientation Type option only available for certain attitude types to select different sets of parameters for relating satellite body fixed axes and the inertial coordinate system Table 6 16 Orientation types If you select You specify YPR Angles Roll pitch and yaw angles These angles are about the J2000 ECI inertial X Y and Z axes respectively Once you specify the YPR angles you also need to specify the rotation sequence Euler Angles Euler A Euler B and Euler C angles Once you specify the Euler angles you also need to specify the rotation sequence The numbers 1 2 and 3 correspond to rotations about the current X Y and Z axes respectively The common Euler sequence of a rotation about the Z axis followed by a rotation about the new X axis followed by a rotation about the new Z axis is specified as a 313 sequence Quaternions Specify the components of a quaternion The first three fields provide the vector part of the quaternion and the fourth field is the scalar part This quaternion represents the t
283. le Dynamic Display Properties v You can create a report that contains data for two or more object classes e g facility and 1 E vehicle t Hint Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 16 5 tv E 4 Hi nt Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts In the STK Dynamic Display Tool window you can define the contents and format of the modified or new dynamic display style Select the style in the list and use the Properties button Content The Content tab allows you to select the data elements to be included in your dynamic display Dynamic Display Properties Solar AER Content _ amp Lighting AER a Display It ek Solar Intensity ee Time Lighting AER Azimuth Lighting amp ER Elevation Lighting amp ER Range OK apply Cancel Help Use the right arrow button to assign the element s you wish to include in the report to the Display Items list Use the Up and Down arrows to change the position of the items in the Display Items list Use the left arrow to remove an item from the Display Items list You can also change the units of measure for a display item using the Units button You can double click an item in the Elements list to copy it to the Display Items list You can also double click an item in the Display Items list to remove it from the list 16 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Option The Optio
284. le at the insertion point with the user specified velocity Table 8 1 Simple Ascent propagator elements Elements Description Launch Location Select one of the following two combinations ust elds e Launch Geodetic Latitude Launch Longitude and Launch Altitude e Launch Geocentric Latitude Launch Longitude Launch Radius STK links these elements in such a way that switching one of them from geodetic to geocentric or vice versa changes the other correspondingly Longitude is not differentiated along geodetic geocentric lines Burnout Velocity Specify the burnout velocity in the units selected at the scenario 4 field level Burnout Location These elements are linked and only two combinations are valid last 3 field last 3 fields Impact LatitudeGeodetic Impact Longitude Impact Altitude Impact Latitude Geocentric Impact Longitude Impact Radius Impact Latitude can be geodetic or geocentric but need not agree in this respect with Launch Latitude Ballistic Propagator Missiles The Ballistic Propagator defines vehicles following an elliptical path that begins and ends at the Earth s surface The shape of the trajectory can be further refined by specifying a fixed flight time initial velocity or altitude Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 8 3 Launch Vehicles Missiles Trajectory attitude Atmosphere Description Start Time 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 Step Size 60 000 sec S
285. le factor for the density calculations MSGP4 Propagator The Merged Simplified General Perturbations MSGP4 propagator standard NORAD propagator is used with two line mean element TLE sets It considers secular and periodic variations due to Earth oblateness solar and lunar gravitational effects gravitational resonance effects and orbital decay using an atmospheric drag model ore attitude Pass Break Mass Description Start Time 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 Step Size 60 000 sec Stop Tine 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 Propagator MSGP4 E 55C Number 19883 Right Ascension 96 6407 deg Orbit Epoch 3713435983034 Mean Anomaly erataiedeg Mean Motion Revs Day oozes Mean Motion Dot o00000274 Eccentricity 00005860 Motion Dot Dot o o000e 00 Inclination 05416 deg BStar roone 04 Argument of Perigee 219 8873 deg TLE Options Load Advanced OK apply Cancel Help The term merged refers to the fact that the algorithm used for orbits with Periods below approximately 225 minutes is the Simplified General Perturbations SGP4 propagator and for higher orbits the algorithm used is the Simplified Deep Space General Perturbations SDP4 propagator Note 6 22 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites For information on SDP4 and SGP4 propagators you can obtain a copy of Space Track Report 3
286. lic orbits and collision orbits The Keplerian element Q right ascension of ascending node is undefined when the inclination is 0 and is numerically unstable for inclination near 0 As the inclination approaches zero the line of nodes becomes indeterminate The Keplerian element argument of perigee becomes singular when the eccentricity is zero As eccentricity approaches zero the line of apsides becomes indeterminate The Air Force Satellite Control Network AFSCN typically solves for the equinoctial elements during the orbit estimation process 6 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Note Satellites Table 6 2 Equinoctial coordinate type elements Option Description Semimajor Axis Half the length of the major axis of the orbital ellipse h k p q h k collectively describe the shape of the satellite s orbit and the position of perigee p q collectively describe the orientation of the satellite s orbit plane Mean Longitude Specifies a satellite s position within its orbit at epoch and equals the sum of the classical Right Ascension of the Ascending Node Argument of Perigee and Mean Anomaly Direction Choose either Retrograde where inclination is greater than 90 e Posigrade where inclination is between 0 and 90 inclusive Delaunay Variables Coordinate Type Advanced Analysis Module T Advanced Analysis Delaunay variables are a set of canonical ammay ooo deg angle action variable
287. lict 6 38 6 45 7 9 8 10 9 10 12 16 12 21 Default Connection Settings 44 Definition Planets 1 1 3 Sensors 12 2 Stars 112 Delaunay Variables Coordinate Type 6 9 Delete Point 7 4 Density Weighting Factor 6 22 Description Tabb 2 17 Aircraft 2 17 Area Targets 2 17 City Database 14 5 Facilities 2 1 7 Facility Database 14 8 Facility TIE 14 22 Ground Vehicles 2 17 Launch Vehicles 2 17 Missiles 2 1 7 Satellite Database 14 14 Satellite TLE 14 22 Satellites 2 17 Ships 2 17 Star Database 14 17 Targets 2 17 Details MIP36 Direction 6 39 Index Display Altitude ___5 17 Display Times 6 44 7 8 12 20 Facilities _9 9 Launch Vehicles 8
288. lies to F T R P V Solar Exclusion Angle The minimum angle between the sensor boresight and the line of sight from the object to the Sun for which access is considered valid For example enter 5 in the text box if you wish to ignore accesses where the boresight of the sensor is within 5 of the Sun exclusion angle is 5 Lunar Exclusion The minimum angle between the sensor F T R P V Angle boresight and the line of sight from the object to the Moon for which access is considered valid Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 23 Sensors Constraints Temporal The fields in this tab allow you to impose temporal constraints on the sensor The definition of all constraints on this tab should be taken from the parent object of the sensor Basic sun Temporal Advanced Resolution Start End Lf Local 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 GMT 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 W Local Apparent 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 z400000000 00 00 0000 Duration F Mim onsec F Max 5500 00 sec 5500 00 sec OK Apply Cancel Help Constraints Advanced These constraints only apply to sensors on vehicles such as satellites ground vehicles ships etc as a result definitions of constraints on this tab should be taken from the parent vehicle s constraints properties 12 24 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors EA etl PRO Constraint
289. lite s of interest in the list Use the Select All button to select all satellites in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected satellites in the list Other options in the Satellite Database Search Results window are described in the table following Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 11 Sa why DE Hint t wr Pen Dr Hint City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases To select more than one satellite hold down the key Table 14 6 Satellite Database search results options Field Auto Propagate Time Step Start Stop Time Create Constellation Chains module only Description If ON ephemeris is propagated using the scenario Time Period or the Time Period set here and the MSGP4 Propagator Specifies the interval calculated ephemeris output points Specifies the temporal boundaries of the vehicle s orbit If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the satellites you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text box When you re satisfied click the OK button to insert the vehicle s into the current scenario The Browser and Map windows are updated to display the new satellite s You can insert more than one satellite at a time If several satellites are highlighted they are all inserted Online Update If you have internet access you can obtain the most up to date Satellite Database using the Online Update button 14 12 Satell
290. llax The apparent displacement of an observed object due to a change in the position of the observer Pass Break Vehicle Basic Properties The point at which a pass is considered to commence Either the ascending or descending node of the orbit Passes A pass is a complete orbit of a satellite around the Earth between successive node crossings Path Vehicle Basic Properties The route along which an object moves Penumbra That portion of a shadow in which the Sun is seen as partially obscured Glossary of Terms Periapsis The point in an elliptical orbit that is closest to the gravitational center of the system comprising the primary body and the satellite In Earth based systems the periapsis is called the perigee Perigee The point in the orbit of a satellite orbiting the Earth that is closest to the gravitational center of the Earth Perigee Altitude Altitude of the perigee of an orbit where perigee is defined as the point in the orbit which is closest to the center of the central body Period T The time required for a satellite to complete one revolution around the center of gravity Persistence Length of time a sensor s footprint remains visible Perspective Projection of the Earth as a sphere from a user specified viewing altitude Perturbation Deviation of a satellite from true elliptical motion caused by disturbing accelerations due to the non spherical shape of the Earth influence of
291. llite Tool KitO User s Manual Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Route Atitude Atmosphere Description Attitude Type Selection ECI velocity alignment with nadir constraint 4 Constrain Offset 0 0000 deg Precomputed Attitudes J Attitude File OK apply Cancel Help W hen an axis is constrained that particular axis attempts to point to the desired location as close as possible while still maintaining its proper relationship with the other axes defined in the coordinate system When an axis is aligned that axis points directly to the desired object forcing the other axes to rotate accordingly Note Table 7 2 Attitude types Attitude Type Description The objects X axis is aligned with the inertial velocity direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction of nadir The Constraint Offset angle can be used to modify the body fixed constraint vector This angle is measured from the Z axis direction in a right handed direction about the X axis e g to constrain with the Y axis set the offset to 90 ECI velocity alignment with nadir constraint Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 7 5 q i m LI A 1 54 Hint Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Attitude Type Description ECF velocity The object s X axis is aligned with the Earth fixed velocity alignment with radial direction and the Z axis is constrained in the direction constraint opposite to nad
292. llowing the format expected required by STK For example the stkFacility database the database shipped with STK includes the following files Table C11 stkFacility database files File Contents stkFacility fd Main database file stkFacility fn Facility Networks stkFacility gd Latest update information The first file contains fixed width fields where one row represents a single entry The remaining are in the standard STK database file format File formats for the facility database are described in the subsections following E32 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK stkFacility fd File This is the main Facility Database file it contains all searchable fields The format starting at column zero 0 is as follows Table C12 stkFacility fd file description Column Width Description 0 36 ES Site Name 37 48 pa Network ex USAF 49 58 pto Latitude deg 59 69 pa East Longitude deg 70 76 ll Altitude m 77 79 e cg These are record terminators stkFacility cc File This is the network file It contains a list of all the valid facility network types This file is used to build the list of facility networks available in the user interface If this file isn t available STK is unable to search for facility networks The file is in a basic STK data File format Listing C 13 Example of stkFacility gd file BEGI etwork CNES CRL DLR ESA INPE ISRO Launch ASA DSN ASDA OAA NESDIS Opt
293. lobal Statistics Min Duration Max Duration Mean Duration Total Duration Start Time UTCG 1 Nov 1997 00 1 Nov 1997 02 1 Nov 1997 03 1 Nov 1997 11 1 Nov 1997 13 1 Nov 1997 15 1 Nov 1997 15 12 03 74 1 Nov 1997 13 27 28 70 Stop Time UTCG 1 Nov 1997 00 47 20 85 1 Nov 1997 02 28 22 00 1 Nov 1997 04 03 21 75 1 Nov 1997 12 02 10 46 1 Nov 1997 13 42 22 78 1 Nov 1997 15 18 22 53 1 Nov 1997 15 18 22 53 1 Nov 1997 13 42 22 78 Duration hr Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual Using STK Tools Viewing Azimuth Elevation and Range Data for Access Use the AER button in the Reports field to view access data in terms of AER Figure 13 3 A sample AER Report showing access data for ERS1 to the Santiago facility A _ gt _ _ _ __ _ __ _ _ _ _ 0 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 7 Using STK Tools Azimuth and elevation values in the report are computed based on the local coordinate system of the first object object for which the Access window is displayed Data is displayed for the periods of valid access Using the Custom and Dynamic Display Options Custom reports and dynamic data displays can be quickly generated by pressing the Custom or Dynamic Report buttons These buttons display dialogs described in Chapters 15 and 16 of this manual Creating Graphs for Access Data To view access data in graph form use the Access button the Graphs field
294. local horizon 10 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Area Target Constraints Temporal The fields in this tab allow you to impose time based constraints on the area target SearchArea Constraints Properties Basic Temporal Start End Local 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 m GMT 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 W Local Apparent 00 00 00 0000 24 00 00 0000 Duration F Min 0 00 sec WF Max 3600 00 sec oK Apply Cancel Help Table 10 8 Area target temporal options Fields Description Constraint applies to Local Start and end local time constraints The local time F T R P V offset from GMT for facilities and targets is set in the basic properties for the specified facility or target GMT Start and end GMT time constraints F T R P V Local Start and end local apparent times Using local F T R P V Apparent apparent time at noon the sun is at the highest elevation Duration Minimum and maximum acceptable durations for F T R P V computed accesses If accesses whose durations are outside these limits are computed they are discarded from the resultant list ooo _ eoeo coo E A Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 10 9 Area Target Area targets are assumed to exist within a single time zone so that there is only one local Z time offset from GMT The local apparent time is computed based on the location
295. local horizontal plane between the projection of the velocity vector onto this plane and the local north direction measured as positive in the clockwise direction Velocity The magnitude of the velocity vector Coordinate Systems Standard All coordinate systems in STK are a right handed Cartesian coordinate system with the origin at the center of the Earth Table 6 5 Standard coordinate systems Option Description Fixed X is fixed at 0 longitude Y is fixed at 90 longitude and Z is directed toward the north pole J2000 X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and mean rotation axis of the Earth at January 1 2000 at 12 00 00 00 TDT which corresponds to JD 2451545 0 6 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Option Description B1950 X and Z axes point toward the mean vernal equinox and mean rotation axis of the Earth at the beginning of the Besselian year 1950 when the longitude of the mean Sun is 280 0 measured from the mean equinox and corresponds to 31 December 1949 22 09 07 2 or JD 2433282 423 Alignment at Epoch Defines the ECF and ECI systems as in alignment at the Orbit Epoch using ECF as the baseline and adjusting ECI to it Often used to specify launch trajectories Coordinate Systems Advanced Analysis Module The following coordinate systems are available with the Advanced Analysis module Table 6 6 AAM Coordinate systems Option Description Mean of Date
296. lt in gaps in the rivers see Rivers comment 1 o A reservoir may be shown as a double lined river see Rivers comment 3 Rivers Rank Description Double line rivers Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual E 5 High Resolution Maps Technical Notes Rank Description 2 Major rivers 3 Additional major rivers 4 Intermediate rivers 5 Minor rivers 6 Additional minor rivers 10 Major intermittent rivers 11 Additional intermittent rivers 12 Minor intermittent rivers 21 Major canals 22 Minor canals 23 Irrigation canals Comments o When displaying rivers of a given rank it may be necessary to display lakes of the same rank to prevent gaps in some rivers see Lakes comment 3 o Ranks 1 and 2 form the major river systems o Reservoirs may appear as double line Rank 1 rivers see Lakes comment 4 International Boundaries Rank Description Demarcated or delimited E 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Rank Wy BY Ww 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Comments High Resolution Maps Technical Notes Description Indefinite or in dispute Lines of separation or sovereignty on land Lines of separation or sovereignty in the sea Other lines of separation or sovereignty in the sea Represents one generalization when island jurisdiction must be shown Continental shelf boundary in Persian Gulf Demilitarized zone lines in Israel No defined line tone guide for lines in Arabian peninsula C
297. ltaneously The equal area characteristic of the Lambert projection is mostly preserved Glossary of Terms High Speed Refresh screen as fast as the system is able for animation purposes Doesn t rely on a timer to begin the refresh process Hohmann Transfer A transfer between two circular coplanar orbits via an intermediate elliptical orbit of which the perigee is tangent to the smaller circle and the apogee is tangent to the larger circle A Hohmann Transfer is the most economical transfer from the standpoint of delta v i e the amount of propellant required It also takes longer than any other possible orbit transfer Note that a Hohmann Transfer requires two burns a start and a stop burn Horizon The plane tangent to the Earth s surface at a particular point It defines the boundary between Earth and sky Hour Angle An angle measured westward from the observer s meridian to the meridian that contains the direction to a celestial object HPOP High Precision Orbit Propagator An orbit generator that can generate orbits for a wide variety of Earth satellites with accuracy on the order of 12 meters per orbit or better Add on Module Inclination The angle between the orbit plane and the inertial equatorial plane It is also measured as the angle between the orbital angular momentum vector and the celestial pole Inclined Orbit Any non equatorial orbit of a satellite Insert Files menu Use this command
298. ltiple objects in the graph Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 9 Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts Element Title Azimuth deg Elevation deg Line Range km Color BLACK 3e HS width 2 Point Color BLACK al epum Siza 4 The table following describes the options available in the Attributes window Table 16 5 Strip chart attribute options Field Description Title Changes the legend title for the selected element The title can t exceed one line of text including spaces and punctuation Line Change the color style and or width of the line connecting data points in the chart Point Change the color style and or width of the individual data points in the chart Strip Chart Properties To define the contents and format of the modified or new strip chart style select the style of interest and use the Properties button 16 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Content The Content tab allows you to select the data elements to be included in your strip chart E a la a ET ef FT ET ET ei al an fes Ew ET B a la es ET al FT For strip charts the graph type is set to Timeline XY This can t be changed The Timeline XY graph type displays data elements of the selected object relative to time No options are available for the X axis because X equals time The right arrow button to assign the
299. lution Type Center Projection Perspective Lat 0 000 deg Lon 0 000 deg Display ECI of Alt 2000 000 nm Field of View 35 000 deg OK Apply Cancel Help You can select one of the map projections described in the following subsections to best support your analysis or simulation John P Snyder Map Projections A Working Manual United States Government Printing Office 1987 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 3 9 The Map Window Basic Map Projections The map projections in the table following are available with STK Table 3 4 Basic projection types Projection Type Description Equidistant Projection is mathematically based on a cone that is tangent at Cylindrical one parallel or conceptually secant at two parallels North or south pole is represented by an arc Mercator Projection can be thought of as being mathematically based on a cylinder tangent at the equator Any straight line is a constant azimuth line which is also called a loxodrome or rhumb line The north and south poles can t be shown in this rectangular projection since they are at infinite distance Perspective Projection of the central body as a sphere from a user specified viewing altitude If you choose this projection type specify the 3 D Orbit Type as one of the following ECF Earth Centered Fixed The orbit track displays above the ground track over the entire span of displayed ephemeris
300. me interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that overlap s exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that overlap s are fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue The time intervals only apply to the graphical display of the object they don t affect access computations Note Aircraft Ground Vehicle amp Ship Constraints The basic Sun and temporal constraints that can be imposed on an aircraft ground vehicle or ship in STK are the same as those that can be applied to satellites Please refer to Chapter 6 Satellites for a detailed summary of the constraints available for all vehicles There are no advanced constraints for ground vehicles and ships Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 7 9 Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Constraints Advanced Aircraft Only The fields in this tab allow you to impose a variety of aircraft specific constraints such as grazing angle solar beta angle grazing altitude etc Basic sun Temporal Advanced Grazing Angle FW Min J o oo00 deg F Max 30 0000 deg Solar Beta Angle F Min 0 0000 deg r max 180 0000 deg Background W use 4 Space Only w Ground Only Grazing Altitude F Min 0 0000000 nm F Mex 1079 9136069 nr
301. me step x real time real time and refresh delta high speed Apparent Position Refers to the viewed position of the object from the observer at a given time which takes into account the light time delay and aberrations Application Contains the scenario and all objects within the scenario Basic Properties can be set at the application level Apoapsis The point of an elliptical orbit that is farthest away from the gravitational center of the system consisting of the primary body and the satellite called the apogee in Earth based systems Apogee The point in the satellite s orbit that is farthest from the gravitational center of the Earth Apogee Altitude Altitude of the apogee of an orbit where apogee is defined as the point in the orbit which is farthest from the center of the central body Apogee Kick Motor AKM A motor used once during the lifetime of a geostationary satellite to provide the large delta v required to turn a highly elliptical orbit with apogee at the geostationary altitude into a circular geostationary orbit Apogee Kick Motors are needed because many launchers are not able deliver a satellite into geostationary orbit the Russian Proton launcher is an exception to this rule Satellite Tool Kit Al Glossary of Terms Apsis One of the extreme end points of the major axis of an elliptical orbit such as the apogee or perigee Area Target Defined geographical region of interest on the
302. ms Additional items in the Browser window s Help menu include the following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 9 Using the STK Help Menu Table 17 4 Additional Help menu items Element Description Quick Start Guide Includes a Warp Speed Start to get you up and running quickly with STK a Quick Start Tutorial definitions of some of the most basic STK concepts and a guide to the essentials of the STK user interface Astro Primer An astronautics primer designed to provide the reader with an introduction to important topics in orbital mechanics including a brief overview of space space missions and space history AGI Add ons A brief overview of add on modules available to enhance the power of STK 17 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Es CHAINS MODULE Overview The STK Chains module is a multisatellite multitarget ground station productivity tool that is easy to use Chains provides you with powerful analysis capabilities that aren t available in any other off the shelf package Chapter Contents COVEIVIEW E A Go ee bti cetus 18 1 Chains Ge GOMSTEIAUOMS unicos ages tete iced 18 2 Basic Properties Of ai dl ani An pete 18 3 DEMO Oe uet Pan a E e de a feces 184 CotristellatiODs 3 4 ce Eee f tete ett te ute tede testo Bd 18 5 Basic Properties of a Constellation sssss 18 6 Go nisse rescaccoooiaiacoreos dian based aceite eet uneteu tal od alado bend aude 18 6 Generating Re
303. n 13 23 LayOUt 15 17 16 13 Leading Ground Track 6 44 Leading Orbit Track 6 44 Level Adding 646 8 11 Level Attributes 647 8 12 Lifetime 13 14 Lifetime Module 1 14 Lighting 13 1 1 AER Report 13 13 Sun 5 16 Time Data 13 13 Lighting Constraints 6 52 9 16 Line of Sight 6 49 9 13 10 8 Link 2 8 Lists 2 20 Load Method 6 25 Auto Load 6 25 File Insert 6 25 File Load 6 2 Online Load 6 25 Load TLE 14 18 Load TLE Open Database 1 4 19 14 21 Local Apparent 6 53 9 17 10 9 Local Gregorian LCLG 5 8 Local Julian LCLJ 5 8 Longitude Cursor Position 3 17 Longitude Lines 3 Longitude of the Ascending Node 6 6 l 10 Longitude Unit 5 10 Long term Orbit Predictor See LOP Loop at Timie 5 5 LOP 6 18 Advanced Settings
304. n If you load a satellite using the Satellite Database tool the following information is entered into the vehicle s Long Description field SSC Number Common Name Official Name International Number Owner e Mission Launch Site Launch Date Launch Time Deorbit Date Launch Sequence e Mass Apogee Perigee Period e Inclination Status Write Up Star Database The Star Database tool allows you to identify and insert specific stars into the current scenario It contains tens of thousands of stars along with information about star catalog numbers magnitude proper motion and parallax 14 14 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite Star Databases Datahase stkStarDb bd zt FT Harvard Revised Number e 4 Henry Draper Number a 4 SAO Catalog Number CA _4 8th Fundamental Catalog A 4 Common Name o FT Visual Magnitude Min 0 000 Max 999 990 Right Ascension Min 0 000 deg Max 360 000 deg Declination Min Max Constellation Name Andromeda 4 Perform Search Cancel Querying a Database You can perform a star query using the default database shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search To change the database enter the correct file in the Database field Once you ve chosen the database enter as many search criteria as y possible aa Use wildcard entries and to assi
305. n a right handed sense about the sensor boresight For the default elevation of 90 and the default attitude the up vector points toward the projection of the Earth fixed 12 12 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual A A Sensors velocity vector in the local horizontal plane and azimuth is measured as positive in the direction off the right side of the vehicle If the elevation isn t 90 then the up vector is defined as Up sin elevation cos azimuth Up sin elevation sin azimuth Up cos elevation Targeting a Sensor vane Advanced Analysis Definition Pointing Resolution Description Pointing Type Targeted 4 Targeted Boresight Available Targets Assigned Targets Type Tracking 4 4 SearchAre Facility Baikonur P Facility Perth nentstion method 22 8 e Baikonur Crientalon Method 22 8 vei in Facility Santiago werkt Perth Facility Wallops e Santiago Facility WhiteSands se Wallops ex WhiteSand hi au z About Boresight Rotate 4 TargetTimes OK Apply Cancel Help To choose a sensor s target s highlight the target you wish to select in the Available Targets list and use the right arrow to copy it to the Assigned Targets list sa You can remove a target from the Assigned Targets list by highlighting it in the list and i E using the left arrow ha Hint You can define the sensor s boresight capabilities as either Tracking or Fix
306. n preparing to animate a scenario in STK it is important to understand the relationship between the date time established for orbital elements and the date time established for the animation You must propagate a path and generate ephemeris for a vehicle that overlaps all or a portion of the date and time range set for the scenario animation If the date and time of animation fall outside the range of available ephemeris the vehicle doesn t move during animation You must either propagate ephemeris that use the date and time set for the scenario animation or you need to change the date and time for your scenario animation so that it falls within the span of the available ephemeris 3 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual STK APPLICATION Overview The STK application contains your scenario and all of the objects in the scenario When you set properties at the application level they remain in effect for all scenarios whether they are previously saved scenarios opened during an STK session or newly created scenarios Chapter Contents Basic Properties STK Save Prefs ir rettet oe et a 4 2 Basic Properties IPC Preferences sss 4 3 Basic Properties Online Operations sssss ser 4 5 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 4 1 STK Application Basic Properties STK Save Prefs The Save Prefs tab allows you to activate or disable Auto Save specify the directory path and time i
307. n the list box or ignore the message and continue The time intervals only apply to the graphical display of the object they don t affect access computations Graphics Properties Contours The fields in this tab allow you to control the display of launch vehicle and missile contours in the Map window 8 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Launch Vehicles amp Missiles If the Show Elevation Angle Contours option is ON contour graphics display in the Map window Contour lines indicate the boundaries between regions of the surface which see the vehicle at different elevation angles If it is OFF contour graphics are removed from the Map window Level Adding Choose either Start Stop Step or Explicit add method Start Stop Step Method Enter a Start contour value a Stop value and a Step value Use the Add button to generate contour values beginning with the Start value and incrementing by the Step until the Stop value is exceeded e Explicit Enter individual contour values Use the Add button to add the new contour value to the list of existing contour values Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 8 11 Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Level Attributes Each contour value has a color attribute that can be modified individually You can remove contour values from the list by highlighting the level s of choice and using the Remove or Remove All buttons STK maintains separate contour lists for each contou
308. n to resolve complex geometries when computing ground site visibility and link accesses Sensor Definition and Constraints Sensor definition features allow characterization of alternative sensor types and parameters This includes targeting gimbaled sensors customization of non conical sensor patterns and characterization of specific parameters for optical sensors Sensor constraint features support a diverse and sophisticated set of parameters characterizing sensor access limitations Astrodynamics Astrodynamics features enable use of specialized alternative orbit element sets and coordinate systems each offering unique analysis advantages 1 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction Data Visualization Data visualization features exploit the special advantages of eight alternative map projections for visualization of ground based information Additionally area targets are provided as STK objects and visualization of vehicle and sensor swaths is supported Data Management Data management features include three data input output I O convenience functions Custom reports allow users to specify precisely those output parameters important to their analyses This allows more concise reports containing only the data of interest Batch processing options allow users to predefine a series of mission scenarios exercising the important parameter space for a given problem These are then automatically processed sequentially
309. narios and objects Save Period min The interval for which you wish STK to automatically save your scenario As shown the scenario is saved every five minutes Basic Properties IPC Preferences If you purchased the IPC add on module you can set IPC preferences at the STK application level SFK Basic Properties Save Prefs irc Onine m Processing Parameters F Allow Connect F Allow Async Max Connections 3 Poll Period 50 Default Connection Settings J Acknowledge Msg Receipt Echo Msg Verbose r Connection Method TCP IP Socket Z4 Socket Number 5001 OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in this tab are discussed in the table following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual STK Application Table 4 2 IPC preferences Option Allow Connect Allow Async Max Connections Poll Period Default Connection Settings Connection Method 44 Description Yes No Specifies whether IPC should allow connections Yes No Specifies whether to allow a connection to be placed in asynchronous communications mode Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous IPC connections to be accepted by STK Specifies the maximum number of connections to interrogate in a given poll period Specities the default settings for IPC messages Acknowledge If ON IPC sends an acknowledgment message ACK in response to receipt of an incoming mes
310. ner and mission If OFF results include only the SSC number TLE epoch And rev number When you finish click the Open button All Satellite TLE use the MSGP4 propagator For additional information about the fields and characteristics of the MSGP4 vehicle please refer to Chapter 6 of this manual Open Database Once you choose the file locations the TLE Load Results window appears Mission TLE Epoch 1978 0124 SCIENCE 21 Jul 1996 13 47 46 NIMBUS 7 1978 0984 METSAT 23 Jul 1996 03 26 54 LANDSAT 04 1982 0724 EARTH RES 25 Jul 1996 11 34 34 1983 004A SCIENCE 24 Jul 1996 13 03 16 COMM CIVIL 23 Jul 1996 01 27 31 SCIENCE 24 Jul 1996 05 47 14 53 1986 0174 STATION 25 Jul 1996 09 19 48 87 1987 0304 MODULE 23 Jul 1996 17 23 46 41 1988 0918 COMM CIVIL 20 Jul 1996 18 28 58 10 1989 0218 COMM CIVIL 24 Jul 1996 10 19 49 50 1989 0628 SCIENCE 16 Jul 1996 02 34 39 57 Matches Found Unique Select All Deselect anf Selected Propagation Constellation F Auto Propagate Start Time 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 Create Constellation Time Step 60 000 sec Stop Time 1 Nov 1997 04 00 00 00 OK Apply Cancel Help Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 19 Note q Y A f Dr Hint City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases If there are a number of items resulting from the search select the item s of interest in the list Use the Select All b
311. nge button To remove a time period use the Remove button You can also choose whether the time intervals should be deconflicted or modified so that time periods don t overlap If the Deconflict option is set to Automatic STK automatically modifies all time intervals during which an overlap occurs so that the intervals are further segmented to avoid overlap If the option is set to None no changes are made to time interval overlaps If the option is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that overlap s exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that overlap s are fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue The time intervals only apply to the graphical display of the satellite they don t affect access computations Note Graphics Properties Contours The fields in this tab allow you to control the display of elevation angle contours in the Map window Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 45 A Ee Satellites Contour levels represent the various regions of the surface that can see the satellite at the specified elevation angle refer to Level Adding to set the elevation angles to be represented If the Show Elevation Angle Contours option is ON contour graphics display in
312. nimum angle between the line of sight from the object to the object of interest and the line of sight from the object to the Sun for which access is considered valid Spherical Coordinate System A coordinate system in which positions are specified as a radial distance from the origin and two angles relative to a fundamental plane Spin Offset Establishes the spin angle from some reference point at epoch SSC Space Surveillance Catalog Number Number assigned to satellites for purposes of identification Star A fixed point on the celestial sphere representing members of the solar neighborhood and characterized by their position and brightness Start Time Parameter that specifies when a specified function is to begin A13 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Status Area Area located along the bottom of the Map window that displays latitude and longitude values animation time and status messages such as paused and inactive Step Count Also referred to as Step Size For orbit propagation step size is the time step used in calculating ephemeris points In animation step size determines how much time passes between each picture update Step Size See Step Count Stereographic Projection is geometrically projected onto a plane The point of projection is on the surface of the sphere opposite the point of tangency Directions from the center of the projection are true stkrc File PC STK Run Control Fil
313. npdCor AANDC or AANDBANDC Another good example of this criteria is the Global Positioning System GPS where you could specify At Least 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 18 7 Chains Module Option Description Exactly N ONLY criteria Select this if the exact specified number of objects in the constellation meet the needs of a chain for a successful access In the text box to the right of the options menu enter the exact number of objects needed to meet access requirements For example if the exact number specified is 2 results show when the vehicle can access both ground stations AANDBor BANDCor AANDC e but NOT A ANDB ANDC You could also specify Exactly O to determine when no satellite is in the object s view Generating Reports for a Chain A number of specialized reports are available for the chain object using the Report tool Individual Strand Access A strand represents one possible access pathway through the chain For a chain defined by a series of individual objects only a single strand is possible In the case where one or more objects in the chain are constellations multiple strands are possible Further the constellation access conditions i e ANY OF ALL OF AT LEAST N EXACTLY N determine the number of possible strands for a chain that includes constellation objects 18 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Chains Module Figure 18 3 Diagram showing possible st
314. ns window allows you to set general data options for the dynamic display data Options Section 1 Line 1 Classical Elements J2000 Inclination Title Inclination Number of Decimal Digits 3 Format Floating Point 4 m Multiple Instance JE Include Instance Name with Title OK Apply Cancel Help Table 16 3 Dynamic display options Field Description Title Title to be shown next to the display data for this item Number of The number of digits tot display to the right of the decimal point Decimal Digits for real numbers Format Choose among Floating Point Scientific e or Scientific E Multiple Instances Only valid if multiple objects have been selected in the Browser when generating the dynamic display If the Include Instance Name with Title option is ON the name of the object displays along with the specified title Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 7 Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts Strip Chart Window The Strip Chart tool makes it easy to view and analyze dynamic data during animation You can use one of the standard strip chart styles shipped with STK to display data One of the most popular standard strip chart styles is the ECF Position amp Velocity strip chart style for a vehicle An example of the strip chart is shown in the following figure Other standard strip chart styles are available for vehicles as well as for facilities targets and planets Fig
315. nterval for saving your scenario or perform a Quick Save of your scenario Save Press iec Onine Ephemeris Accesses F Save Vehicle Ephemeris 4 Save Accesses SMS SENE Binary Format AutoSave F Enabled Directory Jam Save Period min J 5 000 OK Apply Cancel Help When STK is selected Basic is the only option available in the Properties menu The fields available in the Save Prefs tab are discussed in Table 4 1 Save preferences aren t saved when you exit STK you must reset these options each time you run STK or change the default saverrefs keyword in the application s default preferences file Table 4 1 Save preferences Field Description Save Vehicle If ON ephemeris of all vehicles is saved in your scenario Ephemeris whenever an Auto Save is performed Binary Format If ON ephemeris is saved in binary format whenever an Auto Save is performed Save Accesses If ON accesses computed in the scenario are saved 4 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Field Description STK Application Quick Save Immediately saves your current scenario to your default directory without saving other objects in the scenario Auto Save Enabled If ON the system automatically saves your work at the interval specified in the Save Period field Directory Specifies where your STK scenario data is located Enter the complete directory path in which you want to store your sce
316. nwich meridian also called Greenwich Mean Time GMT or Zulu Time Z UTC Gregorian Universal Coordinated Time displayed in Gregorian format 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 0000 UTC Julian Universal Coordinated Time displayed in day of year format 306 97 00 00 00 0000 Vehicle Movable land sea air or space objects Those vehicles that move within the atmosphere are considered nonorbiting vehicles those that move outside the atmosphere are considered orbiting vehicles Velocity A vector describing the speed and direction of an object in motion Glossary of Terms Vernal Equinox Direction The direction toward a point in the constellation of Aries On the first day of spring a line joining the center of the Earth and the center of the sun points in this direction This line is the intersection of the Earth s equatorial plane and the plane of the Earth s revolution around the sun ecliptic plane The vernal equinox direction is used as the x axis for an astronomical reference system To be more precise the reference frame is based on the vernal equinox for a particular epoch Walker Constellation Group of satellites that are in circular orbits and have the same period and inclination X Real time The number of times faster than real time the animation should run Yaw A rotation about the Z axis of a reference coordinate system This coordinate system can be a local system moving with the object a body fix
317. o Oo 00 oo JO 01 O1 oo0oo o il 125 13 14 1545 20 25 Z4 QO10o0000000o0 1O1 Or Or Oo J 00 io Rp QO1000000O0 267 5 22 5 C 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK 270 0 25 0 272 5 22 5 275 0 20 0 277 5 Liked 280 0 15 0 290 0 5 0 300 0 5 0 310 0 5 0 320 0 5 0 330 0 5 0 340 0 5 0 350 0 5 0 360 0 5 0 End AzElMask Custom Sensor File Format Please consult Appendix B Custom Sensor Patterns to learn more about creating a custom sensor pattern and file formats required Ephemeris File Format e It is often necessary to import external ephemeris information into STK to model certain unique circumstances The ephemeris information describes the position and velocity of the vehicle There are three formats for specifying the position and velocity of the vehicle all share certain common characteristics The first line of each file contains the application version number e g stk v 3 0 The primary section of each file is set off by the Keyword Group name that defines the data contains within the group i e BEGIN Ephemeris at the beginning of the Keyword Group and END Ephemeris at the end of the Keyword Group In between these beginning and end statement is the data that defines the object Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C 9 Importing Files into STK Inside the ephemeris section are several keywords to identify the scena
318. o launch the default Web browser Browser Name Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 4 5 STK Application NOTES 4 6 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual SCENARIOS Overview This chapter describes the properties of a scenario and how to manipulate scenarios effectively A scenario is the object in STK that serves as the container or collection point for all other objects vehicles facilities targets area targets planets stars and sensors This collection of objects becomes the outline for a proposed or planned configuration that you need to analyze You can create and maintain any number of scenarios the objects you create to populate various scenarios can be used concurrently in some or all of your scenarios Only one scenario can be open at any given time during the STK session The scenario serves as the framework for your analysis As part of establishing this framework you can define an epoch and a time period The epoch serves as a reference for all other times in the scenario The time and date of the epoch correspond to zero epoch seconds The time period defines the general time span a range of several hours days or weeks for analysis A redefinition of the time period results in the propagation of the orbits for all satellites currently loaded in the scenario Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 1 Scenarios Chapter Contents Basic Properties Setting the Time Period 5
319. o satellites 0 eee 13 28 Figure 13 11 Walker Constellation clearly illustrating the satellite configuration 1 3 28 Figure 15 1 An example of the STK Report Tool window ssesssssses 15 2 Figure 15 2 Sample report summarizing J2000 x y and z position for the ERST and shuttle vehicles usc oreet bici etes Gate nth Uer reus 15 5 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual xiii Table of Contents Figure 15 3 Sample X Y Graph that displays the azimuth elevation and range of the sun relative to The ERST Vehicle Po ameet 15 12 Figure 16 1 An example of the STK Dynamic Display Tool window 16 3 Figure 16 2 Asample standard dynamic display showing J2000 position and velocity data for the ERST vehicle The data changes as the animation moves forward or backward in times cia lote n m des 16 5 Figure 16 3 Asample standard strip chart showing ECF position and velocity data for tie ERST Vehicle uscite eer roce ee rtt eoe eire et eine 16 8 Figure 18 1 A simple chain defined as Target LEO Relay Ground Station Picture captured in STK s Visualization Option VO module sss 18 3 Figure 18 2 A more complex chain defined as 2 Targets Leo 2 Relays 2 Ground Stations Picture captured in STK s Visualization Option VO module 18 5 Figure 18 3 Diagram showing possible strand accesses from both Target and Target2 to Leo to both Relay1 and Relay2 to GroundStation
320. ock Angle Max Clock Angle Up Vector Cross Section PRO advanced Half Power Sensor Analysis Min Clock Angle Outer Angie Inner Angle 3D View Half power sensors are specific to parabolic antennas Boresight 12 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors The two sided beam width of a half power sensor is defined as follows 0 105 sme e nf where A is equal to the wavelength m which is equal to the speed of light m sec divided by the frequency Hz and D is equal to the diameter of the transmit antenna m The coefficient of illumination is chosen to be 70 0 which represents a nonuniform illumination A coefficient of 58 5 would represent a uniform illumination The resultant beam width is then divided by two to provide the effective half angle in STK Diameter values are always expressed in meters regardless of the units of measure set at the scenario level Table 12 2 Halfpower sensor options Field Description Frequency GHz The antenna s frequency in gigahertz Diameter The diameter of the antenna dish Half Angle Based on the values entered for Frequency and Diameter STK calculates the half angle of the cone for you The computation appears once you click Apply A diagram illustrating the structure of a half power sensor is presented in the following figure Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 5 Sensors
321. of the Note Centroid 10 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual STARS PLANETS Overview STK provides you with the opportunity to conduct detailed analyses involving numerous and varied objects in a scenario Complex scenarios often require the inclusion of stars and planets to provide a complete analysis of sensor in view opportunities In STK stars are used to represent stationary objects such as stars quasars and pulsars Planets represent objects in heliocentric orbit such as planets minor planets asteroids and comets For your convenience the Moon and the Sun are also included in the Planet class Chapter Contents Basic Properties Defining a Star ssssssssssss 112 Basic Properties Defining a Planet 11 3 Graphic Properties Star Planet Attributes sse 11 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 11 1 Stars amp Planets Basic Properties Defining a Star The Definition tab defines the position proper motion and magnitude of a star Star Basic Properties Definition Description J2000 Reference System Position Proper Motion arc seconds year Right Ascension 0 0000 deg Right Ascension 0 000000 Declination 0 0000 deg Declination 0 000000 Magnitude 0 000 Parallax arc seconds 0 00000000 OK Apply Cancel Help The fields in the Definition tab are described bin the table following Table
322. om 360 0 to 360 0 Radius The distance of the object from the center of the Earth 10 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Area Target Cartesian Position If you select Cartesian the following fields are available Table 10 3 Cartesian area target options Field Description X The X component of the object s position vector where the X axis crosses 0 latitude 0 longitude Y The Y component of the object s position vector Z The Z component of the object s position vector where the Z axis points to the North pole Cylindrical Position If you select Cylindrical the following fields are available Table 104 Cylindrical area target options Field Description R The polar radius where R 4 x 24 y Longitude The longitude measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 Z The Z component of the object s position vector Geocentric Position If you select Geocentric the following fields are available Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 10 5 Area Target Table 10 5 Geocentric area target options Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The geocentric latitude of a point is the spherical latitude of the subpoint on the surface of the central body Longitude Measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 the geocentric longitude of a point is the spherical longitude of the subpoint on the surface of the central body Attitude Enter altitude values of
323. om the default Attitude Type selected STK uses the information entered here and data in the inertia matrix to compute the satellite s attitude over time Table 6 17 Integrated attitude options Field Start Stop Times Epoch Torque File Description Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual The time for which the initial conditions apply The start and stop times for the computation of the attitude The torque file defines a time ordered list of body fixed torques to be applied to the satellite 6 35 Note Satellites Field Description Output Attitude File STK automatically generates an attitude file based on the values you ve entered in this window This file is formatted correctly for subsequent use as an external attitude file Initialize from If ON STK uses the default attitude data in the Attitude tab Default Attitude to generate the initial conditions for the integration If OFF you must define the initial orientation of the body in ECI space and the initial angular velocity in the body fixed frame Orientation Type The initial orientation of the body and method of specification refer to orientation type on page 6 34 Body fixed Rates The initial angular rates about the body s X Y and Z axes Target Pointing You can point a satellite at selected targets so that the satellite s Z axis points in the direction of the target when the target is visible to the satellite based
324. ometrical shape in which any cross section parallel to the equator is a circle and any cross section through the north A5 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms south axis is an ellipse of which the minor axis coincides with the Earth s axis The shape of the ellipse is specified by two of the following values WGS 1984 Equatorial Radius a 6378 137 0 m Polar Radius b 6356 752 3 m Flattening f 1 298 257223563 Fixed Apogee Altitude Used to specify the maximum altitude for a rocket Fixed Coordinate System A coordinate system fixed with respect to the rotating Earth The principal direction x is through the equator at 0 longitude z is through the Earth s rotation axis and y completes the right handed system Fixed Delta V Instantaneous thrust to be applied to the vehicle being launched Fixed Time of Flight Used to specify the launch to impact time for a rocket Focal Length The distance from the center of a focusing device such as a lens or mirror to the point where the refracted or reflected rays converge Focal length determines the magnification of the images formed Footprint of a Satellite The point on the surface of the Earth directly below a satellite The footprint is the intersection of the Earth s surface and the line connecting the center of the Earth to the satellite Footprint That portion of the Earth s surface from which the elevation angle toward a satellite exceeds a
325. on Maps module Coastlines Rank Description 1 Coastline 21 Major ice shelves 22 Minor ice shelves Comments 9 Coastlines include the coasts of Africa Asia Australia Europe Greenland North America South America the Black Sea and the Caspian Sea Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual E 3 High Resolution Maps Technical Notes o Ice shelves are found only in Antarctica Islands Rank Description Major islands that should appear on all maps 2 Additional major islands 3 Moderately important islands 4 Additional islands 5 Minor islands 6 Very small minor islands 8 Reefs 9 Shoals Comments o Rank 1 islands should be called out on all maps o Ranks 5 and 6 are normally found in double line rivers in lakes and between larger islands Lakes Rank Description 1 Lakes that should appear on all maps 2 Major lakes E 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual High Resolution Maps Technical Notes Rank Description Additional major lakes Intermediate lakes Minor lakes Additional minor lakes NI GD UI 5 Uy Swamps 11 Intermittent major lakes 12 Intermittent minor lakes 14 Major salt pans 15 Minor salt pans 23 Glaciers Comments o Glaciers are currently found only in Iceland o Many small lakes have the same rank as the rivers that run through them a very small lake may be a rank 2 because a rank 2 river runs through it Displaying rivers of a certain rank without displaying lakes of the same rank may resu
326. on is ON Class Objects in STK are arranged in classes that share common attributes and traits There are eight classes in STK scenario vehicle facility target area target planet star sensor Classical Elements Also known as Keplerian elements These elements specify an orbit by its size shape and three dimensional orientation in inertial space Clock Angle An angle measured in the plane perpendicular to an antenna boresight from the up vector for the sensor Close Files menu Close a scenario without exiting STK When you close a scenario the Map window disappears Conic A shape defined as a cross section of a right circular cone Cross sections at various angles through the cone generate circles ellipses parabolas and hyperbolas Also a type of sensor defined through the specification of an origin and axis directions The components of vectors specify the orientation of the vectors within a specific coordinate system Constraint A boundary condition placed on a parameter that limits its validity to a subset of its original range Glossary of Terms Constraints Properties Properties menu This window allows the user to specify the constraints that have been imposed upon the selected object Coordinate Type Set of orbital elements Some coordinate sets are more useful in certain situations than others Coordinate System A system in which positions are specified by a set of coordinates Cove
327. ong the line of sight of the two objects Min Max Angular The angular rate is the rotational rate of one F T R P 5 V Rate object which is necessary to keep a fixed vector in that object s body fixed coordinate system aligned with the line of sight between the two objects 6 48 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Fields Description Constraint applies to Line of Sight If ON access to the satellite is constrained to a line of sight not obstructed by the Earth E access Propagation Delay the time it takes the signal to travel between the two objects Center of the Earth Position of the Viewer on the Earth s Surface Position of the Satellite in Space Elevation Angle a Angle from Nadir Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 49 Satellites Constraints Sun The fields in this tab allow you to impose constraints based on the position of the Sun 6 50 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Table 6 22 Satellite Sun constraints Fields Description Constraint applies to Sun The elevation angle to the apparent position of the Sun F T R P V Elevation Angle pr local horizontal plane Sun Gnd Measured with respect to targets or facilities The Elev Angle elevation angle relative to the target or facility to the apparent position of the Sun Lunar Elev F T R P V Angle Solar The minimum angl
328. ord such as the Error Not a valid filename key on the Dec and IBM workstation Used in key combinations for accelerator keys Miller Rectangular projection constructed to provide an alternative to the Mercator projection The two projections are similar near the equator but the Miler projection avoids some of the exaggeration in scale near the poles Mixed Spherical A variation of the spherical coordinate system that combines Earth fixed position parameters with inertial velocity parameters A 10 Mollweide Equal and pseudo cylindrical projection showing the Earth in an ellipse with the equator twice as long as the map s actual meridian Motion Dot Dot The second derivative of mean motion and first derivative of motion dot This quantity indicates the degree to which the change in the size of the orbit is accelerating due to perturbative effects on the spacecraft MSGP4 Propagator Used with two line mean element sets Considers Earth oblateness solar and lunar gravitational effects and resonance effects using a mean drag model Nadir The point on the celestial sphere directly beneath a given position or observer and diametrically opposite the zenith Also the direction from an object towards the center of the central body Node Rotation A rotation of the orbital plane caused by the non spherical shape oblateness of the Earth This precessional motion is similar to that of a simple top the normal to the orb
329. orizontal axis Show Grid Lines If ON grid lines display in the graph Number of Axis The number of points to be marked along the horizontal axis Annotations in the graph Number of Tick Marks The number of tick marks to display along the horizontal axis 15 18 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports amp Graphs Field Description Number of Vertical The number of grid lines to display vertically on the graph Grid Lines The number of grid lines to display horizontally on the graph Number of Horizontal Grid Lines Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 19 Reports Graphs NOTES 15 20 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 16 DYNAMIC DISPLAYS STRIP CHARTS Overview STK now features a Strip Chart tool that displays user selected data in graph form as you animate the scenario The Strip Chart is useful when you wish to visualize dynamic data elements over a period of time Another feature that is useful in analyzing data is the Dynamic Display tool which provides text updates during animation so that you can view changes to selected elements over a period of time Chapter Contents OVNIS WEI A datada 16 1 Chapter Conti io pt HEROS 16 1 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 1 A A A A a Dynamic Displays Strip Charts The STK Dynamic Display Strip Chart Tool Window sees 16 2 Managing Dynamic Display Strip Chart Styles suse 163 Dynamic
330. osition parameters with inertial velocity Geodetic Latitude 0 0081 deg parameters Also known as DODS elements Altitude 423 8661337 nm Hor FPA y 0 0000 deg The mixed spherical coordinate type is only Azimuth 351 5000 deg available when an inertial coordinate system is velocity 4 0278779845 nmsec selected If you entered the predicted orbital elements and propagated a satellite that is about to launch it is possible that the launch may not occur at the exact time predicted A quick way to adjust the elements and repropagate is to switch the Coordinate Type to Mixed Spherical and change the orbit epoch to the new time The Mixed Spherical Coordinate Type is independent of the orbit epoch Table 6 3 Mixed spherical coordinate type elements Option Description Longitude Measured from 180 0 to 360 0 6 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Option Geodetic Latitude Altitude Hor FPA Ver FPA Azimuth Velocity Satellites Description Measured from 90 0 to 90 0 The geodetic latitude of a point is the angle between the normal to the reference ellipsoid which passes through the satellite position and the equatorial plane The object s position above or below the reference ellipsoid Altitude is measured along a normal to the surface of the reference ellipsoid Horizontal or vertical flight path angle The angle between the inertial velocity vector and the radius vector vertical or t
331. ound tracks display in the Map window Tracks Show Pass Labels If ON vehicle i e satellite aircraft ship etc pass numbers display in the Map window Show El Set This option only affects MSGP4 satellites with multiple two Number line element sets If ON element set numbers for the vehicle display in the Map window Show Orbits This option only affects the Perspective map projection refer to Chapter 3 The Map Window If ON satellite orbital tracks display in the Map window Show Sensors If ON sensor projections display in the Map window Show Tum This option only affects aircraft ground vehicles and ships If Markers ON turn markers specified for the Great Arc vehicle display in the Map window Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 15 Scenarios Option Description Blink on Select If ON the graphics associated with the selected object blink when the object is highlighted in the Browser window This feature is especially useful in scenarios containing a large number of objects Graphics Properties Sun Lighting The Sun Lighting tab allows you to graphically display the lighting conditions for the scenario during animation Tutorial Graphics Properties Global Attributes Sun Lighting Color Line Marker Style Line Width Fl Subsolar Point yellow Str mi 4 Sunlight Penumbra yellow P Solid P 1 F Penumbra Umbra yellow ad Solid sb la Display Altitude 0 000 nm
332. ov 1997 00 00 00 00 Step Size ec Stop Time cud 93 Propagator Great rc 4 Latitude Longitude Altitude Rate Turn Radius JE Update Map Graphics Edit Mode 4 Add New Point y Change Current Point Insert Point Delete Point 1 66 200 deg 65 000 de 0 000 nm 0 001 nm se 0 000 nm OK Apply Cancel Help A waypoint is comprised of latitude longitude altitude rate and optionally turn radius data To define a waypoint enter data in the five individual text boxes below the Waypoint Table that correspond to the columns of the table When you finish entering all the elements of a waypoint use the Insert Point button in the Edit Mode field so that the point appears in the Waypoint Table located above the text boxes Each row describes one waypoint in the path of your aircraft ground vehicles and ships After you enter the first waypoint you can click anywhere in the Map window to add waypoints latitude longitude values in the Waypoint table However you must enter gt altitude rate and turn radius values using the keyboard Note t When specifying a great arc trajectory using the mouse it is best to specify the altitude i and rate data on the first point before creating the second point so that the initial altitude ia and rule information become the default for all additional points Hint Table 7 1 Great Arc propagator elements Elements Description Lati
333. overlaps If the option is set to Manual when an overlap occurs in the time interval list an Acknowledge window appears when you click on the OK or Apply button to alert you to the fact that overlap s exists It is then your decision whether to set the Deconflict field to Automatic so that overlap s are fixed change the time intervals yourself by modifying the appropriate entries in the list box or ignore the message and continue Constraints Basic The fields in the Basic tab allow you to impose standard constraints for the facility or target 9 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities Targets ea ee ieee E E E E Abbreviations in the Constraints apply to column are as follows F facility T target V all vehicles S satellite M missile L launch vehicle G ground vehicle A aircraft B ship N sensor P planet star R area target Table 9 8 Facility target basic constraints Fields Description Constraint applies to Min Max Azimuth is the angle between the relative All Azimuth Angle position vector and local north measured positive in an easterly direction from local north in a plane tangent to the surface of the Earth at the location of the facility or target Using this convention local north is at 0 azimuth local east is at 90 azimuth Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 11 Facilities amp Targets 9 12 Fields Min Max Elevation An
334. ow Table 13 1 Access graphics options Field Description Show Line If ON a line appears on the Map between the two objects to show when they are accessible to one another during animation Animate If ON access is highlighted displayed in bold print during Highlight animation A box appears around each object during access Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 5 Using STK Tools Field Description Static Highlight If ON access is highlighted in the Map window when the scenario is not animating This appears as a bold line on top of the ground track for a vehicle or vehicle sensor and as an X for a facility target or attached sensor Generating Access Reports Use the Access button in the Reports field to generate a report that provides access times between the two objects selected To learn more about the commands available in the Access Summary Report window refer to Chapter 15 of this manual STK is shipped with a number of standard report styles you can also customize a report to meet your requirements For more information about standard reports and instructions for customizing reports refer to Chapter 15 of this manual Figure 13 2 Asample Access Report showing access data for the ERS1 Satellite to the Santiago facility Report Vehicle ERSi To Facility WhiteSands Access a Files Edit 29 Apr 1997 15 55 09 Vehicle ERS1 To Facility WhiteSands Access Summary Report Access G
335. ow The Start and Stop Times for the time during which the satellite may be launched can be specified in the Launch Window field For these parameters to be meaningful the satellite should be defined using an external ephemeris file that includes the satellite s ascent profile Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 33 Note Using STK Tools Access Graphics You can also set Access Graphics to display in the Map window once results have been tabulated Choose to display Show Line Animate Highlight and Static Highlight Computing Close Approaches When both standard and advanced parameters are set use the Compute button to determine the satellites that pass within the specified range during the user defined Time Period While CAT is computing accesses a Status window appears Close Approach Processing aa muri Vehicle COSMOS_2098 20774 Performing MSGP4 Propagation TLE files are considered to be out of date if they are more than 30 days old from the start of the specified Time Period However all out of date TLEs are still included in the search process When the calculations are complete the Status window disappears and the Message window displays showing the number of satellites that meet the close approach parameters if any and the number of satellites that could access the current satellite Any warning messages such as TLE files that are out of date are also displayed in the Mess
336. ports for a Chain sss 18 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 18 1 Chains Module Creating Graphs for Chains sss 18 12 Dynamic Display Reports amp Strip Charts ssssssee 18 13 Chains amp Constellations The Chains module allows you to extend the pair wise analysis capabilities of STK to include accesses to and from satellite constellations ground station networks groups of targets and multiple sensors For instance you can determine the time period in which a satellite can see a target and a relay station and the relay station can see a ground station With Chains you can also group objects together a powerful capability that allows you to check accesses to the entire group For example you can determine when a tank has access to at least four satellites in the Global Positioning System GPS constellation In addition you can easily determine when LandSat can see a target as well as a TDRS relay satellite and the relay satellite can in turn see a ground station In STK s Chains module that chain could be defined as Target LandSat TDRS East WhiteSands You could also define a chain with a target to a LEO satellite to a relay satellite to a ground station Or you can solve more sophisticated problems such as allowing the use of TDRS East or West as the relay satellite In Chains you would define a constellation of relay satellites and then incorporate
337. propagator The chapter also discusses the graphics properties available for launch vehicles and missiles Chapter 9 Facilities and Targets Chapter 9 provides instructions for setting the basic and graphic properties of facilities and targets including position azimuth elevation mask and attributes Constraints that can be imposed on facilities and targets are also reviewed 1 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Introduction Chapter 10 Area Targets Chapter 10 provides a description of an area target and includes instructions for setting the basic and graphic properties of an area target It addresses the centroid position and boundaries of an area target as well as its attributes in the Map window and the constraints that can be placed upon it Chapter 11 Stars and Planets Chapter 11 provides instructions for using and defining stars and planets in a scenario including basic and graphic properties Chapter 12 Sensors Chapter 12 includes instructions for defining and pointing a sensor as well as defining the sensor s resolution The sensor s attributes in the Map window and the special constraints that can be placed on a sensor are also discussed Chapter 13 Using STK Tools Chapter 13 is the first of four chapters that address the various tools available in STK Specific topics of discussion include calculating accesses generating vehicle and sensor swath creating a Walker constellation and removing ac
338. properties for the selected object as the default for all future objects created in that class Displays Edit pull down menu Meta E Meta F Displays Files pull down menu Meta G Displays Graphics Properties window for selected object Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 21 Note User Interface Key Function combination Meta H Displays Help pull down menu Meta T Inserts existing object into the current scenario Meta 4 7 Saves the select object or scenario but doesn t save any o subobjects attached to the object being saved Meta L Inserts existing object into the current scenario as a link z only Meta N Displays Constraints Properties window for selected object Meta 0 Opens previously saved scenario Meta P Displays Properties pull down menu Meta R Removes object from the current scenario Meta S Saves selected object or scenario Meta T Displays Tools pull down menu Meta V Pastes text entered into clipboard at the specified location Meta W Displays the Windows pull down menu Meta X Removes the selected text 2 22 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual THE MAP WINDOW Overview The Map window graphically displays information about your scenario Use the tool bar located at the top of the Map window to control animation and zooming Use the status bar located along the bottom of the window to check the
339. r 6 24 l 11 Index TLE Load 6 24 Selecting Multiple 2 18 MSGP4 Propagator 6 22 Sensors 12 1 Multiple Instance 15 9 Ships 7 1 Stars 1141 N Target Nadir Alignment Oblateness Correction 13 19 ECF Velocity Constraint 6 30 Obtain Archived Database 14 13 ECI Velocity Constraint 6 30 Official Name 1410 Orbit Normal Constraint 633 1 ne 10 On Line Manuals 1 7 9 sun Constraint 6 31 Online Operations 4 5 Network 14 7 Online Updates ooo 417 New Objects 2 6 Online Updates 17 9 Nonorbiting Satellites 6 1 Opening a Scenario 2 5 Nonorbiting Vehicles 7 1 8 1 Option Menus 2 20 Nutatior 1 12 Orbit Count Limit 13 18 Orbit Epoch 64 6 23 O Orbit Lifetime See Lifetime Orbiting Satellites 6 1 Object Description14 5 14 8 14 14 14 17 14 22 Orbits 515 Object cons
340. r a facility for all facilities in all scenarios Graphics Properties Az El Mask The fields in the Az El Mask tab control the display of azimuth and elevation mask data in the Map window Santiago Graphics Properties Attributes AzEIMask Display Times JE Show Mask Number of steps 1 Altitude Range 0 000 nm to 5 400 nm OK Apply Cancel Help There are three fields available in the Azimuth Elevation Mask tab Table 9 7 Facility target azimuth elevation mask graphics Field Description Show Mask If ON the terrain mask is displayed in the Map window 9 8 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities amp Targets Field Description Number of Only valid if the Show Mask feature is ON The Map window Steps shows the difference between the altitude range divided by the number of steps specified For instance if you enter 2 steps with an altitude range of 500 to 1500 nm the Map window displays mask constraints at 500 and 1500 nm Altitude Range Only valid if the Show Mask feature is ON Enter the altitude range to display in the Map window for the facility or target Graphics Properties Display Times The fields in the Display Times tab allow you to control the display of facility target graphics in the Map window Santiago Graphics Properties Attributes AzEIMask Display Times Display Status Use Intervals 4 Start Stop 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 1 Nov 19
341. r so that you can define different values for each type and switch back and forth as desired Launch Vehicle amp Missile Constraints The constraints that can be imposed on a launch vehicle or missile in STK are the same as those that can be applied to satellites Please refer to Chapter 6 Satellites for a detailed summary of the constraints available for all vehicles 8 12 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual FACILITIES TARGETS Overview Facilities are defined as nonmobile points on the Earth s surface Typically facilities mark the position of ground stations launch sites tracking stations etc Targets are also objects that mark locations on the Earth s surface as such they can be used to represent points of interest for sensor coverage locations of cities etc Although facilities and targets are managed separately in STK they are functionally identical and are addressed concurrently in this chapter The objects are separated within STK to help in your analysis tasks Chapter Contents Basic Properties POSITION ooo conca ee 9 2 CGyeodetiG POSON mila dai 9 3 Spherical POSITION evisos 9 4 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 9 1 Facilities amp Targets Cartesian Position eem mer eene 9 4 Cylindrical Posts oce e tereti enter te etre ec fn 9 5 E POSO MEE 9 5 Basic Properties Az El Mask 9 6 Graphics Properties Attributes ssssssss ccoo cono nono nono ncnoncna nn 9 6 Graphics P
342. rage The area of the Earth s surface visible to an orbiting spacecraft during one or more orbits A coverage pattern is the sequence of coverage over an extended period of time Date Format Specifies the format to be used when referring to calendar dates Available formats include UTC Gregorian UTC Julian Local Julian Local Gregorian Epoch Seconds Declination An angle in a meridian measured northward from the ecliptic to a line running from the Earth s center to a given celestial object Delaunay Elements A set of canonical angle action variables commonly used in general perturbation theories An orbit is defined by a set of conjugate angle action pairs Delta v The speed change needed for a change in orbit parameters The direction and size of the delta v determines which orbit parameters are most affected and to what extent For instance a delta v orthogonal to the orbit plane at the time it crosses the ascending or descending node results in an inclination change The latter maneuver requires a relatively large amount of propellant tight inclination control therefore limits the lifetime of a satellite in orbit considerably A3 Satellite Tool Kit Glossary of Terms Descending Node The point in the equatorial plane where the satellite crosses through it in a southerly direction Description Object Basic Properties Allows you to record ancillary information for future reference Contains short and
343. rand accesses from both Target and Target to Leo to both Relay and Relay2 to GroundStation Individual strand access for Target 1 Relay2 GroundStation is Shown in bold Leo Relayt lt lt Relay2 Individual strand access for this diagram would include access times for Target 1 Leo Relay 1 GroundStation Target 1 Leo Relay2 GroundStation Target2 Leo Relay 1 GroundStation Target 2 Leo Relay2 GroundStation The Individual Strand Access Report shows the access periods for each of the possible access pathways through the chain Files Edit 6 Jul 1997 13 09 54 Chain K0P LandSat TDRS Individual Strand Access King fPrussia to LANDSAT 4 to TDRS 4 Stop Time UTCG Duration sec an 1997 00 09 19 18 5 an 1997 01 47 46 18 841 830 an 1997 03 23 23 64 483 482 Min Duration an 1997 00 01 43 an 1997 00 09 19 18 455 798 Max Duration an 1997 01 33 44 an 1997 01 47 46 18 841 830 Mean Duration 593 703 Total Duration 1781 110 King fPrussia to LANDSAT 04 to TDRS 7 Stop Time UTCG Duration sec Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 18 9 Hint Chains Module Individual Object Access Individual object access is the accumulated total of all strands that include the object in question Figure 18 4 Diagram showing individual object access for Relay1 access shown in bold lines Relay1 Individual object access for Relay1 in this diagram would include access times for Target 1 Leo Relay
344. ransformation from the inertial coordinate system to the satellite body fixed coordinates The quaternion must be normalized to unit length Quaternion input is only accessible when all three axis are being specitied RA Dec Right Ascension Declination Angles These angles specify the direction of the satellite Z axis in spherical coordinates in the inertial coordinate system This input type is only available for the specification of the Z axis 6 34 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Integrated Attitude Satellites Use the Integrated Attitude button to generate an external attitude file by p numerically integrating Euler s equations for the current satellite Start Time 31 Oct 1897 23 59 59 00 Stop Time 1 Nov 1997 03 59 59 00 Epoch 31 Oct 1997 23 59 59 00 J Torque File El m Output Attitude File ERS1 a a m Initial Conditions Initialize from Default Attitude Quaternion 4 Body Fixed Rates qx 0 00000000 gy 0 00000000 qz 0 00000000 qs 1 00000000 we 0 0000000 deg sec Wy 0 0000000 deg sec WZ 0 0000000 deg sec Cancel PRO Advanced Analysis Use the fields in the Integrated Attitude window to specify the satellite s initia conditions The initial orientation of the body to the inertial coordinate system and the initial angular rate of the satellite in body fixed coordinates can be specified or you can initialize the attitude fr
345. raph styles are available for vehicles as well as for facilities targets and planets Figure 15 3 Sample X Y Graph that displays the azimuth elevation and range of the Sun relative to the ERST vehicle Files Edit Distance 148470000 148465000 Time UTCG Azimuth deg Elevation deg Range km Clicked At X 1 Nov 1992 01 34 48 89 v v2 237 642899 p Al Restore Nearest Point X 1 Nov 1992 01 36 00 00 Y Y2 232 271103 Azimuth deg 15 12 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports amp Graphs The buttons available in the Graph Data window are described in the table following Table 15 6 Graph Data buttons Button Description Zooms in magnifies on a portion of the graph Click this button then click and hold the left mouse button and drag it over the portion of the graph you wish to magnify Use this button as many times as needed to increase magnification Restores the graph perspective one step at a time You can also click a point in the graph to display its X and Y coordinates as well as the Nearest X and Y Data Points to that point Immediately restores the graph to its original size Use the Files menu to close print change units of measure and refresh the graph Defining Graph Attributes Select the Attributes option in the Edit menu to define the appearance of the graph Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 15 13
346. re described in the table following Table 12 5 Sensor graphics attributes Field Description Color Choose the color in which you wish your sensor pattern to appear Line Style Choose among Solid Long Dash Dotted Dot Dash or Dashed Line Width 1 narrow 5 wide Graphics Properties Projection The Projection tab is used to specify the display of sensor projection graphics in the Map window 12 18 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors Atributos Projection Display Times Min Altitude 0 000 nm Step Count 0 Max Altitude 0 000 nm Persistence 0 000 sec 4 Trask Available Objects OK app Cancel Help Its a good idea to select the maximum display altitude equal to the altitude of the vehicle being observed to provide a proper graphical representation of the access area Sensors attached to facilities and targets differ in their display behavior from those attached to vehicles The intersections of vehicle based sensors with the Earth are displayed during animation Nontargeted sensors attached to facilities are only displayed if the Step Count is greater than 0 The Step Count works in conjunction with the Minimum Maximum Altitude fields to determine the number and altitude of projections to be displayed Each projection is computed as the intersection of the sensor pattern with a sphere at the requested radius This intersection is then mapped back to the surface of the Earth for d
347. rees and meters respectively and velocity is interpolated from position information 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat is the geodetic latitude in degrees 1on and rad are the geocentric longitude and radius in degres and meters respectively and latdot londot and raddot are the rates of change of these parameters per second 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 5 0 6 0 7 Importing Files into STK Keyword EphemerisLLRTimePos EphemerisGeodeticLLA TimePosVel C14 Description Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat is the geodetic latitude in degrees lon and rad are the geocentric longitude and radius in degres and meters respectively and velocity is interpoated from position 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in an ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch lat is the geodetic latitude in degrees Lon and alt are the geocentric longitude and altitude in degress and meters respectively and latdot londot and altdot are the rates of change of these parameters per second 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 5 0 6 0 7 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Keyword
348. reo reat e p abe pL Rs 6 47 GOMSUAIMES SUIN e heed cette fete oen eb ete ecce te Lees ceu e 6 50 Constraints TEMPO rel sc cecsstsvedeoesdecveasneudveadetacssbatengdsasadecsanbatesaaveleassbeasves 6 52 Constrallats AVANCE 6 54 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Basic Properties Orbit To generate an orbit for a satellite open the Basic Properties window for the satellite In the Orbit tab you can use a number of different propagators to define the satellite s orbit At the top of this panel the Start Time and Stop Time fields specify the temporal boundaries of your satellite The default values for Start Time and Stop Time are your scenario start and stop times The Step Size field specifies the interval between calculated ephemeris output points The default value is 60 seconds The fields available in the bottom portion of the Orbit tab depend on the Propagator chosen A propagator uses an analytical formulation of the time dependent motion of a satellite to produce ephemeris or to directly provide the position and velocity of a satellite at a particular time The propagators available for a satellite are discussed in the sections following Two Body J2 Perturbation amp J4 Perturbation Propagators The Two Body J2 Perturbation and J4 Perturbation propagators all require the same fields of information to be defined A Two Body or Keplerian motion propagator considers the Earth to be a point mass with no pertur
349. resight pattem Stkev 320 umberPoints 27 HalfAngleAzimuthData 40 60 40 65 40 70 40 75 B 10 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Defining Custom Sensor Patterns 40 80 40 85 40 90 40 95 40 100 40 105 40 110 40 115 40 120 50 120 50 115 50 110 50 105 50 100 50 95 50 90 50 85 50 80 50 LO 50 70 50 65 50 60 40 60 EndPatternData Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 11 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns NOTES B 12 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Appendix C IMPORTING FILES INTO STK Overview STK users can create external files of data that can be imported into STK and used to provide reference data for an object These objects must conform to the appropriate file format The sample files shown in this appendix are for illustrative purposes only It is not the purpose of this appendix to indicate the full range of choices or possibilities for a given object External files must be arranged in blocks called Keyword Groups that are set off with the word BEGIN and the group name e g BEGIN Attitude at the start of the block and the word END and the group name e g END Attitude at the end of the block The information contained in the block consists of keywords e g NumberOfAttitudePoints and values e g 3 that are called keyword phrases Therefore a keyword phrase would be NumberOfTorques 20 You can currently import data from the following types of e
350. rio epoch time and the ephemeris format These are described below Table C2 Keywords for Ephemeris file format Keyword ScenarioEpoch NumberOfEphemeris Points dd mmm yyyy hh mm ss s Description Specifies the epoch time for the ephemeris points For example if the scenario epoch is 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 0 a time of 5 5 for a particular ephemeris point would correspond to a time of 1 Jan 1997 00 00 05 5 This entry must precede actual ephemeris data Specifies the number of ephemeris points to follow For example if you enter 1000 here 1000 ephemeris points would be included This entry must precede actual ephemeris data Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Keyword EphemerisECFTimePosVel EphemerisECITimePosVel Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK Description Specifies that the data points that follow are positions and velocities in the ECF frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch x through z are the ECF positions in meters and xdot through zdot are the ECF velocities in meters per second For example 123 456 O O w MMH o Specifies that the data points following are positions and velocities in the J2000 ECI frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch x y and z are the ECI positions in meters and xdot ydot and zdot are the ECI velocities in meters sec 123 456 1 0 2 0 3 0 Q5 0 6 0 7
351. rojection is mathematically based on a cylinder tangent on the equator May have several central meridians Stereographic Projection is geometrically projected onto a plane The point of projection is on the surface of the sphere opposite the point of tangency Directions from the center of the projection are true Hammer Aitoff Variation of the Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area projection that allows for viewing at both hemispheres simultaneously The equal area characteristic of the Lambert projection is mostly preserved This projection is visually similar to the Mollweide projection Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 3 11 The Map Window Example Projection Types Projection types Equidistant Cylindrical and Mercator are shown below e iem eIwispIemel ajajaj 0 gt 0 9 2828 0 NN T mo mom iie uns us wes suse e ara 2 4 4 4 i 0 2 8 2 6 d E N 3 E i Y AS 420 m 3 La 000 Lox 000 Shuttle Time Jen 1997 00 00 00 00 Paused M ors L f D n XA E La 7988 Lon 17058 Shuttle Time 1 Jen 1997 00 00 00 00 Paused Projection types Sinusoidal and Orthographic E My Tutorial
352. roperties AZ El Mask 9 8 Graphics Properties Display Times 9 9 Wo ntirzlaissipccies T 9 10 CODISITel EYES SUN S cedente reper didactica 9 13 Constraints TEMPOA assinei oerte trennt netta teecdectiveceastneses 9 16 Basic Properties Position The fields in the Position tab allow you to specify the location of the facility or target Position AzEIMask Atmosphere Description Position Type Geodetic m4 Latitude 31 1514 deg Longitude 70 6683 deg FT Local Time offset from GMT 18000 000 ser Altitude 0 3796980 nm Use terrain information OK Apply Cancel Help The fields available in the Position tab depend on the Position Type you select You can specify the facility s or target s position by entering the 9 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Facilities amp Targets appropriate values in the fields of this tab or by clicking on the point at which you wish to locate the object in the Map window The local time zone and corresponding time offset from GMT is computed automatically based on time zones spanning 15 in longitude To override the local time zone for the facility or target turn the Local Time Offset from GMT option ON and enter the time offset To specify a local time offset corresponding to Eastern Standard Time enter a value of 5 0 hours If the Use Terrain Information option is ON Altitude is taken from the terrain information specified in t
353. rth s rotation rate can change the length of the day by up to 0 25 milliseconds ms per year however such large changes tend to cancel out over time leaving a residual secular increase of 1 5 ms per century Continental drift occurs at rates of up to 5 centimeters cm per year Chapter Contents Technical NOTES 23 60 aes eke A oe deat tis D 1 FIPOPSalues eto leet rd EN fiordo aos m due at D 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual D 1 HPOP Technical Notes HPOP Values The HPOP uses the following values for various physical constants Table D 1 Physical constants Constant Measured In Gravitational Constant of Earth km sec Gravitational Constant of Sun km sec Gravitational Constant of Moon km sec Equatorial Radius of Earth km Flattening Coefficient of Earth Speed of Light km sec Luminosity of Sun W The HPOP uses the following values for the differences among various astronomical time systems Table D 2 Astronomical time systems The models for atmospheric drag and solar radiation pressure use the following default values for the coefficients of drag and solar radiation pressure D 2 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual HPOP Technical Notes Table D 3 Coefficients of drag and solar radiation pressure Coefficient Value G coeff of drag 2 0 C coeff of solar radiation pressure 2 0 These coefficients are defined by the following expressions for the accelerations due to drag and
354. s Resolution du Resolution constraints limit access based on sensor characteristics and the quality of the inview Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 25 gt AA Sensors Enter the minimum and maximum Ground Sample Distance in the units of measure specified at the scenario level The Ground Sample Distance is the smallest size of an object on the ground that could be detected by the sensor It applies to facilities and targets It is based upon the access geometry and the physical attributes of the sensor as defined in the basic properties of the sensor 12 26 Satellite Tool Kit amp User s Manual 13 USING STK TOOLS Overview To assist in satellite and systems analysis STK offers various tools that can be used to manipulate and display the data contained in individual objects These tools are separate from the properties of the object and include such functions as calculating access between objects computing lighting conditions for an object creating reports and graphs using the satellite database to import satellites calculating a vehicle or sensor swath and generating a walker constellation You can also remove accesses from all objects in the scenario and show or hide the Map window STK tools are available through the Tools menu Some of the tools can only be used for certain objects For instance swath can only be used for vehicles and sensors it is grayed out in the pull down menu if another object is select
355. s Map Attributes tab are used If OFF STK ignores the settings for the scenario Show Label Only available if the Inherit Settings feature is turned OFF If this feature is ON the star or planet label displays in the Map window If OFF the star or planet only appears as a marker and no name appears in the Map window It is best to use one marker style for a class of objects so that you can easily view differences between one type of object and another For instance you may want to always use the circle marker style for a star and the square marker style for a planet regardless of the scenario open Satellite Tool KitO Users Manual 11 5 Stars amp Planets NOTES 11 6 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 2 SENSORS Overview Sensors and sensor performance are a major concern for satellite systems engineers and integrators who analyze and design current and future systems In STK the sensor s field of view must be defined and its orientation relative to its parent object must be specified Sensors can be used to represent such equipment as optical or radar sensors receiving or transmitting antennas and lasers They can also be used to define another object s field of view Although sensors are objects they are subordinate to or subobjects of vehicles targets or facilities When you change the properties of a sensor during an STK session none of the changes are saved to the sensor s f
356. s commonly used in gag of Perigee 0 0000 deg general perturbation theories The element n Raan 1397281 deg set consists of three conjugate angle action L y 7557836443538704 pairs The angles are represented by lower c v 155789644393e 04 case letters and the conjugate actions are H y 2 302717559760 03 represented by upper case letters The delaunay variables coordinate type is only available when an inertial coordinate system is selected There are two options for the representation of each action variable The default representation gives the canonical actions used in Hamilton s equations of motion The other representation which divides the actions by Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 9 PRO Advanced Analysis Satellites the square root of the central body gravitational constant yields a geometric version of the Delaunay set that is independent of the central body o Lis related to the two body orbital energy 6 Gis the magnitude of the orbital angular momentum o His the Z component of the orbital angular momentum The above components are expressed in terms of distance squared divided by time where distance is measured in standard units and time is measured in seconds Mixed Spherical Coordinate Type Advanced Analysis Module Mixed Spherical coordinates are a variation of the spherical elements combining Earth fixed Longitude 99 3792 deg p
357. s from TAI by the number of leap seconds which have been accumulated The conversion between the Julian Date based on UTC and Julian Ephemeris Date as of Jan 1 1996 when 30 leap seconds have been accumulated is Julian Ephemeris Date Julian Date 32 184 30 86400 0 There are three possible units values for this file au day Km sec and m sec These units specify the units in the data and are themselves designated by the Units keyword The planetary ephemeris data is specified in a Sun centered inertial coordinate system for which the axes are in alignment with the J2000 coordinate system A sample planetary file is shown below Listing C4 Sample Planetary Ephemeris File Format stk v 3 0 Begin Ephemeris Units au day umberOfEphemerisPoints 30 EphemerisJ2000SciJedPosVel Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual C 17 Importing Files into STK 2449652 500708 3 1997092e 00 4 0216144e 00 1 6458850e 00 8 0130291e 13 0124296e 13 2 3437952e 13 2449653 500708 3 1937244e 00 4 0253524e 00 1 6476330e400 8 0210979e 0022715e 13 2 3396376e 1 2449654 500708 3 1877337e 00 4 0290828e 00 1 6493780e 00 8 0291527e 13 9921028e 13 2 3354751e 13 2449655 500708 3 1817370e 00 4 0328056e 00 1 6511199e400 8 0371935e 9819235e 13 2 3313078e 13 2449656 500708 3 1757343e 00 4 0365207e 00 1 6528586e 00 8 0452202e 13 9717336e 13 2 3271355e 13 2449657 500708 3 16972558e 00 4 0402283e 00 1 6545943e 00 8 0532330e
358. s lt cia 3 18 Animation and its Relationship to Vehicle Tracks sss 3 18 STKAPPECATION ar pace Basic Properties STK Save Prefs sss eee 4 2 Basic Properties IPC Preferences sssssssse eee 4 3 Basic Properties Online Operations ssss nano cono rana 4 5 SCENARIOS ecoute TE IE EM NEE EE Basic Properties Setting the Time Period sss 5 2 Basic Properties Setting Animation Options sss 5 4 Basic Properties Setting Units of Measure sssssssseene 5 7 Entering Wits im Text Fields 2 22 inn tee be trien tes 5 11 Basic Properties Setting Default Databases 5 11 Basi Properties Tertalt s serico oet A te 5 12 Adding Terrain Elevation Data sss 5 13 Graphics Properties Global Attributes 5 14 Graphics Properties Sun Lighting 5 16 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual iii Table of Contents Basic Properties OTDID seta it ee t teet y t EE iii 6 3 Two Body J2 Perturbation amp J4 Perturbation Propagators 6 3 OTE EPOC Usa oet festi atc lees ree Me ns eee aco rue 6 4 Coordinate EPOCH std todita dida 64 Coordinate YPE a Ads 64 Coordinate Systems Staridarclo aco tere pil 6 12 Coordinate Systems Advanced Analysis Module sess 6 13 Sp cial CODUOFIS aiii cone deter tree di Slee deca 6 14 FIPOP Propagator MOdLI iiis trio ER ERU Trete Pet Pe ee
359. s odio oerte aeee den 17 9 STK Help Topics STK offers a comprehensive on line Help system to assist you in performing tasks and functions in STK The Help system provides information about STK features as well as instructions for using STK functions and tools Selecting an HMTL Browser For UNIX STK s Help files are provided in HTML hypertext mark up language format When you install STK you are asked to select the internet Browser application of choice Netscape Mosaic etc This application is then used to launch the Help files in STK whenever you request Help from within STK You don t have to be connected to the internet to use the Browser but you do need a Browser to view the HTML Help files Most workstations now ship with a Browser If you don t have a Browser you can 17 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Using the STK Help Menu purchase Netscape Navigator at a local computer store or you can download a shareware version of Netscape at www netscape com Opening Help from the Browser Window To display Help files from the Browser window select STK Help Topics from the Help menu at the top right hand corner of the window If you have an add on module such as Comm or Coverage Help files are listed as separate items in the Help menu Opening Help from a Property Window If you need to open the Help system from any Property window use the Help button located on the bottom right hand side of any Property win
360. s of the 10 7 cm solar flux F and the 20 and nominal predictions of the geomagnetic index 10 7 A respectively The file may contain any number of data points but the Lifetime tool only uses the first 250 this corresponds to 20 years 10 months worth of data If the Lifetime calculations continue past the last data point in the solar flux file the 11 year solar cycle is assumed to repeat as many times as necessary Listing C 17 Sample solar flux data file 1997 1 1998 1 1985 6 13 1997 1 98 1 79 9 18 5 12 6 1997 2 98 8 78 3 17 8 12 6 C 38 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK 1997 3 100 0 77 4 16 9 12 6 1997 4 100 4 76 9 16 4 12 5 1997 5 98 3 76 6 16 6 12 6 1997 6 9552 76 3 16 8 12 7 1997 7 92 3 76 0 17 0 12 5 1997 8 91 0 75 6 LIAS 12 4 1997 9 91 4 Tod L776 12 1 1997 10 91 6 73 8 MES 12 0 1997 11 91 2 132 l3 11 7 1997 12 90 8 72 6 16 8 11 6 1998 1 90 2 17249 16 0 11 9 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual C 39 Importing Files into STK NOTES C40 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Appendix D HPOP TECHNICAL NOTES Technical Notes Unpredictable Earth motions can t be modeled at the present time They include polar motion irregular variations in the Earth s rotation rate and continental drift Polar motion causes the poles to wander in irregular circles in a region approximately 30 m square taking about a year to complete each circle Irregular variations in the Ea
361. s that a Sequence keyword precedes the angles so that the axes of rotation can be specified Specifies that the data points following are rotation angles about the inertial axes where ttttt ttt Is the time in seconds relative to the epoch and yaw pitch and roll specify the rotation angles about the inertial Z Y and X axes respectively For example 123 456 10 0 20 0 30 0 The AttitudeTimeYPRAngles format requires that a Sequence keyword precedes the angles so that the axes of rotation can be specified C5 Importing Files into STK C6 Keyword AttitudeTimeECIVector Description Specifies that the data points following specify a vector in the ECI frame where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch and v1 through v3 are the three components of the vector This format is primarily used for atmospheric vehicles where the pointing direction is known and orientation about the pointing vector may be assumed The vector specifies the orientation of the body X axis in the ECI frame The body is then rotated to constrain the body Z axis to provide the minimum angle relative to nadir For example 123 456 1 0 0 0 0 0 The AttitudeTimeEClVector format doesn t require a Sequence keyword Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual AttitudeTimeECF Vector Keyword Importing Files into STK Description Specifies that the data points following specify a vector in the ECF frame where ttttt
362. s the instances of all classes within a scenario Each class of object is associated with a particular icon for easy identification the objects appear in the Browser window in a hierarchical form At the top level is the application followed by the scenario and the objects contained in that scenario An open or closed folder icon amp appears to the left of some objects indicating that you can collapse or expand the object tree of Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 2 3 User Interface the item selected to hide or view subobjects In the lower portion of the Browser window is a group of icons representing each of the object classes in STK To create a new object for your scenario click on the correct icon in this portion of the window then name the new object in the top portion of the window The Browser window enables you to manipulate the objects being displayed An object is selected when its name is highlighted At the top of the Browser window are five pull down menus Files Properties Edit Tools Windows and Help Options available in the menu bar are discussed in the following sections of this chapter and in individual chapters as they pertain to an object The Help function is available in the Browser window and as a button in individual Property windows If an option can t be performed for the selected object that option appears in light gray type in the pull down menu and is said to be grayed out Figure 2 1
363. sage Echo Specifies whether IPC should echo incoming messages to the user application When ON you can determine which message IPC is currently processing Verbose If ON this parameter allows IPC to respond with detailed information via standard output about connections and message traffic Specifies the type of connection to accept UnixSocket connection is restricted for use of the machine on which STK is running UNIX operating system on SUN and SGI only TCPSocket connections to be used over the network Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual STK Application Basic Properties Online Operations The Online tab sets the online access preferences to be used within STK It enables you to download databases TLE files and other data from AGT s web site SFK Basic Properties Save Press ic Online FT Allow Online Operations HTTP Proxy W Use Proxy Server Port fo Web Browser Browser Name 91 OK apply Cancel Help The fields available in this tab are discussed in the table following Table 4 3 Online preferences Option Description On Off If ON you can perform automatic updates of databases during an STK session Allow Online Operations If the Use Proxy option is ON specify the correct Server and Port information Use this option if your internet access 1s via a firewall HTTP Proxy Specify the location of the executable to be used t
364. satellite database C 24 Listing C 8 Example of stkActiveTLE tce file for the satellite database C 25 Listing C 9 Example of stkActiveTLE gd file C 26 Listing CTO THE Fle FORMU e eh ottiene aetas tintas C 28 Listing C 11 Example of country and city type file ssssssseseeeeese C31 Listing C 12 Example of stkCityDb gd file C32 Listing C 13 Example of stkFacility gd file C 33 Listing C F4 Example of stkFacllity gd flle teret C 34 Listing C 15 Example of stkStarDb bc file C 36 Listing C 16 Example of stkStarDb gd file C 37 Listing C 17 Sample solar flux data file ssssssssse C 38 XX Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual INTRODUCTION Overview This manual provides instructions and descriptions of the functions available in Satellite Tool Kit STK a set of satellite analysis software tools developed by Analytical Graphics Inc Instructions for installing STK software were shipped separately Chapter Contents Who Should Use This Manual aers id a e d 1 2 How This Manual Is Organized ssssssse cana 1 2 Conventions Used in This Manual ssssssss onteien 1 8 STKProfessiorial Eeat res tocando ere Re rer geese 1 9 Advanced Analysis i fen erbe dfe eee 1 9 High Precision Orbit Propagator HPOP sss 1 11 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 1 Introduction Long term Orbit Predictor L
365. se set at the scenario level The Show Pass Labels setting doesn t appear when the satellite is defined as a rocket regardless of whether Inherit Settings are ON or OFF The Show Elset Numbers option appears only if satellite was propagated with the MSGP4 propagator Graphics Properties Pass The fields in this tab allow you to control the display of satellite pass graphics in the Map window 6 42 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Table 6 20 Options in the Pass tab Field Description Show All If ON the entire ground track for the satellite is displayed in the Map window You must enable either Show All or Show Pass From To To hide all satellite pass graphics turn OFF the Inherit Settings option then turn OFF the ground track on the satellite s Attributes tab Show Pass If ON the portion of the ground track within the specified From To range displays in the Map window Enter the beginning and end pass numbers Visible Sides Choose to display the entire pass only the ascending side or only the descending side in the Map window Also applies to the display of satellite swaths and access as well as animation graphics Leading Trailing Choose to display the satellite s lead and trail ground tracks in Ground Track terms of a specified time in seconds a percentage a quarter a half full all none or one pass only The leading and trailing portions of the ground track are determined based on
366. select You can either set the position of the centroid manually by using the fields displayed or you can direct STK to calculate the centroid position automatically by turning the Auto Compute Centroid option ON If ON only the Altitude fields are available for input To define a local time for the area target turn the Local Time Offset from GMT optoin ON and enter the time offset To enter a local time corresponding to Fastern Standard Time enter a value of 5 0 hours Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 10 3 Area Target Geodetic Position If you select Geodetic the following fields are available Table 10 1 Geodetic area target fields Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The geodetic latitude of a point is the angle between the normal to the reference ellipsoid and the equatorial plane Longitude Measured in degrees from 360 0 to 360 0 Altitude Altitude values of the object above or below the reference ellipsoid Altitude is measured along the normal to the surface of the ellipsoid and is expressed in the scenario s unit of measure for distance Spherical Position If you select Spherical the following fields are available Table 10 2 Spherical area target options Field Description Latitude Measured in degrees from 90 0 to 90 0 The spherical latitude is the angle of the position vector above the X Y equatorial plane Longitude Measured in degrees fr
367. sions on the Path tab are performed assuming two body motion 6 14 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Option Description Secularly Precessing Remains constant in shape and size but changes orientation in a continuous consistent manner If ON the conversions between Semimajor Axis nodal Period and Mean Motion considers the precession of the orbit In this way you can accurately specify nodal periods in the J2 and J4 propagators to assist in the design of orbits with strict period requirements or repeating ground tracks HPOP Propagator Module The High Precision Orbit Propagator HPOP can handle circular elliptical parabolic and hyperbolic orbits at distances ranging from the surface of the Earth to the orbit of the Moon and beyond although orbits around the Moon itself are not currently supported The HPOP propagator uses the same orbital elements as those required by the Two Body J2 and J4 propagators For more information about the fields available for the HPOP propagator refer to page 6 4 of this chapter Technical notes about the HPOP propagator are also available as Appendix D of this manual Force Models The Force Models button of the Orbit tab allows you to set advanced options for the HPOP propagator Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 15 PRO HPOP Satellites Earth Gravity Drag Maximum Degree 21 F Use Maximum Order 21 Area Mass Ratio m m kg
368. small Step Size over a long period of time the time STK requires to generate the report or graph is significantly increased To display actual times turn the Use Ephemeris Steps option ON This option is useful when reporting external ephemeris If this option is ON you can t enter a Step Size To print the time intervals for easy reference turn the Write Intervals to Report option ON You can also change the Step Size used Managing Report Graph Styles A number of functions available through the STK Report Graph Tool window are the same for both reports and graphs These functions are described briefly in the table following Table 15 1 STK report graph tool functions Field Description Add Inserts a style that doesn t appear in the Styles list When you add a style STK copies the style file to your local location if it isn t currently saved in your local Styles directory Remove Removes a style from the Style list Although the style no longer appears in the Styles list you can retrieve it by using the Add button 15 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Reports amp Graphs Field Description Make Copy Copies an existing style New Creates a new style Change Changes the name of the selected style to that of the text entered in the text box beneath the Styles list Report Window A number of standard report styles were shipped with your STK system You can also customize a style to meet your needs
369. sor The fields available in the Pointing tab depend on the Pointing Type you select Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 12 9 Sensors Fixed Sensor Pointing Orientation Method The fields available in the Fixed field depend on the Orientation Method you select 12 10 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Sensors Table 12 3 Orientation methods Orientation Method Description AzEl Quaternion Euler Angles YPR Angles To point a sensor relative to its parent object enter the azimuth and elevation of the boresight These angles are measured in the body fixed coordinate system of the parent object e Elevation Defined as the angle between the boresight vector and the body fixed X Y plane measured as positive in the direction of the body fixed Z axis Azimuth Dependent upon the parent class see section immediately following About Boresight Choose between Hold and Rotate see the next table Specify the vector and scalar components of the Quaternion Specify Euler Angles A B and C and select a Sequence of Rotation Specity Yaw Pitch and Roll Angles The About Boresight field which appears when you choose Az El Orientation Method presents the following options Table 124 About Boresight settings Setting Rotate Description Rotation about the sensor s Z axis followed by rotation about the new Y axis In visual terms rotates the sensor pattern s general orientation
370. sor SM ee ake ke eT es CE TU a 13 25 Walker Constellation acta isd otto ente i fee 13 26 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Using STK Tools REMOVE ACCESSES 2 sss eres Le dd e E toes res 13 29 Close Approach Tool Module sss 13 29 Tirrie Period iua c tee Sect he ese t cede fate 13 31 ACCESS CONSTANT is ecc toda 13 31 SearchiGoristrelmb de O IAS 13 32 Advanced QDUOMS 2 cisscssededics tevidescadocenbs yeceseasetecssbedesdensadecveannatedaatese 13 32 Computing Close Approaches sssss ee 13 34 Export Shapenle TOON sir ies orbe pecore educa bae tentes eet bes 13 35 Change lco IOoli ei o eem et 13 35 Orbit Wize Cis 3 ice eoe te ee BA PO EEUU tete edes 13 36 Access STK allows you to determine the times one object can access or see another object In addition you can impose constraints on accesses between objects to define what constitutes a valid access These constraints are defined as properties of the objects between which accesses are being calculated STK can calculate access from vehicles facilities targets area targets and sensors to all objects including planets and stars within the scenario Calculating Access between Objects To calculate accesses highlight an object in the Browser window select Access from the Tools menu An Access window appears Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 3 Using STK Tools m Associated Objects Graphics JT Show Line oe Animate Hi
371. sor pattern onto the graph paper read off a suitable number of points to describe the shape of the pattern Each point is specific by r the radial distance from the center and theta the angle measured from straight up clockwise Table 1 below shows the polar coordinates derived from our example Table B 1 Polar coordinates r theta 83 91 60 0 83 91 70 0 83 91 80 0 83 91 90 0 83 91 100 00 83 91 110 0 83 91 120 0 119 175 120 0 119 175 110 0 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual B 5 Defining Custom Sensor Patterns r theta 119 175 100 0 119 175 90 0 119 175 80 0 119 175 70 0 119 175 60 0 5 Create the Custom Pattern file Now that you have the polar coordinates for your custom sensor pattern create a new file in your STK Database STKdb directory The file name should be a descriptive name of 20 characters or less 6 Once the file has been created open it using a standard text editor and enter the information in the format shown in the sample custom sensor pattern file below Notice that the first point is repeated as the last point so that the sensor pattern is closed When you finish close and save the file x We recommend using a convention such as a Pattern extension for sensor pattern files A iy Hint Listing B 1 STK Custom Pattern File stk v 3 0 ReferenceDistance 100 0 NumberPoints 15 PatternData 83 91 60 0 83 91 70 0 83 91 80 0 83 91 90 0 83 91 100 00 83 91 110 0 83 91 120 0
372. specified value usually 0 5 or 10 Free Space Loss Signal attenuation that would occur ona link between an isotropic antenna on the surface of the Earth and one on board a satellite in the absence of any propagation effects such as atmospheric absorption diffraction and obstruction Frequency The number of cycles or completed alternations per unit time of a wave or oscillation Geocentric The latitude and longitude of a point on the Earth s surface determined from the geocentric vertical Geodetic The latitude and longitude of a point on the Earth s surface determined from the geodetic vertical normal to the specified spheroid Geostationary Orbit A circular posigrade orbit in the equatorial plane of the Earth with an orbital period of exactly one sidereal day The radius of a geostationary orbit is 6 6107 equatorial Earth radii Graphics Properties Properties menu This window allows the user to specify characteristics of the selected object as displayed in the Map window Grazing Altitude The distance from the Earth s surface to the line of sight between two vehicles at the point where their intersection is perpendicular Grazing Angle Used to describe how high one vehicle appears above the edge of the Earth relative to another vehicle Measured relative to the primary vehicle as the angle between the Earth limb and the secondary vehicle Great Arc Vehicle that follows a point by point pat
373. splays field of view swaths from nadir for a selected ground elevation angle or for a half angle relative to nadir or a surface distance The swath is always centered about the ground track and graphical displays of the vehicle swath can be enhanced by cross hatching which occurs at the vehicle data sample points The lines only apply to the left and right sides of the vehicle at a particular point in the orbit and not to the fore or aft of the vehicle Ground Elevation 4 0 000 deg Options No Graphics wv Edge Limits v Filled Limits om OK Apply Cancel Help _ __ MP P J al Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 13 23 PRO Advanced Analysis Note Using STK Tools The fields available in the Swath window are discussed in the table following Table 13 5 Vehicle swath options Field Description Swath type Choose among Ground Elevation Specifies the vehicle elevation angle as measured from the ground to the vehicle For example a 0 elevation angle would be the full field of view from the vehicle s perspective The easiest way to visualize this is from a ground based perspective For a 1 elevation angle an observer standing on the swath limit looking toward the vehicle would just see the vehicle above the horizon For a 45 angle an observer would see the vehicle halfway up in the sky and for a 90 angle
374. sssss 8 3 Table 8 2 Ballistic propagator elements sssssssssssm 8 4 T ble 8 3 Attitude types x a ecc e e Dt st D o Es 8 6 Table 8 4 Options in the Attributes tab 8 8 Table 9 1 Geodetic facility target options ssssssss HH 9 3 Table 9 2 Spherical facilityZtargetOptlons eer ce ee tette nitet 9 4 Table 9 3 Cartesian facility target options ssssssssssm rccnccinn 9 4 Table 9 4 Cylindrical facility target options ssssssss non cnnnnnnn 9 5 Table 9 5 Geocentric facility target options 2 0 0 teeter tener nccnnncnn 9 5 xvi Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Table of Contents Table 9 6 Facility target graphic attribUtes 0 ceteris 9 7 Table 9 7 Facility target azimuth elevation mask graphics ees 9 8 Table 9 8 Facility target basic constraints sssssssssssR 9 11 Table 9 9 Facility target Sun constraints tte tente rente es 9 14 Table 9 10 Facility target temporal constraints 0 eee 9 17 Table 10 1 Geodetic area target fields tte cere te dans 10 4 Table 10 2 Spherical area target options sssssssssssssss 10 4 Table 1 0 3 Cartesian area target Opt S oerte cete Potes 10 5 Table 10 4 Cylindrical area target options sssssssssH nn rccnnn 10 5 Table 10 5 Geocentric area target options sssssssssssssem 10 6 Table 10 6 Area target atriDbUtes cim er Tn teet C tt mes 10 7
375. st in the search if you know only a portion of the 3 c criteria You can use the wildcards anywhere in the entry Hin t Satellite Tool Kit Users Manual 14 15 Search Criteria Harvard Revised Number Henry Draper Number SAO Catalog Number 5 Fundamental Catalog Common Name Visual Magnitude Min Max Right Ascension Min Max Declination Min Max Constellation Name City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Table 14 8 Star database options Description Used to identify stars in the Bright Star Catalogue BSC which contains basic astronomical and astrophysical data for stars brighter than magnitude 6 5 Used to identify stars using the Henry Draper Catalogue which is a compilation of stellar spectra Used to identify stars using the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory SAO catalog which contains astrometric positional data for stars to an approximate magnitude of 9 0 Used to identify stars using the Basic Fifth Fundamental Catalog FK5 which contains position and proper motion data for stars of magnitude 7 0 or brighter An extension to FK5 is in progress data for 1000 stars of magnitudes 5 0 to 7 0 and 2000 stars of magnitude 6 5 to 7 5 will be included The common name of the star The minimum and or maximum search limits for visual magnitude The minimum and or maximum search limits for right ascension The minimum and or maximum search limits for declination Spe
376. stellation Walker 13 26 Constraints Advanced 6 54 7 10 Area Targets 10 7 Basic 647 Satellite 6 47 Sensors 12 21 Sun 650 Content 15 7 15 15 16 6 16 11 Continental Drift D 1 Contour Graphics Level Adding 6 46 8 11 LevelAttributes 647 8 12 Contour Levels 646 8 11 Contours 645 Launch Vehicles 8 10 Missiles 8 10 Coordinate Epoch 64 Coordinate Systems 6 12 Alignment at Epoch 6 13 B1950 6 13 Fixed 6 12 6 29 Fmean Equinox 6 13 Inertial 6 29 J2000 6 12 Mean of Date 6 13 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Mean of Epoch 6 13 True of Date 6 13 True of Epoch 6 13 Coordinate Types 64 Cartesian 6 8 Classical 5 Delaunay Variables 69 Equinoctial
377. t can be used to prevent a communications link between the two objects from getting too far down into the atmosphere which might degrade the quality of the link Other object Aircraft Grazing Anale Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 7 11 Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles 7 12 Fields Min Max Ground Elevation Angle Min Max Exclusion Zone Description Constraint applies to Measured with respect to targets or facilities F T The elevation angle is measured relative to the target or facility as the angle between the local horizontal and the direction of the aircraft Specify the minimum and maximum latitude F T R D V and longitude at which access is to be constrained An exclusion zone is formed based on the values entered Refer to Figure 6 3 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual LAUNCH VEHICLES amp MISSILES Overview This chapter describes nonorbiting vehicles and provides instructions for setting the basic and graphics properties as well as the access constraints of vehicles It also provides instructions for manipulating vehicles to obtain the information you need for analysis and problem solving Chapter Contents Basic Froperties Traje ont i la 8 2 Simple Ascent Propagator Launch Vehicles 8 2 Ballistic Propagator Missiles sss cia cina conan 8 3 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 8 1 Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Exte mal ProPdg
378. t of A the satellite For this reason we recommend that lower degrees and order be specified Note when generating orbits for basic studies Advanced Settings Use the Advanced Settings button to further define the drag model to be used for calculations 6 20 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Atmospheric Density Model Exponential Model ai I Use Osculating Altitude Exponential Density Model Parameters Maximum Drag Altitude 77570 nm Reference Density 0 630 Reference Height 5 400 nm Density Weighting Factor 1 000 Scale Height 5 400 nm OK Apply Cancel Help Use either the 1976 Standard Atmosphere Model or the Exponential Density Model to calculate atmospheric density If you choose the Exponential model use the following formula to calculate the atmospheric density at any given altitude where p equals the density at the user specified altitude h equals the user specified altitude po equals the reference density h equals the reference height H equals the scale height If you use the 1976 model choose to turn the Use Osculating Altitude option ON to use a short period variation due to J2 perturbations when calculating altitude Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 6 21 Satellites Use the Maximum Drag Altitude option to specify the altitude above which drag calculations aren t considered Use the Density Weighting Factor to specify the sca
379. the Map window If it is OFF contour graphics are removed from the Map window Level Adding Choose either Start Stop Step or Explicit add method Start Stop Step Method Enter a Start contour value a Stop value and a Step value Use the Add button to generate contour values beginning with the Start value and incrementing by the Step until the Stop value is exceeded Explicit Enter individual contour values Use the Add button to add the new contour value to the list of existing contour values 6 46 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Level Attributes Each contour value has a color attribute that can be modified individually You can remove contour values from the list by highlighting the level s of choice and using the Remove or Remove All buttons Constraints Basic The fields in this tab allow you to impose standard constraints for the satellite Basic Sun Temporal Advanced Azimuth Angle Elevation Angle Range E Mim oonodeg Min oo000deg Min 0 0000 nm F Mex 550 000 aeg F Max 90 0000 deg F Max 21598 2721382 n Azimuth Rate Elevation Rate Range Rate m min z6887640178 n FO Max 26997640179 om Angular Rate Altitude Propagation Delay E Min 5 0000 aeg sec E Min 1 0000 nm E Min 0 00 sec F Max 50000 deg sec W Mex 1079513606811 W Mex 3600 00 sec JT Line of Sight OK apply Cancel Help
380. the dynamic display for that Warning same style also changes If you wish to keep the original style but modify it use the Make Copy function This is also true of graphs and strip charts Managing Dynamic Display Strip Chart Styles A number of functions available through the STK Dynamic Display Strip Chart Tool window are the same for both Dynamic Display Reports and Strip Charts These functions are described briefly in the table following Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 16 3 Dynamic Displays Strip Charts Table 16 1 STK dynamic display strip chart tool functions Field Description Add Inserts a dynamic display or strip chart style that doesn t appear in the Styles list When you add a style STK copies the style file to your local location if it isn t currently saved in your local directory Remove Removes a style from the Style list Although the style no longer appears in the Styles list you can retrieve it by using the Add button Make Copy Copies an existing style New Creates a new style Change Changes the name of the selected style to that of the text entered in the text box beneath the Styles list Dynamic Display Window The Dynamic Display tool makes it easy to view and analyze data A number of standard dynamic display formats were shipped with your STK system You can also customize a dynamic display to meet your needs Dynamic displays can be created for vehicles facilities targets an
381. the orientation of your satellite 6 28 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites orsi Atitude Pass Break Mass Description Attitude Type Selection Spinning sl Orientation Type PR Angles 4 AB Spin Rate Revs min ooo Align Offset 3 Pitch ooon deg Spin Offset ooon deg Constrain Offset 8000 dog Roll 0 0000 aeg Epoch 1 Jan 1997 00 00 00 00 Sequence YF L4 Precomputed Attitudes JE Attitude File None e Integrated Attitude m Target Painting JE Use Target Painting Attitude Select Targets OK apply cancel Help Attitude Type Selection Each attitude type described in the following two tables has its own set of associated input parameters Most attitude profiles are generated through the use of two vectors represented in the satellite body fixed coordinate system and two vectors represented in the inertial coordinate system The first vector is referred to as the alignment vector the second as the constraint vector The inertial to body fixed quaternion is constructed so that the representations of the alignment vectors in the body fixed and inertial coordinate systems are aligned The quaternion is constructed so that the angle between the constraint vectors in the body fixed and inertial systems is minimized while the colinear status of the alignment vectors is maintained The definitions of the alignment and constraint vectors for the di
382. the selected object Pull down Menu Click the menu of your choice in the menu bar at the top of the Browser window to display pull down menus of available options Four pull down menus are available Files Properties Tools and Help Radio Button Diamond shaped button that allow the user to select one and only one item in a group of radio buttons Range The linear distance between two points Range Rate The component of the spacecraft velocity in the radial direction either toward or away from the observer Rate A change in some quantity over time Real Time Run animation in real time in accordance with the user s on board real time clock Rectangular Coordinate System A coordinate system in which positions are specified by distances from the origin along the three mutually orthogonal axes Refresh Delta Time lapse between refresh updates Actual refresh delta is limited by the minimum time necessary to redraw the screen and varies with processor performance graphics hardware options and scenario complexity Remove Files menu Use this command to remove an object from the current scenario Resolution Sensor Basic Constraints Properties The degree to which two closely spaced objects can be distinguished as separate Resolution increases with increasing aperture larger antenna and larger telescopes have better resolution than smaller ones Retrograde Orbit An orbit in which the projection of the sat
383. time of a satellite and provides the corresponding date of decay It should be emphasized that although the Lifetime computations are based on sophisticated orbital theory and accurate environment models the result is still an estimate Due to the seemingly random 10 variation in atmospheric density and because of the difficulty in accurately predicting solar activity satellite lifetimes can t be determined with an accuracy better than 10 of the actual lifetime Furthermore assumptions and simplifications made in order to produce a practical computer implementation of the lifetime theory introduce an additional degree of uncertainty in the final result The Lifetime tool is 13 20 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Using STK Tools not intended to determine an exact time of decay a specific geographical impact point or to what degree a satellite might survive its descent through the atmosphere Report Use the Report button to display a summary of the satellite s orbital elements over the course of its lifetime Each element is sampled at perigee passage thus the mean true and eccentric anomalies are always zero and aren t displayed Figure 13 8 Sample Lifetime report summarizing Keplerian elements 4 Jun 1997 18 43 56 Satellite Iss Orbit Lifetine Orbit Count Eccentricity Inclination deg Height of Apogee km Height of Perigee kn 0 00000001 28 500000 500 039369 500 039231 0 00000553 28 499863 499 885566 499
384. tion Units Database Environment Terrain Description Start Time 1 Nov 1997 00 00 00 00 End Time 4 1 Nov 1987 04 00 0000 Time Step af ETE Refresh Delta ot use OK Apply Cancel Help Formats for all time related fields are dependent upon the Time Units set at the scenario level Refer to page 5 7 Note These settings are saved with the scenario Table 5 2 Animation options Field Description Start Time The time at which you wish to begin animation End Time Specify time of animation Loop at Time End Time The time at which animation ends Loop Time The time at which the animation loops back to the Start Time If this option is OFF animation continues until you pause or reset the animation Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 5 5 Scenarios Field Time Step X Real Time Real Time Refresh Delta High Speed Description Specify the time lapse between animation steps Time Step Amount of time for each animation step For example if the Time Step field were set to 60 seconds all vehicles in the scenario move forward 60 seconds each time the screen is refreshed X Real Time The number of times faster than real time at which you wish the scenario to animate RealTime The scenario animates in real time in accordance with your computer s internal clock Specify the amount of time between screen refresh updates Refres
385. tk com 660 American Ave Suite 200 FAX 1 610 337 3058 Users Group users stk com King of Prussia PA 19406 Web www stk com Comments comments stk com OK Cancel Help Table 17 3 License window options Field Description HostID This number is generated automatically during installation and can t be altered Type Select Demo or Permanent depending on the kind of licenses being entered STK 4 0 licenses are Permanent Update Choose either Passwords Load from File Specify the correct file name for the licenses If you obtained passwords via e mail the e mail contains information about where to save and what to name the passwords file Enter Manually Use the Product Password Table in this window to manually enter Passwords and Host ID or Expiration Dates oo ocr Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 17 7 Using the STK Help Menu Field Description Product The table contains a list of all STK products that are available as well Passwords as any valid licenses that have been entered To enter new passwords manually select the product of interest in the product table then enter the Password and if applicable the Expiration Date in the text boxes below the table Use the Update button to apply the licenses Export Passwords to File Export passwords to an ASCII text file Network Passwords You can also enter network passwords using the Load Network Passwords button
386. to choose which map features you wish to see displayed in the Map window To select an item click on the item within the scrollable field so that it is highlighted To remove an item from the list click on the highlighted item again 2 20 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual User Interface Using Accelerator Keys Keyboard accelerators shown on pull down menus and submenus speed up your access to an action Many of the tasks you perform in STK on a frequent or repeating basis can be invoked using keyboard accelerators Options available in and through the menu bar have associated keyboard accelerators if an underlined letter appears in the option s name for example Close or Insert or a key combination appears to the right of the option s name in a pull down menu The key that serves as the Meta key differs from one machine to another but typically has a unique shape such as the diamond on the Sun workstation Meta key or a unique word Alt function on the DEC and IBM workstation Meta keys You can t use Meta Keys if or is ON If you use the Remove command to remove an object from the current scenario without saving the object the object won t be available for other scenarios Table 2 3 Accelerator keys Key Function combination Meta A Displays Access window for selected object Meta B Displays Basic Properties window for selected object Meta C Copies selected text Meta D Sets the current
387. to insert the selected items into the current scenario The Browser and Map windows are updated to display the new cities as facilities or targets p You can insert more than one city at a time If several cities are highlighted they are all A E inserted u Hint Object Description If you load a facility or target using the City Database tool the following information is entered into the object s Long Description field City Name Type e Latitude e Province State Country e ProvinceRank Longitude Population Facility Database STK s Facility Database tool allows you to search for known facilities Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 14 5 City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Facility Database Tutorial Database stkFacility fd E Site Name Latitude Min 90 000 deg Max 30 000 deg Longitude Min 0 000 deg Max 360 000 deg Altitude Min 53 996 nm Max 53 996 nm Network NASA DSN md Perform Search Cancel Help Querying a Database You can perform a facility query using the default database shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search To change the default database enter the correct file in the Database field Once you ve chosen the database enter as many search criteria as possible tO i X Use wildcard entries and to assist in the search if you know only a portion of the Hin t criteria
388. to provide quality products and services that meet your needs and expectations Your comments are an important part of our success If you have any suggestions please contact us via the World Wide web at www stk com or e mail us at info stk com For our reference please include the following information along with your response Product Version Platform O UNIX OPC O VAXNVMS Type Manual Title ID Overall Rating of Manual O Very Good O Good OSatistactoy O Fair O Poor Comments Suggestions Name Title Company Address We appreciate your suggestions and will consider each response carefully Thank you Analytical Graphics Inc 660 American Avenue King of Prussia PA 19406 610 337 3055 800 220 4785 Fax 610 337 3058 E Mail info 9 stk com
389. to the ascending node measured in a right handed sense about the inertial Z axis in the equatorial plane In the case of an equatorial orbit the ascending node is defined to be directed along the reference frame s positive x axis thus Q 0 Longitude of the Ascending Node The Earth fixed longitude where your satellite crosses the inertial equator the intersection of the ground track and the inertial equator from south to north The specified ascending node crossing is assumed to be at or prior to the initial condition of the orbit Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Satellites Element Description Satellite Location Specify a satellite s location within its orbit at epoch e True Anomaly default The angle from the eccentricity vector points toward perigee to the satellite position vector measured in the direction of satellite motion and in the orbit plane e Mean Anomaly The angle from the eccentricity vector to a position vector where the satellite would be if it were always moving at its average angular rate e Eccentric Anomaly An angle measured with an origin at the center of an ellipse from the direction of perigee to a point on a circumscribing circle from which a line perpendicular to the Semimajor Axis intersects the position of the satellite on the ellipse Argument of Latitude The sum of the True Anomaly and the Argument of Perigee Time Past Ascending Node The elapsed time since th
390. to the gravitational potential as the J J and J terms do Rotating Atmosphere If ON the west to east winds induced by atmospheric rotation are included in the perturbations to the orbit Computing Lifetime Once the appropriate values have been set in the Lifetime and Advanced windows use the Compute button to start the lifetime calculations How long the Lifetime tool takes to estimate the satellite s lifetime depends primarily on how high the satellite is at epoch and on the Orbits per Calculation and Gaussian Quadratures parameters A Progress window shows the progress of the Lifetime tool and gives you the opportunity to cancel the computations if necessary The slider bar reaches 100 when the satellite decays The percent of limit progress message reaches 100 when the number of orbits analyzed by Lifetime equals the Orbit Count Limit parameter set in the Advanced window If the percent of limit rapidly and significantly outpaces the slider bar you may want to cancel the computations and increase the Orbit Count Limit Otherwise Lifetime will probably reach the limit before the satellite actually decays Similarly if the slider bar moves very slowly or if the time remaining steadily rises Lifetime may take a while to estimate the orbital lifetime of the satellite Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 13 19 Using STK Tools For MSGP4 satellites the orbital lifetime can be estimated by either the prim
391. top Time ius 183 0 02 20 09 Propagator Ballistic Launch Latitude Geodetic v owwoss Launch Longitude 0 0000 deg Launch Altitude v 0 0000 nm Fixed Delta V 8 2397408207 nm sec Impact Latitude Geodetic y 200000 eg Impact Longitude y 200000 deg Impact Altitude y fe 0000000 nm OK apply Cancel Help Some orbital elements for the Ballistic propagator are linked together and only certain combinations are valid Only the Fixed Delta V option is valid for trajectories specified using impact elevation and azimuth Note Table 8 2 Ballistic propagator elements Elements Description Launch Location first 3 fields Select one of the following two combinations e Launch Geodetic Latitude Launch Longitude and Launch Altitude Launch Geocentric Latitude Launch Longitude Launch Radius STK links these elements in such a way that switching one of them from geodetic to geocentric or vice versa changes the other correspondingly Longitude isn t differentiated along geodetic geocentric lines 8 4 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Launch Vehicles amp Missiles Elements Description Flight Parameters 4 field When you enter a value for one of these elements the system automatically calculates the other values Flight parameters can be specified in one of three ways Fixed Delta V The instantaneous thrust to be applied
392. trip Chart is useful when you wish to visualize dynamic data elements over a period of time Another feature that is useful in analyzing data is the Dynamic Display tool which provides text Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 18 13 Chains Module updates during animation so that you can view changes to selected elements over a period of time For further information on Dynamic Displays and Strip Charts see Chapters 15 and 16 of this manual 18 14 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual APPENDIXA GLOSSARY OF TERMS Accelerator Keys Keys that speed up access to an action performed in STK Identified by an underlined letter in the option s name or a key combination appearing to the right of the option s name in a pull down menu Access The geometric and temporal relationships between objects that meet or exceed the constraints on the objects so that some task requiring both objects can be performed Aitoff See Hammer Aitoff Altitude The distance from an object to the surface of the central body measured positive along an outward normal to the central body surface Angle Unit Specifies the measure of unit to be used when referring to angles Options are degrees and radians Animate The process of displaying the movement of objects within a scenario on the map for a specified period of time Animation A Basic Properties tab that allows the user to set the animation s start time end time loop time ti
393. tude The latitude of the waypoint Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 7 3 Ships Aircraft amp Ground Vehicles Elements Description Longitude The longitude of a waypoint Altitude The altitude of a waypoint Changes in altitude take effect linearly between two waypoints Rate The velocity of the aircraft ground vehicles and ships from the current waypoint to the next Rate changes take place immediately at the waypoint Tum Radius The curvature of the arc between the current waypoint and the next A smaller turn radius produces a sharper curve in the arc Use the Insert Point button to append or insert additional waypoints to the table Use the Modify Point option to change a highlighted waypoint with new position values using the mouse or keyboard You can repeat this process as often as necessary but you must have valid entries in order for each waypoint for the path to be computed The Insert Point button becomes a Modify Point button when you switch Edit Modes to Change Current Item Use the Delete Point button to remove the selected waypoint from the Waypoint table Turn the Update Map Graphics feature ON to display the ground track for the route defined by the waypoints in the Map window as new waypoints are entered and calculated Attitude The Attitude tab of the Basic Properties window for aircraft ground vehicles and ships can be used to specify the orientation of the object 7 4 Sate
394. tude is specified via Euler or Yaw Pitch Roll angles There are 12 possible sequences for Euler angles where 1 2 3 correspond to rotations about the X Y and Z axes respectively The default Euler sequence is 3 1 3 There are six possible sequences for Yaw Pitch Roll where 1 2 3 correspond to rotations about the inertial X Y and Z axes respectively The default sequence is 3 2 1 or Yaw Pitch Roll Specifies that the data points following are unit length quaternions where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch and q1 through q4 specify the four elements of a quaternion where q4 is the scalar component For example 123 456 0 0678338906 0 0000000000 0 0000000000 0 9976966289 The AttitudeTimeQuaternion format doesn t require the Sequence keyword since quaternions don t have a rotation sequence Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Keyword AttitudeTimeEuler Angles AttitudeTimeYPR Angles Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK Description Specifies that the data points following are Euler angles where ttttt ttt is the time in seconds relative to the epoch and rotA through rotC specify the three Euler angles through which you wish to rotate The first rotation is by rotA degrees about the first axis specified by the Sequence keyword The second rotation is by rotB and the third by rot For example 123 456 10 0 20 0 30 0 The AttitudeTimeEulerAngles format require
395. ty information includes exact location population etc 14 2 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite Star Databases Datahase stkCityDb cd Ej City Name Province State Latitude Min 90 000 deg Max 90 000 deg Longitude Min 180 000 deg Max 180 000 deg Country United Kingdom 24 City Type National Capital 24 Perform Search Cancel Help Querying a Database You can perform a city query using the default database shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search To change the database set in the Database tab of the scenario s Basic Properties window enter the correct file in the Database field Once you ve chosen the database enter as many search criteria as possible oa Lal Use wildcard entries and to assist in the search if you know only a portion of the i c criteria You can use the wildcards anywhere in the entry HE t Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 14 3 Note City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Table 14 1 City Database options Search Criteria Description City Name Enter the name of the city for which you wish to search Province State Enter the name of the Province or State in which the city is located Latitude Min Max Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits for latitude Longitude Min Max Enter the minimum and or maximum search limits
396. ude 5 10 Mass 5 9 Power 5 9 Small Distance 5 10 Time 5 8 Universal Time Coordinated UTC 1 12 UnixSocket 24 4 Update Database 14 13 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Index User Manuals Online 1 7 9 Using STK Tools 13 1 UTC Gregorian 5 8 UTC Julian 5 8 Vv Vehicle Attributes 7 6 Graphic Properties Attributes 7 6 Vehicle Tracks 3 18 Vehicles Nonorbiting 7 1 8 1 VerbOse 9 M4 Visible Sides 6 43 Visual Magnitude 14 16 W Walker Constellation 13 26 Waypoints 7 3 Windows Menu 24 2 17 X X Real Time 5 6 XY Graphs 15 16 Y YAW 634 Yaw to Nadir 6 32 YPR Angles 6 34 Z Zoom In 15 13 16 9 Zoom Out 15 13 16 9 Satellite Tool Kitt User s Manual 1 21 NOTES Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual 1 22 We d love to hear from you At AGI we work hard
397. ure 16 3 Asample standard strip chart showing ECF position and velocity data for the ERS1 vehicle Strip Chart ERS ECF Position and Velocity Files Edit Vehicle ERS1 ECF Position amp Velocity Distance Velocity 5000 4000 20007 10 0 1 Nov 198924003 PS y ov 1992 0 00 00 00 4 t vy km seQ vz km seQ Clicked At x El Al Restore Nearest Point X The buttons available in the Strip Chart Data window are described in the table following 16 8 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual Dynamic Displays amp Strip Charts Table 164 Strip Chart data buttons Button Description Zooms in magnifies on a portion of the graph Click this button then click and hold the left mouse button and drag 1t over the portion of the graph you wish to magnify Use this button as many times as needed to increase magnification Restores the strip chart perspective one step at a time You can also click a point in the graph to display its X and Y coordinates as well as the Nearest X and Y Data Points to that point Immediately restores the strip chart to its original size Use the Files menu to refresh close save print and change units of measure for the strip chart Defining Graph Attributes Select the Attributes option in the Edit menu to define the appearance of the chart The options in this window are essential in differentiating among elements for mu
398. us Aquarius Aquila Ara Aries C36 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual as a M ELS G Importing Files into STK Auriga Bootes Caelum Camelopardus Cancer Canes Venatici Canis Major Canis Minor Capricorn aurus Telescopium Triangulum Triangulum Australe Tucana Ursa Major Ursa Minor Vela Virgo Volans Vulpecula END Constellation stkStarDb gd File This is the generic database file It contains information concerning the last update of the database This file is used by the online update option to determine which records to supply This file is in a basic STK data file format Listing C 16 Example of stkStarDb gd file BEGIN DatabaseUpdate Version 1 0 LastUpdate 19970405 E D DatabaseUpdate Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C 37 Importing Files into STK Solar Flux Files The solar flux file used with the Lifetime tool contains predicted values of the monthly mean 10 7 cm solar radiation flux Fi and geomagnetic index A The first line of the file consists of seven numbers Year the data begins Month the data begins Year the data ends Month the data ends Year the predictions were generated Month the predictions were generated and Number of data points lines that follow All dates are UTC Each of the remaining lines contains the year and month day is assumed to be the 15th followed by the 426 and nominal prediction
399. utton to select all items in the list Use the Deselect All button to deselect all of the selected items in the list Other options in the TLE Load Results window are described in the table following Table 14 10 TLE load results options Field Description Auto Propagate If ON ephemeris is propagated using the scenario Time Period and the MSGP4 Propagator Time Step Specifies the interval calculated ephemeris output points Start Stop Time Specifies the temporal boundaries of the vehicle s orbit Create Constellation If ON STK creates a constellation that includes all of the Chains module only satellites you selected Enter the constellation s name in the text box When you re satisfied click the OK button to insert the vehicle s into the current scenario The Browser and Map windows are updated to display the new vehicle s You can insert more than one item at a time If several items are highlighted they are all inserted when you click the OK button Loading a Facility TLE If you choose to load a facility TLE you can perform a TLE load using the default file shipped with STK or you can identify a database of your own to use in the search The file contains Air Force TLE sets for facilities When you choose to load a facility TLE the CrossReference Database option is unavailable 14 20 Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual City Facility Satellite amp Star Databases Open Database Once you ve chosen the TL
400. ve selected the objects that comprise the constellation use the Constellation Objects option to choose one of four constellation criterion The choices available allow you to specify the criteria that will be used when the constellation is combined with other objects in a chain Options are discussed in the table following Table 18 1 Constellation criteria options Option Any of All of At Least N Description EITHER OR criteria Select this if any one object in the constellation meets the needs of a chain for a successful access For example if the constellation is defined as a group of three ground stations A B and C and is built in a chain with a single vehicle results show when the vehicle can access ground station A or ground station B or ground station C AND criteria Select this if all objects in the constellation meet the needs of the chain for a successful access For example results show when the vehicle can access ground station A and ground station B and ground station C called coincident coverage AND OR criteria Select this if at least the specified number of objects in the constellation meet the needs of the chain for a successful access In the text box to the right of the option menu enter the minimum number of objects that must meet the needs of the chain for a successful access For example if the minimum number is set to 2 results show when the vehicle can access ground stations AANDD or Ba
401. whatsoever resulting from loss or use data or profits whether in an action of Satellite Tool Kit Software License Agreement Software License Agreement contract negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software 11 XPM COPYRIGHT BY Copyright 1989 95 GROUPE BULL Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software The Software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose and noninfringement In no event shall Groupe Bull be liable for any claim damages or other liability whether in an action of contract tort or otherwise arising from out of or in connection with the software or the use or other dealings in the software Except as contained in this notice the name of Groupe Bull shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sal
402. without loading it onto your hard disk This data was originally compiled by the U S Geologic Survey from a variety of sources around the world It has been processed and formatted for optimal performance with STK High Resolution Maps This module contains comprehensive very high resolution mapping data for the entire globe The data includes coastlines rivers lakes and political boundaries at approximately 1 arc second or 30 meter resolution This is ideal for visualizing ground tracks and coverage areas over small geographic regions Special data access algorithms have been incorporated to support rapid visualization of localized map data The data was extracted from the 1995 CIA RWDB2 database and requires almost 200 MB of storage It is formatted for optimal performance with STK Additional Resources You ll find the following resources to be helpful in developing and furthering your expertise in using STK Astronautics Primer The Astronautics Primer by Jerry Jon Sellers provides a solid introduction to space It includes an historical perspective a lively Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 1 15 PRO Hi Res Maps Introduction introduction to basic astro concepts with easy to understand examples and discussions of concepts such as access from satellites to ground stations and other objects The Astronautics Primer is available in PDF format and also in Help format STK Quick Start STK s Quick Start Gui
403. x located on the far right of the tool bar displays a text description of any button on the tool bar when you move the cursor over a button Table 3 1 provides an easy reference for tool bar buttons in the Map window Table 3 1 Tool bar buttons Button E Elo lll lla a Function Prints the current Map window excluding window borders and the tool bar to the default printer Decreases the time step Reverses animation one time step Plays the scenario in reverse sequence Pauses the animation sequence at the current time Stops the animation and reset to the beginning of the animation Animates the scenario in forward sequence Moves the scenario forward one step Increases the time step Satellite Tool Kit User s Manual 3 3 The Map Window Button El Function Zooms in on magnifies a portion of the map Click this button then click and hold the left mouse button and drag it over the portion of the map you wish to magnify Click this button as many times as needed to increase magnification of a portion of the map Zooms out to view a larger portion of the map Click this button as many times as needed to see the big picture Measures distance between any two points in the map Click this button then click and drag the mouse between the two points on the map you wish to measure When you release the mouse button a message window appears displaying the distance between the two points th
404. xternal files Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual C1 Warning Importing Files into STK xpm files external ephemeris files attitude files torque files az el files STK database files planet files custom sensor files solar flux files Chapter Contents E2 VEIS ett Mak MUI os i ad o des T e dd e de e non db El Attitude File Fotrriat s tere a ee C3 ACEI FIG ACMI FORMAL cid C8 Custo Sensor Gil FORMAL ssc tonos t dede a tl C9 Ephemeris File Format e ssss rent C 9 Planetary Ephemeris File pe Format ss C 17 TorqueFle to FM uscite reete entente tette C18 Color Bitmap Pixmap bmp xpm File Format sss C 19 Database Elle FOITFPlats eco erret re edet Eder at eren C 20 Satellite Database uctor ttt tr teet e tee ente teet nde C 20 TE FSA o C26 CID DE i oai uie pitt e tot ee rhe tot ec catt id C29 Facility Database ie A EDO deed E32 Star Database Is C34 Solar FW FIGS iiiter intel tates C38 Satellite Tool KitO User s Manual Importing Files into STK Attitude File Format It is often necessary to import external attitude information into STK to model certain unique circumstances The attitude information describes a rotation from the ECI J2000 coordinate frame to the vehicle body frame Keywords aren t case sensitive All angles are in degrees All times are specified in seconds relative to the scenario epoch defined within the
405. y impact orbit decay estimates the gravity model only considers oblateness effects through J Lifetime also models the effects of solar and lunar gravity and solar radiation pressure when computing perturbations to the orbit Lifetime estimates the decay date of the satellite the total lifetime from the satellite s epoch and the number of orbits completed by the time of decay The orbital elements over the life of the satellite can also be shown in graph and report formats Within Lifetime only long term changes to the satellite s orbit are considered short period variations are assumed to average out and therefore aren t included in the calculations As a result Lifetime isn t well suited for the investigation of the short term behavior of satellite orbits or perturbations to the orbital elements over a single revolution A satellite s orbit is allowed to decay due to atmospheric and gravitational perturbations with no consideration given to propulsive thrust or changes in attitude that could result in the addition of energy to the orbit Lifetime is currently limited to the analysis of Earth orbiting satellites Although there is no upper limit to the altitude of a satellite that can be analyzed by Lifetime the calculations may not be sensitive enough to decay a satellite with a perigee altitude greater than 2500 km User inputs include the satellite s physical characteristics mass area and drag and reflection coefficients In ad

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  CCTV Assemblies - BTX Technologies  le memoire professionnel en iufm, document "temoin"  PROFIBUS POSITIONER CD1-pm Installation manual  Manuale di installazione  ALICIA FRAMIS  Toad Data Modeler 3.4.15 Installation Guide  Sony XR-C900RDS User's Manual  Demonstration Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file